View 68HC11_166499.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

M68HC11E Family
Technical Data
M68HC11
Microcontrollers
M68HC11E/D Rev. 4, 7/2002
WWW.MOTOROLA.COM/SEMICONDUCTORS
MC68HC11E Family
Technical Data
To provide the most up-to-date information, the revision of our documents on the World Wide Web will be the most current. Your printed copy may be an earlier revision. To verify you have the latest information available, refer to: http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/ The following revision history table summarizes changes contained in this document. For your convenience, the page number designators have been linked to the appropriate location.
Motorola and the Stylized M Logo are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc. DigitalDNA is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.
(c) Motorola, Inc., 2002
H8%'C8
@AAhvyAASrA#
AUrpuvphyA9hh
HPUPSPG6
A"
SrvvACv
Revision History
Date Revision Level 3.1 Description 4.4.3.1 System Configuration Register -- Addition to NOCOP bit description Added 11.22 EPROM Characteristics June, 2001 December, 2001 3.2 3.3 11.22 EPROM Characteristics -- For clarity, addition to note 2 following the table 7.8.2 Serial Communications Control Register 1 -- SCCR1 bit 4 (M) description corrected 11.8 MC68L11E9/E20 DC Electrical Characteristics -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 11.9 MC68L11E9/E20 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 11.11 MC68L11E9/E20 Control Timing -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 11.13 MC68L11E9/E20 Peripheral Port Timing -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 July, 2002 4 11.15 MC68L11E9/E20 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 11.17 MC68L11E9/E20 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 11.19 MC68L11E9/E20 Serial Peirpheral Interface Characteristics -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 11.21 MC68L11E9/E20 EEPROM Characteristics -- Title changed to include the MC68L11E20 13.5 Extended Voltage Device Ordering Information (3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc) -- Updated table to include MC68L1120 Page Number(s) 88 251 251 153 226 227 230 236 241 244 247 250 267
May, 2001
UrpuvphyA9hh
H8%'C8
@AAhvyAASrA#
#
HPUPSPG6
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
List of Sections
Section 1. General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Section 2. Pin Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Section 3. Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory . . . . 65 Section 5. Resets and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports . . . . . . . . . 133 Section 7. Serial Communications Interface (SCI) . . . . 145 Section 8. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). . . . . . . . . . 165 Section 9. Timing System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter . . . . . . . 209 Section 11. Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Section 12. Mechanical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Section 13. Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Appendix A. Development Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Appendix B. EVBU Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA List of Sections
Technical Data 5
List of Sections AN1060 -- M68HC11 Bootstrap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 EB184 -- Enabling the Security Feature on the MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 EB188 -- Enabling the Security Feature on M68HC811E2 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 EB296 -- Programming MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 and the M68HC11EVBU . . . . . . . . . 331
Technical Data 6 List of Sections
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Table of Contents
Section 1. General Description
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Section 2. Pin Descriptions
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 VDD and VSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Crystal Driver and External Clock Input (XTAL and EXTAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 E-Clock Output (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Interrupt Request (IRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Non-Maskable Interrupt (XIRQ/VPPE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 MODA and MODB (MODA/LIR and MODB/VSTBY) . . . . . . . . . 37 VRL and VRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 STRA/AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 STRB/R/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.13 Port Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2.13.1 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2.13.2 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2.13.3 Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2.13.4 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2.13.5 Port E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Table of Contents Technical Data 7
Table of Contents Section 3. Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3.1 3.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3 CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.3.1 Accumulators A, B, and D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 3.3.2 Index Register X (IX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.3.3 Index Register Y (IY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.3.4 Stack Pointer (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.3.5 Program Counter (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 3.3.6 Condition Code Register (CCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.3.6.1 Carry/Borrow (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.3.6.2 Overflow (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.3.6.3 Zero (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 3.3.6.4 Negative (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 3.3.6.5 Interrupt Mask (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 3.3.6.6 Half Carry (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 3.3.6.7 X Interrupt Mask (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 3.3.6.8 STOP Disable (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 3.4 3.5 Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Opcodes and Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.6 Addressing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3.6.1 Immediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3.6.2 Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.3 Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.4 Indexed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.5 Inherent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.6 Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 3.7 Instruction Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Technical Data 8 Table of Contents
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
4.1 4.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.3 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 4.3.1 Single-Chip Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 4.3.2 Expanded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 4.3.3 Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 4.3.4 Bootstrap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.4 Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 4.4.1 RAM and Input/Output Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 4.4.2 Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 4.4.3 System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 4.4.3.1 System Configuration Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.4.3.2 RAM and I/O Mapping Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 4.4.3.3 System Configuration Options Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 4.5 EPROM/OTPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 4.5.1 Programming an Individual EPROM Address . . . . . . . . . . . 93 4.5.2 Programming the EPROM with Downloaded Data. . . . . . . . 94 4.5.3 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 4.6 EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 4.6.1 EEPROM and CONFIG Programming and Erasure. . . . . . . 98 4.6.1.1 Block Protect Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 4.6.1.2 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 4.6.1.3 EEPROM Bulk Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4.6.1.4 EEPROM Row Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4.6.1.5 EEPROM Byte Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 4.6.1.6 CONFIG Register Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 4.6.2 EEPROM Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Technical Data 9
Table of Contents Section 5. Resets and Interrupts
5.1 5.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.3 Resets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 5.3.1 Power-On Reset (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 5.3.2 External Reset (RESET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 5.3.3 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 5.3.4 Clock Monitor Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 5.3.5 System Configuration Options Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 5.3.6 Configuration Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5.4 Effects of Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 5.4.1 Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.4.2 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.4.3 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.4.4 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.5 Pulse Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.6 Computer Operating Properly (COP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.7 Serial Communications Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.4.9 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.4.10 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.5 Reset and Interrupt Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.5.1 Highest Priority Interrupt and Miscellaneous Register . . . . 119 5.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 5.6.1 Interrupt Recognition and Register Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . 122 5.6.2 Non-Maskable Interrupt Request (XIRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 5.6.3 Illegal Opcode Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 5.6.4 Software Interrupt (SWI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.5 Maskable Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.6 Reset and Interrupt Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.7 Low-Power Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 5.7.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 5.7.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Technical Data 10 Table of Contents
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Port E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Handshake Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Parallel I/O Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Section 7. Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Transmit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.6 Wakeup Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 7.6.1 Idle-Line Wakeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 7.6.2 Address-Mark Wakeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 7.7 SCI Error Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
7.8 SCI Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 7.8.1 Serial Communications Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 7.8.2 Serial Communications Control Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 7.8.3 Serial Communications Control Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 7.8.4 Serial Communication Status Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 7.8.5 Baud Rate Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 7.9 7.10 Status Flags and Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Receiver Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Technical Data 11
Table of Contents Section 8. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 SPI Transfer Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.6 SPI Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 8.6.1 Master In/Slave Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.6.2 Master Out/Slave In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.6.3 Serial Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.6.4 Slave Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.7 SPI System Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.8 SPI Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 8.8.1 Serial Peripheral Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 8.8.2 Serial Peripheral Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 8.8.3 Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Section 9. Timing System
9.1 9.2 9.3 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Timer Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9.4 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 9.4.1 Timer Control Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 9.4.2 Timer Input Capture Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 9.4.3 Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Register . . . . . . 186 9.5 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 9.5.1 Timer Output Compare Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 9.5.2 Timer Compare Force Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 9.5.3 Output Compare Mask Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 9.5.4 Output Compare Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 9.5.5 Timer Counter Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 9.5.6 Timer Control Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 9.5.7 Timer Interrupt Mask 1 Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 9.5.8 Timer Interrupt Flag 1 Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Technical Data 12 Table of Contents MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
9.5.9 9.5.10
Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
9.6 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 9.6.1 Timer Interrupt Mask Register 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 9.6.2 Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 9.6.3 Pulse Accumulator Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 9.7 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Watchdog Function . . . 203
9.8 Pulse Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 9.8.1 Pulse Accumulator Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 9.8.2 Pulse Accumulator Count Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 9.8.3 Pulse Accumulator Status and Interrupt Bits . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
10.1 10.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10.3 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 10.3.1 Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 10.3.2 Analog Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 10.3.3 Digital Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 10.3.4 Result Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 10.3.5 A/D Converter Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 10.3.6 Conversion Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 A/D Converter Power-Up and Clock Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Conversion Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Channel Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Single-Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Multiple-Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Operation in Stop and Wait Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
10.10 A/D Control/Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 10.11 A/D Converter Result Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Technical Data 13
Table of Contents Section 11. Electrical Characteristics
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Maximum Ratings for Standard and Extended Voltage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Functional Operating Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 DC Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 MC68L11E9/E20 DC Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 226 MC68L11E9/E20 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation. . . 227
11.10 Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 11.11 MC68L11E9/E20 Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 11.12 Peripheral Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 11.13 MC68L11E9/E20 Peripheral Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 11.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 11.15 MC68L11E9/E20 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 11.16 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 11.17 MC68L11E9/E20 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics. . . . 244 11.18 Serial Peripheral Interface Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . .246 11.19 MC68L11E9/E20 Serial Peirpheral Interface Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 11.20 EEPROM Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 11.21 MC68L11E9/E20 EEPROM Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 11.22 EPROM Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Technical Data 14 Table of Contents
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Table of Contents
Section 12. Mechanical Data
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 52-Pin Plastic-Leaded Chip Carrier (Case 778) . . . . . . . . . . . 254 52-Pin Windowed Ceramic-Leaded Chip Carrier (Case 778B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 64-Pin Quad Flat Pack (Case 840C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 52-Pin Thin Quad Flat Pack (Case 848D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 56-Pin Dual in-Line Package (Case #859) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 48-Pin Plastic DIP (Case 767) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Section 13. Ordering Information
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Standard Device Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Custom ROM Device Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Extended Voltage Device Ordering Information (3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Appendix A. Development Support
A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Motorola M68HC11 E-Series Development Tools . . . . . . . . .270 EVS -- Evaluation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Motorola Modular Development System (MMDS11) . . . . . . . 271 SPGMR11 -- Serial Programmer for M68HC11 MCUs . . . . .273
Appendix B. EVBU Schematic
M68HC11EVBU Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Table of Contents Technical Data 15
Table of Contents AN1060
AN1060 -- M68HC11 Bootstrap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
EB184
EB184 -- Enabling the Security Feature on the MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR 323
EB188
EB188 -- Enabling the Security Feature on M68HC811E2 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR . . . . . . . . . 327
EB296
EB296 -- Programming MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 and the M68HC11EVBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Technical Data 16 Table of Contents
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 3-1 3-2 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12
Title
Page
M68HC11 E-Series Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Pin Assignments for 52-Pin PLCC and CLCC . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Pin Assignments for 64-Pin QFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Pin Assignments for 52-Pin TQFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Pin Assignments for 56-Pin SDIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Pin Assignments for 48-Pin DIP (MC68HC811E2). . . . . . . . . 32 External Reset Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 External Reset Circuit with Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Common Parallel Resonant Crystal Connections . . . . . . . . . 35 External Oscillator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Programming Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Stacking Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Address/Data Demultiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Memory Map for MC68HC11E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Memory Map for MC68HC11E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Memory Map for MC68HC(7)11E9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Memory Map for MC68HC(7)11E20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Memory Map for MC68HC811E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Register and Control Bit Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 RAM Standby MODB/VSTBY Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Highest Priority I-Bit Interrupt and Miscellaneous Register (HPRIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 System Configuration Register (CONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 MC68HC811E2 System Configuration Register (CONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 RAM and I/O Mapping Register (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA List of Figures
Technical Data 17
List of Figures
Figure 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 Title Page
System Configuration Options Register (OPTION) . . . . . . . . 91 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register (PPROG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 MC68HC711E20 EPROM Programming Control Register (EPROG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Block Protect Register (BPROT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register (PPROG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Arm/Reset COP Timer Circuitry Register (COPRST). . . . . . 111 System Configuration Options Register (OPTION) . . . . . . . 112 Configuration Control Register (CONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Highest Priority I-Bit Interrupt and Miscellaneous Register (HPRIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Processing Flow Out of Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Interrupt Priority Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Interrupt Source Resolution Within SCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Port A Data Register (PORTA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Port B Data Register (PORTB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Port C Data Register (PORTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Port C Latched Register (PORTCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Port C Data Direction Register (DDRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Port D Data Register (PORTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Port D Data Direction Register (DDRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Port E Data Register (PORTE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Parallel I/O Control Register (PIOC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 SCI Transmitter Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 SCI Receiver Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Serial Communications Data Register (SCDR) . . . . . . . . . . 152 Serial Communications Control Register 1 (SCCR1) . . . . . . 153 Serial Communications Control Register 2 (SCCR2) . . . . . . 154 Serial Communications Status Register (SCSR) . . . . . . . . .155 Baud Rate Register (BAUD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 List of Figures MOTOROLA
5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7
Technical Data 18
List of Figures
Figure 7-8 7-9 7-10 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA List of Figures
Title
Page
SCI Baud Rate Generator Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 MC68HC(7)11E20 SCI Baud Rate Generator Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Interrupt Source Resolution Within SCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 SPI Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 SPI Transfer Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Serial Peripheral Control Register (SPCR). . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Serial Peripheral Status Register (SPSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register (SPDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Timer Clock Divider Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Capture/Compare Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Timer Control Register 2 (TCTL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Timer Input Capture 1 Register Pair (TIC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Timer Input Capture 2 Register Pair (TIC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Timer Input Capture 3 Register Pair (TIC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Register Pair (TI4/O5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Timer Output Compare 1 Register Pair (TOC1) . . . . . . . . . . 188 Timer Output Compare 2 Register Pair (TOC2) . . . . . . . . . . 188 Timer Output Compare 3 Register Pair (TOC3) . . . . . . . . . . 189 Timer Output Compare 4 Register Pair (TOC4) . . . . . . . . . . 189 Timer Compare Force Register (CFORC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Output Compare 1 Mask Register (OC1M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Output Compare 1 Data Register (OC1D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Timer Counter Register (TCNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Timer Control Register 1 (TCTL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Timer Interrupt Mask 1 Register (TMSK1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Timer Interrupt Flag 1 Register (TFLG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register (TMSK2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Timer Interrupt Flag 2 Register (TFLG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register (TMSK2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Timer Interrupt Flag 2 Register (TFLG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Pulse Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Technical Data 19
List of Figures
Figure 9-25 9-26 9-27 9-28 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 Title Page
Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Pulse Accumulator Count Register (PACNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register (TMSK2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Timer Interrupt Flag 2 Register (TFLG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 A/D Converter Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Electrical Model of an A/D Input Pin (Sample Mode) . . . . . . 211 A/D Conversion Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 System Configuration Options Register (OPTION) . . . . . . . 214 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Analog-to-Digital Converter Result Registers (ADR1-ADR4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Test Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Timer Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 POR External Reset Timing Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 STOP Recovery Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 WAIT Recovery from Interrupt Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 233 Interrupt Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Port Read Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Port Write Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Simple Input Strobe Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Simple Output Strobe Timing Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Port C Input Handshake Timing Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Port C Output Handshake Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 3-State Variation of Output Handshake Timing Diagram (STRA Enables Output Buffer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Multiplexed Expansion Bus Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 SPI Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 EVBU Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
11-1 11-2 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 11-11 11-12 11-13 11-14 11-15 B-1
Technical Data 20 List of Figures
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
List of Tables
Table 2-1 3-1 3-2 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 6-1 6-2 7-1 8-1 9-1 9-2
Title
Page
Port Signal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Reset Vector Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Instruction Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Hardware Mode Select Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Write Access Limited Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 EEPROM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 RAM Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Register Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 EEPROM Block Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 EEPROM Block Protect in MC68HC811E2 MCUs . . . . . . . . .100 EEPROM Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 COP Timer Rate Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Reset Cause, Reset Vector, and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . .114 Highest Priority Interrupt Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Interrupt and Reset Vector Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Stacking Order on Entry to Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Input/Output Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Parallel I/O Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Baud Rate Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 SPI Clock Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Timer Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Timer Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA List of Tables
Technical Data 21
List of Tables
Table 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 10-1 10-2 Title Page
Timer Output Compare Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Timer Prescale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 RTI Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Pulse Accumulator Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Pulse Accumulator Edge Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Converter Channel Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 A/D Converter Channel Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Technical Data 22 List of Tables
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 1. General Description
1.1 Contents
1.2 1.3 1.4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.2 Introduction
This document contains a detailed description of the M68HC11 E series of 8-bit microcontroller units (MCUs). These MCUs all combine the M68HC11 central processor unit (CPU) with high-performance, on-chip peripherals. The E series is comprised of many devices with various configurations of: * * * * * Random-access memory (RAM) Read-only memory (ROM) Erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) Several low-voltage devices are also available.
With the exception of a few minor differences, the operation of all E-series MCUs is identical. A fully static design and high-density complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (HCMOS) fabrication process allow the E-series devices to operate at frequencies from 3 MHz to dc with very low power consumption.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA General Description
Technical Data 23
General Description 1.3 Features
Features of the E-series devices include: * * * * * * * * * * * * M68HC11 CPU Power-saving stop and wait modes Low-voltage devices available (3.0-5.5 Vdc) 0, 256, 512, or 768 bytes of on-chip RAM, data retained during standby 0, 12, or 20 Kbytes of on-chip ROM or EPROM 0, 512, or 2048 bytes of on-chip EEPROM with block protect for security 2048 bytes of EEPROM with selectable base address in the MC68HC811E2 Asynchronous non-return-to-zero (NRZ) serial communications interface (SCI) Additional baud rates available on MC68HC(7)11E20 Synchronous serial peripheral interface (SPI) 8-channel, 8-bit analog-to-digital (A/D) converter 16-bit timer system: - Three input capture (IC) channels - Four output compare (OC) channels - One additional channel, selectable as fourth IC or fifth OC * * * * 8-bit pulse accumulator Real-time interrupt circuit Computer operating properly (COP) watchdog system 38 general-purpose input/output (I/O) pins: - 16 bidirectional I/O pins - 11 input-only pins - 11 output-only pins
Technical Data 24 General Description
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
General Description Structure
*
Several packaging options: - 52-pin plastic-leaded chip carrier (PLCC) - 52-pin windowed ceramic leaded chip carrier (CLCC) - 52-pin plastic thin quad flat pack, 10 mm x 10 mm (TQFP) - 64-pin quad flat pack (QFP) - 48-pin plastic dual in-line package (DIP), MC68HC811E2 only - 56-pin plastic shrink dual in-line package, .070-inch lead spacing (SDIP)
1.4 Structure
See Figure 1-1 for a functional diagram of the E-series MCUs. Differences among devices are noted in the table accompanying Figure 1-1.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA General Description
Technical Data 25
General Description
MODA/ MODB/ LIR VSTBY
XTAL EXTAL
E
IRQ
XIRQ/VPPE* RESET
OSC MODE CONTROL CLOCK LOGIC
INTERRUPT LOGIC
ROM OR EPROM (SEE TABLE)
PULSE ACCUMULATOR COP PAI OC2 OC3 OC4 OC5/IC4/OC1 IC1 IC2 PERIODIC INTERRUPT IC3 TIMER SYSTEM
M68HC11 CPU
EEPROM (SEE TABLE) RAM (SEE TABLE)
R/W AS
BUS EXPANSION ADDRESS
ADDRESS/DATA
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE SPI
SERIAL COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SCI
VDD VSS
STRB STRA
SS SCK MOSI MISO
TxD RxD
STROBE AND HANDSHAKE PARALLEL I/O
VRH VRL A/D CONVERTER
CONTROL PORT A PORT B PORT C
CONTROL PORT D PORT E
PA7/PAI PA6/OC2/OC1 PA5/OC3/OC1 PA4/OC4/OC1 PA3/OC5/IC4/OC1 PA2/IC1 PA1/IC2 PA0/IC3
PD5/SS PD4/SCK PD3/MOSI PD2/MISO PD1/TxD PD0/RxD RAM 512 512 512 512 768 768 256 ROM -- -- 12 K -- 20 K -- --
STRA/AS
PB7/ADDR15 PB6/ADDR14 PB5/ADDR13 PB4/ADDR12 PB3/ADDR11 PB2/ADDR10 PB1/ADDR9 PB0/ADDR8
PC7/ADDR7/DATA7 PC6/ADDR6/DATA6 PC5/ADDR5/DATA5 PC4/ADDR4/DATA4 PC3/ADDR3/DATA3 PC2/ADDR2/DATA2 PC1/ADDR1/DATA1 PC0/ADDR0/DATA0
STRB/R/W
DEVICE MC68HC11E0 MC68HC11E1 MC68HC11E9 MC68HC711E9 MC68HC11E20 MC68HC711E20 MC68HC811E2 * VPPE applies only to devices with EPROM/OTPROM.
Figure 1-1. M68HC11 E-Series Block Diagram
Technical Data 26 General Description
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
PE7/AN7 PE6/AN6 PE5/AN5 PE4/AN4 PE3/AN3 PE2/AN2 PE1/AN1 PE0/AN0 EPROM -- -- -- 12 K -- 20 K -- EEPROM -- 512 512 512 512 512 2048
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 2. Pin Descriptions
2.1 Contents
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 VDD and VSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Crystal Driver and External Clock Input (XTAL and EXTAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 E-Clock Output (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Interrupt Request (IRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Non-Maskable Interrupt (XIRQ/VPPE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 MODA and MODB (MODA/LIR and MODB/VSTBY) . . . . . . . . . 37 VRL and VRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 STRA/AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 STRB/R/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.13 Port Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2.13.1 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 2.13.2 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2.13.3 Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2.13.4 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2.13.5 Port E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 27
Pin Descriptions 2.2 Introduction
M68HC11 E-series MCUs are available packaged in: * * * * * * 52-pin plastic-leaded chip carrier (PLCC) 52-pin windowed ceramic leaded chip carrier (CLCC) 52-pin plastic thin quad flat pack, 10 mm x 10 mm (TQFP) 64-pin quad flat pack (QFP) 48-pin plastic dual in-line package (DIP), MC68HC811E2 only 56-pin plastic shrink dual in-line package, .070-inch lead spacing (SDIP)
Most pins on these MCUs serve two or more functions, as described in the following paragraphs. Refer to Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, and Figure 2-5 which show the M68HC11 E-series pin assignments for the PLCC/CLCC, QFP, TQFP, SDIP, and DIP packages.
2 MODB/VSTBY 6 STRB/R/W 3 MODA/LIR 4 STRA/AS 50 PE7/AN7 49 PE3/AN3 48 PE6/AN6 47 PE2/AN2 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 PA6/OC2/OC1 PA5/OC3/OC1 PA4/OC4/OC1 PA7/PAI/OC1 PA3/OC5/IC4/OC1 PA2/IC1 PD3/MOSI PD2/MISO PD4/SCK PD1/TxD PA1/IC2 PD5/SS VDD 33 PE5/AN5 PE1/AN1 PE4/AN4 PE0/AN0 PB0/ADDR8 PB1/ADDR9 PB2/ADDR10 PB3/ADDR11 PB4/ADDR12 PB5/ADDR13 PB6/ADDR14 PB7/ADDR15 PA0/IC3
7 EXTAL
52 VRH
VSS 1
XTAL PC0/ADDR0/DATA0 PC1/ADDR1/DATA1 PC2/ADDR2/DATA2 PC3/ADDR3/DATA3 PC4/ADDR4/DATA4 PC5/ADDR5/DATA5 PC6/ADDR6/DATA6 PC7/ADDR7/DATA7 RESET * XIRQ/VPPE IRQ PD0/RxD
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M68HC11 E SERIES
* VPPE applies only to devices with EPROM/OTPROM.
Figure 2-1. Pin Assignments for 52-Pin PLCC and CLCC
Technical Data 28 Pin Descriptions MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
51 VRL
5E
Pin Descriptions Introduction
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
PA0/IC3 NC NC NC PB7/ADDR15 PB6/ADDR14 PB5/ADDR13 PB4/ADDR12 PB3/ADDR11 PB2/ADDR10 PB1/ADDR9 PB0/ADDR8 PE0/AN0 PE4/AN4 PE1/AN1 PE5/AN5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
PA1/IC2 PA2/IC1 PA3/OC5/IC4/OC1 NC NC PA4/OC4/OC1 PA5/OC3/OC1 PA6/OC2/OC1 PA7/PAI/OC1 VDD PD5/SS PD4/SCK PD3/MOSI PD2/MISO PD1/TxD VSS
* VPPE applies only to devices with EPROM/OTPROM.
Figure 2-2. Pin Assignments for 64-Pin QFP
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
PE2/AN2 PE6/AN6 PE3/AN3 PE7/AN7 VRL VRH VSS VSS MODB/VSTBY NC MODA/LIR STRA/AS E STRB/R/W EXTAL NC
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
M68HC11 E SERIES
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
NC PD0/RxD IRQ XIRQ/VPPE* NC RESET PC7/ADDR7/DATA7 PC6/ADDR6/DATA6 PC5/ADDR5/DATA5 PC4/ADDR4/DATA4 PC3/ADDR3/DATA3 PC2/ADDR2/DATA2 PC1/ADDR1/DATA1 NC PC0/ADDR0/DATA0 XTAL
Technical Data 29
Pin Descriptions
52 51 50 49 48 47 46 PA0/IC3 PB7/ADDR15 PB6/ADDR14 PB5/ADDR13 PB4/ADDR12 PB3/ADDR11 PB2/ADDR10 PB1/ADDR9 PB0/ADDR8 PE0/AN0 PE4/AN4 PE1/AN1 PE5/AN5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
45 44 43 42 41 40
PA1/IC2 PA2/IC1 PA3/OC5/IC4/OC1 PA4/OC4/OC1 PA5/OC3/OC1 PA6/OC2/OC1 PA7/PAI/OC1 VDD PD5/SS PD4/SCK PD3/MOSI PD2/MISO PD1/TxD
M68HC11 E SERIES
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27
PD0/RxD IRQ XIRQ/VPPE* RESET PC7/ADDR7/DATA7 PC6/ADDR6/DATA6 PC5/ADDR5/DATA5 PC4/ADDR4/DATA4 PC3/ADDR3/DATA3 PC2/ADDR2/DATA2 PC1/ADDR1/DATA1 PC0/ADDR0/DATA0 XTAL
* VPPE applies only to devices with EPROM/OTPROM.
Figure 2-3. Pin Assignments for 52-Pin TQFP
Technical Data 30 Pin Descriptions
PE2/AN2 PE6/AN6 PE3/AN3 PE7/AN7 VRL VRH VSS MODB/VSTBY MODA/LIR STRA/AS E STRB/R/W EXTAL
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Pin Descriptions Introduction
VSS MODB/VSTBY MODA/LIR STRA/AS E STRB/R/W EXTAL XTAL PC0/ADDR0/DATA0 PC1/ADDR1/DATA1 PC2/ADDR2/DATA2 PC3/ADDR3/DATA3 PC4/ADDR4/DATA4 PC5/ADDR5/DATA5 PC6/ADDR6/DATA6 PC7/ADDR7/DATA7 RESET * XIRQ/VPPE IRQ PD0/RxD EVSS PD1/TxD PD2/MISO PD3/MOSI PD4/SCK PD5/SS VDD VSS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
EVSS VRH VRL PE7/AN7 PE3/AN3 PE6/AN6 PE2/AN2 PE5/AN5 PE1/AN1 PE4/AN4 PE0/AN0 PB0/ADDR8 PB1/ADDR9 PB2/ADDR10 PB3/ADDR11 PB4/ADDR12 PB5/ADDR13 PB6/ADDR14 PB7/ADDR15 PA0/IC3 PA1/IC2 PA2/IC1 PA3/OC5/IC4/OC1 PA4/OC4/OC1 PA5/OC3/OC1 PA6/OC2/OC1 PA7/PAI/OC1 EVDD
M68HC11 E SERIES 42
41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29
* V PPE applies only to devices with EPROM/OTPROM.
Figure 2-4. Pin Assignments for 56-Pin SDIP
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 31
Pin Descriptions
PA7/PAI/OC1 PA6/OC2/OC1 PA5/OC3/OC1 PA4/OC4/OC1 PA3/OC5/IC4/OC1 PA2/IC1 PA1/IC2 PA0/IC3 PB7/ADDR15 PB6/ADDR14 PB5/ADDR13 PB4/ADDR12 PB3/ADDR11 PB2/ADDR10 PB1/ADDR9 PB0/ADDR8 PE0/AN0 PE1/AN1 PE2/AN2 PE3/AN3 VRL VRH VSS MODB/VSTBY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38
VDD PD5/SS PD4/SCK PD3/MOSI PD2/MISO PD1/TxD PD0/RxD IRQ XIRQ RESET PC7/ADDR7/DATA7 PC6/ADDR6/DATA6 PC5/ADDR5/DATA5 PC4/ADDR4/DATA4 PC3/ADDR3/DATA3 PC2/ADDR2/DATA2 PC1/ADDR1/DATA1 PC0/ADDR0/DATA0 XTAL EXTAL STRB/R/W E STRA/AS MODA/LIR
MC68HC811E2
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Figure 2-5. Pin Assignments for 48-Pin DIP (MC68HC811E2)
2.3 VDD and VSS
Power is supplied to the MCU through VDD and VSS. VDD is the power supply, VSS is ground. The MCU operates from a single 5-volt (nominal) power supply. Low-voltage devices in the E series operate at 3.0-5.5 volts. Very fast signal transitions occur on the MCU pins. The short rise and fall times place high, short duration current demands on the power supply. To prevent noise problems, provide good power supply bypassing at the MCU. Also, use bypass capacitors that have good
Technical Data 32 Pin Descriptions
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Pin Descriptions VDD and VSS
high-frequency characteristics and situate them as close to the MCU as possible. Bypass requirements vary, depending on how heavily the MCU pins are loaded.
VDD VDD
2 IN RESET MC34(0/1)64 GND 3 1
4.7 k
TO RESET OF M68HC11
Figure 2-6. External Reset Circuit
VDD
VDD
IN RESET MC34064 GND
4.7 k
TO RESET OF M68HC11
VDD
MANUAL RESET SWITCH 4.7 k
4.7 k
1.0 F IN RESET MC34164 GND
OPTIONAL POWER-ON DELAY AND MANUAL RESET SWITCH
Figure 2-7. External Reset Circuit with Delay
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 33
Pin Descriptions 2.4 RESET
A bidirectional control signal, RESET, acts as an input to initialize the MCU to a known startup state. It also acts as an open-drain output to indicate that an internal failure has been detected in either the clock monitor or computer operating properly (COP) watchdog circuit. The CPU distinguishes between internal and external reset conditions by sensing whether the reset pin rises to a logic 1 in less than two E-clock cycles after a reset has occurred. See Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7.
CAUTION:
Do not connect an external resistor capacitor (RC) power-up delay circuit to the reset pin of M68HC11 devices because the circuit charge time constant can cause the device to misinterpret the type of reset that occurred. Because the CPU is not able to fetch and execute instructions properly when VDD falls below the minimum operating voltage level, reset must be controlled. A low-voltage inhibit (LVI) circuit is required primarily for protection of EEPROM contents. However, since the configuration register (CONFIG) value is read from the EEPROM, protection is required even if the EEPROM array is not being used. Presently, there are several economical ways to solve this problem. For example, two good external components for LVI reset are: 1. The Seiko S0854HN (or other S805 series devices): -- Extremely low power (2 A) -- TO-92 package -- Limited temperature range, -20C to +70C -- Available in various trip-point voltage ranges 2. The Motorola MC34064: -- TO-92 or SO-8 package -- Draws about 300 A -- Temperature range -40C to 85C -- Well controlled trip point -- Inexpensive Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts for further information.
Technical Data 34 Pin Descriptions
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Pin Descriptions Crystal Driver and External Clock Input (XTAL and EXTAL)
2.5 Crystal Driver and External Clock Input (XTAL and EXTAL)
These two pins provide the interface for either a crystal or a CMOScompatible clock to control the internal clock generator circuitry. The frequency applied to these pins is four times higher than the desired E-clock rate. The XTAL pin must be left unterminated when an external CMOScompatible clock input is connected to the EXTAL pin. The XTAL output is normally intended to drive only a crystal.
CAUTION:
In all cases, use caution around the oscillator pins. Load capacitances shown in the oscillator circuit are specified by the crystal manufacturer and should include all stray layout capacitances. Refer to Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9.
CL EXTAL
MCU
XTAL
10 M
4xE CRYSTAL CL
Figure 2-8. Common Parallel Resonant Crystal Connections
EXTAL
4xE CMOS-COMPATIBLE EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR
MCU
XTAL NC
Figure 2-9. External Oscillator Connections
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 35
Pin Descriptions 2.6 E-Clock Output (E)
E is the output connection for the internally generated E clock. The signal from E is used as a timing reference. The frequency of the E-clock output is one fourth that of the input frequency at the XTAL and EXTAL pins. When E-clock output is low, an internal process is taking place. When it is high, data is being accessed. All clocks, including the E clock, are halted when the MCU is in stop mode. To reduce RFI emissions, the E-clock output of most E-series devices can be disabled while operating in single-chip modes. The E-clock signal is always enabled on the MC68HC811E2.
2.7 Interrupt Request (IRQ)
The IRQ input provides a means of applying asynchronous interrupt requests to the MCU. Either negative edge-sensitive triggering or level-sensitive triggering is program selectable (OPTION register). IRQ is always configured to level-sensitive triggering at reset. When using IRQ in a level-sensitive wired-OR configuration, connect an external pullup resistor, typically 4.7 k, to VDD.
2.8 Non-Maskable Interrupt (XIRQ/VPPE)
The XIRQ input provides a means of requesting a non-maskable interrupt after reset initialization. During reset, the X bit in the condition code register (CCR) is set and any interrupt is masked until MCU software enables it. Because the XIRQ input is level-sensitive, it can be connected to a multiple-source wired-OR network with an external pullup resistor to VDD. XIRQ is often used as a power loss detect interrupt. Whenever XIRQ or IRQ is used with multiple interrupt sources each source must drive the interrupt input with an open-drain type of driver to avoid contention between outputs.
NOTE:
IRQ must be configured for level-sensitive operation if there is more than one source of IRQ interrupt.
Technical Data 36 Pin Descriptions
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Pin Descriptions MODA and MODB (MODA/LIR and MODB/VSTBY)
There should be a single pullup resistor near the MCU interrupt input pin (typically 4.7 k). There must also be an interlock mechanism at each interrupt source so that the source holds the interrupt line low until the MCU recognizes and acknowledges the interrupt request. If one or more interrupt sources are still pending after the MCU services a request, the interrupt line will still be held low and the MCU will be interrupted again as soon as the interrupt mask bit in the MCU is cleared (normally upon return from an interrupt). Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts. VPPE is the input for the 12-volt nominal programming voltage required for EPROM/OTPROM programming. On devices without EPROM/OTPROM, this pin is only an XIRQ input.
2.9 MODA and MODB (MODA/LIR and MODB/VSTBY)
During reset, MODA and MODB select one of the four operating modes: * * * * Single-chip mode Expanded mode Test mode Bootstrap mode
Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory. After the operating mode has been selected, the load instruction register (LIR) pin provides an open-drain output to indicate that execution of an instruction has begun. A series of E-clock cycles occurs during execution of each instruction. The LIR signal goes low during the first E-clock cycle of each instruction (opcode fetch). This output is provided for assistance in program debugging. The VSTBY pin is used to input random-access memory (RAM) standby power. When the voltage on this pin is more than one MOS threshold (about 0.7 volts) above the VDD voltage, the internal RAM and part of the reset logic are powered from this signal rather than the VDD input. This allows RAM contents to be retained without VDD power applied to the MCU. Reset must be driven low before VDD is removed and must remain low until VDD has been restored to a valid level.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions Technical Data 37
Pin Descriptions 2.10 VRL and VRH
These two inputs provide the reference voltages for the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter circuitry: * * VRL is the low reference, typically 0 Vdc. VRH is the high reference.
For proper A/D converter operation: * * VRH should be at least 3 Vdc greater than VRL. VRL and VRH should be between VSS and VDD.
2.11 STRA/AS
The strobe A (STRA) and address strobe (AS) pin performs either of two separate functions, depending on the operating mode: * * In single-chip mode, STRA performs an input handshake (strobe input) function. In the expanded multiplexed mode, AS provides an address strobe function.
AS can be used to demultiplex the address and data signals at port C. Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory.
2.12 STRB/R/W
The strobe B (STRB) and read/write (R/W) pin act as either an output strobe or as a data bus direction indicator, depending on the operating mode. In single-chip operating mode, STRB acts as a programmable strobe for handshake with other parallel devices. Refer to Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports for further information. In expanded multiplexed operating mode, R/W is used to indicate the direction of transfers on the external data bus. A low on the R/W pin indicates data is being written to the external data bus. A high on this pin
Technical Data 38 Pin Descriptions MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Pin Descriptions Port Signals
indicates that a read cycle is in progress. R/W stays low during consecutive data bus write cycles, such as a double-byte store. It is possible for data to be driven out of port C, if internal read visibility (IRV) is enabled and an internal address is read, even though R/W is in a high-impedance state. Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory for more information about IRVNE (internal read visibility not E).
2.13 Port Signals
Port pins have different functions in different operating modes. Pin functions for port A, port D, and port E are independent of operating modes. Port B and port C, however, are affected by operating mode. Port B provides eight general-purpose output signals in single-chip operating modes. When the microcontroller is in expanded multiplexed operating mode, port B pins are the eight high-order address lines. Port C provides eight general-purpose input/output signals when the MCU is in the single-chip operating mode. When the microcontroller is in the expanded multiplexed operating mode, port C pins are a multiplexed address/data bus. Refer to Table 2-1 for a functional description of the 40 port signals within different operating modes. Terminate unused inputs and input/output (I/O) pins configured as inputs high or low.
2.13.1 Port A In all operating modes, port A can be configured for three timer input capture (IC) functions and four timer output compare (OC) functions. An additional pin can be configured as either the fourth IC or the fifth OC. Any port A pin that is not currently being used for a timer function can be used as either a general-purpose input or output line. Only port A pins PA7 and PA3 have an associated data direction control bit that allows the pin to be selectively configured as input or output. Bits DDRA7 and DDRA3 located in PACTL register control data direction for PA7 and PA3, respectively. All other port A pins are fixed as either input or output.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 39
Pin Descriptions
Table 2-1. Port Signal Functions
Port/Bit PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PA6 PA7 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 -- -- PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PE7 Single-Chip and Bootstrap Modes Expanded and Test Modes
PA0/IC3 PA1/IC2 PA2/IC1 PA3/OC5/IC4/OC1 PA4/OC4/OC1 PA5/OC3/OC1 PA6/OC2/OC1 PA7/PAI/OC1 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PD0/RxD PD1/TxD PD2/MISO PD3/MOSI PD4/SCK PD5/SS STRA STRB PE0/AN0 PE1/AN1 PE3/AN2 PE3/AN3 PE4/AN4 PE5/AN5 PE6/AN6 PE7/AN7 AS R/W ADDR8 ADDR9 ADDR10 ADDR11 ADDR12 ADDR13 ADDR14 ADDR15 ADDR0/DATA0 ADDR1/DATA1 ADDR2/DATA2 ADDR3/DATA3 ADDR4/DATA4 ADDR5/DATA5 ADDR6/DATA6 ADDR7/DATA7
Technical Data 40 Pin Descriptions
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Pin Descriptions Port Signals
PA7 can function as general-purpose I/O or as timer output compare for OC1. PA7 is also the input to the pulse accumulator, even while functioning as a general-purpose I/O or an OC1 output. PA6-PA4 serve as either general-purpose outputs, timer input captures, or timer output compare 2-4. In addition, PA6-PA4 can be controlled by OC1. PA3 can be a general-purpose I/O pin or a timer IC/OC pin. Timer functions associated with this pin include OC1 and IC4/OC5. IC4/OC5 is software selectable as either a fourth input capture or a fifth output compare. PA3 can also be configured to allow OC1 edges to trigger IC4 captures. PA2-PA0 serve as general-purpose inputs or as IC1-IC3. PORTA can be read at any time. Reads of pins configured as inputs return the logic level present on the pin. Pins configured as outputs return the logic level present at the pin driver input. If written, PORTA stores the data in an internal latch, bits 7 and 3. It drives the pins only if they are configured as outputs. Writes to PORTA do not change the pin state when pins are configured for timer input captures or output compares. Refer to Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports.
2.13.2 Port B During single-chip operating modes, all port B pins are general-purpose output pins. During MCU reads of this port, the level sensed at the input side of the port B output drivers is read. Port B can also be used in simple strobed output mode. In this mode, an output pulse appears at the STRB signal each time data is written to port B. In expanded multiplexed operating modes, all of the port B pins act as high order address output signals. During each MCU cycle, bits 15-8 of the address bus are output on the PB7-PB0 pins. The PORTB register is treated as an external address in expanded modes.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 41
Pin Descriptions
2.13.3 Port C While in single-chip operating modes, all port C pins are general-purpose I/O pins. Port C inputs can be latched into an alternate PORTCL register by providing an input transition to the STRA signal. Port C can also be used in full handshake modes of parallel I/O where the STRA input and STRB output act as handshake control lines. When in expanded multiplexed modes, all port C pins are configured as multiplexed address/data signals. During the address portion of each MCU cycle, bits 7-0 of the address are output on the PC7-PC0 pins. During the data portion of each MCU cycle (E high), PC7-PC0 are bidirectional data signals, DATA7-DATA0. The direction of data at the port C pins is indicated by the R/W signal. The CWOM control bit in the PIOC register disables the port C P-channel output driver. CWOM simultaneously affects all eight bits of port C. Because the N-channel driver is not affected by CWOM, setting CWOM causes port C to become an open-drain type output port suitable for wired-OR operation. In wired-OR mode: * * When a port C bit is at logic level 0, it is driven low by the N-channel driver. When a port C bit is at logic level 1, the associated pin has high-impedance, as neither the N-channel nor the P-channel devices are active.
It is customary to have an external pullup resistor on lines that are driven by open-drain devices. Port C can only be configured for wired-OR operation when the MCU is in single-chip mode. Refer to Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports for additional information about port C functions.
Technical Data 42 Pin Descriptions
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Pin Descriptions Port Signals
2.13.4 Port D Pins PD5-PD0 can be used for general-purpose I/O signals. These pins alternately serve as the serial communication interface (SCI) and serial peripheral interface (SPI) signals when those subsystems are enabled. * * * PD0 is the receive data input (RxD) signal for the SCI. PD1 is the transmit data output (TxD) signal for the SCI. PD5-PD2 are dedicated to the SPI: - PD2 is the master in/slave out (MISO) signal. - PD3 is the master out/slave in (MOSI) signal. - PD4 is the serial clock (SCK) signal. - PD5 is the slave select (SS) input.
2.13.5 Port E Use port E for general-purpose or analog-to-digital (A/D) inputs.
CAUTION:
If high accuracy is required for A/D conversions, avoid reading port E during sampling, as small disturbances can reduce the accuracy of that result.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 43
Pin Descriptions
Technical Data 44 Pin Descriptions
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 3. Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3.1 Contents
3.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3 CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.3.1 Accumulators A, B, and D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 3.3.2 Index Register X (IX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.3.3 Index Register Y (IY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.3.4 Stack Pointer (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.3.5 Program Counter (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 3.3.6 Condition Code Register (CCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.3.6.1 Carry/Borrow (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.3.6.2 Overflow (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.3.6.3 Zero (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 3.3.6.4 Negative (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 3.3.6.5 Interrupt Mask (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 3.3.6.6 Half Carry (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 3.3.6.7 X Interrupt Mask (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 3.3.6.8 STOP Disable (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 3.4 3.5 Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Opcodes and Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.6 Addressing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3.6.1 Immediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3.6.2 Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.3 Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.4 Indexed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.5 Inherent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6.6 Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 3.7 Instruction Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 45
Central Processor Unit (CPU) 3.2 Introduction
This section presents information on M68HC11: * * * * * Central processor unit (CPU) architecture Data types Addressing modes Instruction set Special operations such as subroutine calls and interrupts
The CPU is designed to treat all peripheral, input/output (I/O), and memory locations identically as addresses in the 64-Kbyte memory map. This is referred to as memory-mapped I/O. There are no special instructions for I/O that are separate from those used for memory. This architecture also allows accessing an operand from an external memory location with no execution time penalty.
3.3 CPU Registers
M68HC11 CPU registers are an integral part of the CPU and are not addressed as if they were memory locations. The seven registers, discussed in the following paragraphs, are shown in Figure 3-1.
Technical Data 46 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) CPU Registers
7 15
A
0 D IX IY SP PC
7
B
0 0
8-BIT ACCUMULATORS A & B OR 16-BIT DOUBLE ACCUMULATOR D INDEX REGISTER X INDEX REGISTER Y STACK POINTER PROGRAM COUNTER
7 S
0 X H I N Z V C CONDITION CODES
CARRY/BORROW FROM MSB OVERFLOW ZERO NEGATIVE I-INTERRUPT MASK HALF CARRY (FROM BIT 3) X-INTERRUPT MASK STOP DISABLE
Figure 3-1. Programming Model
3.3.1 Accumulators A, B, and D Accumulators A and B are general-purpose 8-bit registers that hold operands and results of arithmetic calculations or data manipulations. For some instructions, these two accumulators are treated as a single double-byte (16-bit) accumulator called accumulator D. Although most instructions can use accumulators A or B interchangeably, these exceptions apply: * The ABX and ABY instructions add the contents of 8-bit accumulator B to the contents of 16-bit register X or Y, but there are no equivalent instructions that use A instead of B. The TAP and TPA instructions transfer data from accumulator A to the condition code register or from the condition code register to accumulator A. However, there are no equivalent instructions that use B rather than A.
*
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 47
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
* The decimal adjust accumulator A (DAA) instruction is used after binary-coded decimal (BCD) arithmetic operations, but there is no equivalent BCD instruction to adjust accumulator B. The add, subtract, and compare instructions associated with both A and B (ABA, SBA, and CBA) only operate in one direction, making it important to plan ahead to ensure that the correct operand is in the correct accumulator.
*
3.3.2 Index Register X (IX) The IX register provides a 16-bit indexing value that can be added to the 8-bit offset provided in an instruction to create an effective address. The IX register can also be used as a counter or as a temporary storage register.
3.3.3 Index Register Y (IY) The 16-bit IY register performs an indexed mode function similar to that of the IX register. However, most instructions using the IY register require an extra byte of machine code and an extra cycle of execution time because of the way the opcode map is implemented. Refer to 3.5 Opcodes and Operands for further information.
3.3.4 Stack Pointer (SP) The M68HC11 CPU has an automatic program stack. This stack can be located anywhere in the address space and can be any size up to the amount of memory available in the system. Normally, the SP is initialized by one of the first instructions in an application program. The stack is configured as a data structure that grows downward from high memory to low memory. Each time a new byte is pushed onto the stack, the SP is decremented. Each time a byte is pulled from the stack, the SP is incremented. At any given time, the SP holds the 16-bit address of the next free location in the stack. Figure 3-2 is a summary of SP operations.
Technical Data 48 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) CPU Registers
JSR, JUMP TO SUBROUTINE MAIN PROGRAM
DIRECT
RTI, RETURN FROM INTERRUPT INTERRUPT ROUTINE
PC 7 SP SP+1 SP+2 SP+3 SP+4 SP+5 7
STACK CCR ACCB ACCA IXH IXL IYH IYL RTNH RTNL STACK CCR ACCB ACCA IXH IXL IYH IYL RTNH RTNL
0
$9D = JSR dd RTN NEXT MAIN INSTR. MAIN PROGRAM
PC
$3B = RTI
INDEXED, X
$AD = JSR ff RTN NEXT MAIN INSTR. MAIN PROGRAM
PC
STACK RTNH RTNL
0
SP+6 SP+7 SP+8
SP-2
SP-1 SP
INDEXED, Y
$18 = PRE $AD = JSR RTN ff NEXT MAIN INSTR. MAIN PROGRAM
PC
SP+9
SWI, SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MAIN PROGRAM
PC 7
0
$3F = SWI
SP-9
SP-8 SP-7 SP-6 SP-5 SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP
INDEXED, Y
$BD = PRE hh RTN ll NEXT MAIN INSTR.
PC
WAI, WAIT FOR INTERRUPT MAIN PROGRAM
PC
$3E = WAI
BSR, BRANCH TO SUBROUTINE MAIN PROGRAM
PC 7
STACK RTNH RTNL
0
$8D = BSR
SP-2
SP-1 SP
LEGEND:
RTN = ADDRESS OF NEXT INSTRUCTION IN MAIN PROGRAM TO BE EXECUTED UPON RETURN FROM SUBROUTINE RTNH = MOST SIGNIFICANT BYTE OF RETURN ADDRESS RTNL = LEAST SIGNIFICANT BYTE OF RETURN ADDRESS = STACK POINTER POSITION AFTER OPERATION IS COMPLETE dd = 8-BIT DIRECT ADDRESS ($0000-$00FF) (HIGH BYTE ASSUMED TO BE $00) ff = 8-BIT POSITIVE OFFSET $00 (0) TO $FF (255) IS ADDED TO INDEX hh = HIGH-ORDER BYTE OF 16-BIT EXTENDED ADDRESS ll = LOW-ORDER BYTE OF 16-BIT EXTENDED ADDRESS rr= SIGNED RELATIVE OFFSET $80 (-128) TO $7F (+127) (OFFSET RELATIVE TO THE ADDRESS FOLLOWING THE MACHINE CODE OFFSET BYTE)
RTS, RETURN FROM SUBROUTINE MAIN PROGRAM
PC
7 SP SP+1
STACK RTNH RTNL
0
$39 = RTS
SP+2
Figure 3-2. Stacking Operations When a subroutine is called by a jump-to-subroutine (JSR) or branch-tosubroutine (BSR) instruction, the address of the instruction after the JSR or BSR is automatically pushed onto the stack, least significant byte first. When the subroutine is finished, a return-from-subroutine (RTS) instruction is executed. The RTS pulls the previously stacked return address from the stack and loads it into the program counter. Execution then continues at this recovered return address.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 49
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
When an interrupt is recognized, the current instruction finishes normally, the return address (the current value in the program counter) is pushed onto the stack, all of the CPU registers are pushed onto the stack, and execution continues at the address specified by the vector for the interrupt. At the end of the interrupt service routine, an return-from interrupt (RTI) instruction is executed. The RTI instruction causes the saved registers to be pulled off the stack in reverse order. Program execution resumes at the return address. Certain instructions push and pull the A and B accumulators and the X and Y index registers and are often used to preserve program context. For example, pushing accumulator A onto the stack when entering a subroutine that uses accumulator A and then pulling accumulator A off the stack just before leaving the subroutine ensures that the contents of a register will be the same after returning from the subroutine as it was before starting the subroutine.
3.3.5 Program Counter (PC) The program counter, a 16-bit register, contains the address of the next instruction to be executed. After reset, the program counter is initialized from one of six possible vectors, depending on operating mode and the cause of reset. See Table 3-1. Table 3-1. Reset Vector Comparison
Mode Normal Test or Boot POR or RESET Pin $FFFE, F $BFFE, F Clock Monitor $FFFC, D $BFFC, D COP Watchdog $FFFA, B $BFFA, B
Technical Data 50 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) CPU Registers
3.3.6 Condition Code Register (CCR) This 8-bit register contains: * * * Five condition code indicators (C, V, Z, N, and H), Two interrupt masking bits (IRQ and XIRQ) A stop disable bit (S)
In the M68HC11 CPU, condition codes are updated automatically by most instructions. For example, load accumulator A (LDAA) and store accumulator A (STAA) instructions automatically set or clear the N, Z, and V condition code flags. Pushes, pulls, add B to X (ABX), add B to Y (ABY), and transfer/exchange instructions do not affect the condition codes. Refer to Table 3-2, which shows what condition codes are affected by a particular instruction. 3.3.6.1 Carry/Borrow (C) The C bit is set if the arithmetic logic unit (ALU) performs a carry or borrow during an arithmetic operation. The C bit also acts as an error flag for multiply and divide operations. Shift and rotate instructions operate with and through the carry bit to facilitate multiple-word shift operations. 3.3.6.2 Overflow (V) The overflow bit is set if an operation causes an arithmetic overflow. Otherwise, the V bit is cleared. 3.3.6.3 Zero (Z) The Z bit is set if the result of an arithmetic, logic, or data manipulation operation is 0. Otherwise, the Z bit is cleared. Compare instructions do an internal implied subtraction and the condition codes, including Z, reflect the results of that subtraction. A few operations (INX, DEX, INY, and DEY) affect the Z bit and no other condition flags. For these operations, only = and conditions can be determined.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 51
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3.3.6.4 Negative (N) The N bit is set if the result of an arithmetic, logic, or data manipulation operation is negative (MSB = 1). Otherwise, the N bit is cleared. A result is said to be negative if its most significant bit (MSB) is a 1. A quick way to test whether the contents of a memory location has the MSB set is to load it into an accumulator and then check the status of the N bit. 3.3.6.5 Interrupt Mask (I) The interrupt request (IRQ) mask (I bit) is a global mask that disables all maskable interrupt sources. While the I bit is set, interrupts can become pending, but the operation of the CPU continues uninterrupted until the I bit is cleared. After any reset, the I bit is set by default and can only be cleared by a software instruction. When an interrupt is recognized, the I bit is set after the registers are stacked, but before the interrupt vector is fetched. After the interrupt has been serviced, a return-from-interrupt instruction is normally executed, restoring the registers to the values that were present before the interrupt occurred. Normally, the I bit is 0 after a return from interrupt is executed. Although the I bit can be cleared within an interrupt service routine, "nesting" interrupts in this way should only be done when there is a clear understanding of latency and of the arbitration mechanism. Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts. 3.3.6.6 Half Carry (H) The H bit is set when a carry occurs between bits 3 and 4 of the arithmetic logic unit during an ADD, ABA, or ADC instruction. Otherwise, the H bit is cleared. Half carry is used during BCD operations. 3.3.6.7 X Interrupt Mask (X) The XIRQ mask (X) bit disables interrupts from the XIRQ pin. After any reset, X is set by default and must be cleared by a software instruction. When an XIRQ interrupt is recognized, the X and I bits are set after the registers are stacked, but before the interrupt vector is fetched. After the interrupt has been serviced, an RTI instruction is normally executed, causing the registers to be restored to the values that were present before the interrupt occurred. The X interrupt mask bit is set only by
Technical Data 52 Central Processor Unit (CPU) MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Data Types
hardware (RESET or XIRQ acknowledge). X is cleared only by program instruction (TAP, where the associated bit of A is 0; or RTI, where bit 6 of the value loaded into the CCR from the stack has been cleared). There is no hardware action for clearing X. 3.3.6.8 STOP Disable (S) Setting the STOP disable (S) bit prevents the STOP instruction from putting the M68HC11 into a low-power stop condition. If the STOP instruction is encountered by the CPU while the S bit is set, it is treated as a no-operation (NOP) instruction, and processing continues to the next instruction. S is set by reset; STOP is disabled by default.
3.4 Data Types
The M68HC11 CPU supports four data types: 1. Bit data 2. 8-bit and 16-bit signed and unsigned integers 3. 16-bit unsigned fractions 4. 16-bit addresses A byte is eight bits wide and can be accessed at any byte location. A word is composed of two consecutive bytes with the most significant byte at the lower value address. Because the M68HC11 is an 8-bit CPU, there are no special requirements for alignment of instructions or operands.
3.5 Opcodes and Operands
The M68HC11 Family of microcontrollers uses 8-bit opcodes. Each opcode identifies a particular instruction and associated addressing mode to the CPU. Several opcodes are required to provide each instruction with a range of addressing capabilities. Only 256 opcodes would be available if the range of values were restricted to the number able to be expressed in 8-bit binary numbers.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 53
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
A 4-page opcode map has been implemented to expand the number of instructions. An additional byte, called a prebyte, directs the processor from page 0 of the opcode map to one of the other three pages. As its name implies, the additional byte precedes the opcode. A complete instruction consists of a prebyte, if any, an opcode, and zero, one, two, or three operands. The operands contain information the CPU needs for executing the instruction. Complete instructions can be from one to five bytes long.
3.6 Addressing Modes
Six addressing modes can be used to access memory: * * * * * * Immediate Direct Extended Indexed Inherent Relative
These modes are detailed in the following paragraphs. All modes except inherent mode use an effective address. The effective address is the memory address from which the argument is fetched or stored or the address from which execution is to proceed. The effective address can be specified within an instruction, or it can be calculated.
3.6.1 Immediate In the immediate addressing mode, an argument is contained in the byte(s) immediately following the opcode. The number of bytes following the opcode matches the size of the register or memory location being operated on. There are 2-, 3-, and 4- (if prebyte is required) byte immediate instructions. The effective address is the address of the byte following the instruction.
Technical Data 54 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Addressing Modes
3.6.2 Direct In the direct addressing mode, the low-order byte of the operand address is contained in a single byte following the opcode, and the high-order byte of the address is assumed to be $00. Addresses $00-$FF are thus accessed directly, using 2-byte instructions. Execution time is reduced by eliminating the additional memory access required for the high-order address byte. In most applications, this 256-byte area is reserved for frequently referenced data. In M68HC11 MCUs, the memory map can be configured for combinations of internal registers, RAM, or external memory to occupy these addresses.
3.6.3 Extended In the extended addressing mode, the effective address of the argument is contained in two bytes following the opcode byte. These are 3-byte instructions (or 4-byte instructions if a prebyte is required). One or two bytes are needed for the opcode and two for the effective address.
3.6.4 Indexed In the indexed addressing mode, an 8-bit unsigned offset contained in the instruction is added to the value contained in an index register (IX or IY). The sum is the effective address. This addressing mode allows referencing any memory location in the 64-Kbyte address space. These are 2- to 5-byte instructions, depending on whether or not a prebyte is required.
3.6.5 Inherent In the inherent addressing mode, all the information necessary to execute the instruction is contained in the opcode. Operations that use only the index registers or accumulators, as well as control instructions with no arguments, are included in this addressing mode. These are 1- or 2-byte instructions.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 55
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
3.6.6 Relative The relative addressing mode is used only for branch instructions. If the branch condition is true, an 8-bit signed offset included in the instruction is added to the contents of the program counter to form the effective branch address. Otherwise, control proceeds to the next instruction. These are usually 2-byte instructions.
3.7 Instruction Set
Refer to Table 3-2, which shows all the M68HC11 instructions in all possible addressing modes. For each instruction, the table shows the operand construction, the number of machine code bytes, and execution time in CPU E-clock cycles.
Technical Data 56 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set
Table 3-2. Instruction Set (Sheet 1 of 7)
Mnemonic ABA ABX ABY ADCA (opr) Operation Add Accumulators Add B to X Add B to Y Add with Carry to A Description A+BA IX + (00 : B) IX IY + (00 : B) IY A+M+CA Addressing Mode INH INH INH IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y EXT IND,X IND,Y INH Opcode 1B Instruction Operand -- -- -- ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff hh ll ff ff -- Cycles 2 3 4 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 4 5 6 6 7 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 2 S -- -- -- -- X -- -- -- -- Condition Codes H I N Z -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- V -- -- C -- --
18
ADCB (opr)
Add with Carry to B
B+M+CB
ADDA (opr)
Add Memory to A
A+MA
ADDB (opr)
Add Memory to B
B+MB
A A A A A B B B B B A A A A A B B B B B
18
18
18
18
ADDD (opr)
Add 16-Bit to D
D + (M : M + 1) D
18
ANDA (opr)
AND A with Memory
A*MA
ANDB (opr)
AND B with Memory
B*MB
A A A A A B B B B B
0
18
18
ASL (opr)
Arithmetic Shift Left
C b7 b0
18
3A 3A 89 99 B9 A9 A9 C9 D9 F9 E9 E9 8B 9B BB AB AB CB DB FB EB EB C3 D3 F3 E3 E3 84 94 B4 A4 A4 C4 D4 F4 E4 E4 78 68 68 48
--
--
--

--
--
--

--
--
--

--
--
--
--

--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--

ASLA
Arithmetic Shift Left A
C b7 b0
A
0
--
--
--
--

ASLB
Arithmetic Shift Left B
C b7 b0
B
0
INH
58
--
2
--
--
--
--

ASLD
Arithmetic Shift Left D
C b7 A b0 b7 B b0
INH
0
05
--
3
--
--
--
--
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right
b7 b0 C
ASRA
Arithmetic Shift Right A
b7 b0 C
A
EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
18
77 67 67 47
hh ll ff ff --
6 6 7 2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
ASRB
Arithmetic Shift Right B
b7 b0 C
B
INH
57
--
2
--
--
--
--
BCC (rel) BCLR (opr) (msk)
Branch if Carry Clear Clear Bit(s)
?C=0 M * (mm) M
REL DIR IND,X IND,Y
24 15 1D 1D
rr dd mm ff mm ff mm
3 6 7 8
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
--
--
-- 0
-- --
18
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 57
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 3-2. Instruction Set (Sheet 2 of 7)
Mnemonic BCS (rel) BEQ (rel) BGE (rel) BGT (rel) BHI (rel) BHS (rel) BITA (opr) Operation Branch if Carry Set Branch if = Zero Branch if Zero Branch if > Zero Branch if Higher Branch if Higher or Same Bit(s) Test A with Memory Description ?C=1 ?Z=1 ?NV=0 ? Z + (N V) = 0 ?C+Z=0 ?C=0 A*M A A A A A B B B B B Addressing Mode REL REL REL REL REL REL IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y REL REL REL REL REL REL REL REL DIR IND,X IND,Y REL DIR IND,X IND,Y DIR IND,X IND,Y REL REL REL INH INH INH EXT IND,X IND,Y INH INH INH A A A A A IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y Opcode 25 27 2C 2E 22 24 85 95 B5 A5 A5 C5 D5 F5 E5 E5 2F 25 23 2D 2B 26 2A 20 13 1F 1F 21 12 1E 1E 14 1C 1C 8D 28 29 11 0C 0E 7F 6F 6F 4F 5F 0A 81 91 B1 A1 A1 Instruction Operand rr rr rr rr rr rr ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr dd mm rr ff mm rr ff mm rr rr dd mm rr ff mm rr ff mm rr dd mm ff mm ff mm rr rr rr -- -- -- hh ll ff ff -- -- -- ii dd hh ll ff ff Cycles 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 7 8 3 6 7 8 6 7 8 6 3 3 2 2 2 6 6 7 2 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 S -- -- -- -- -- -- -- X -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Condition Codes H I N Z -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- V -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 C -- -- -- -- -- -- --
18
BITB (opr)
Bit(s) Test B with Memory
B*M
--
--
--
--
0
--
18
BLE (rel) BLO (rel) BLS (rel) BLT (rel) BMI (rel) BNE (rel) BPL (rel) BRA (rel) BRCLR(opr) (msk) (rel) BRN (rel) BRSET(opr) (msk) (rel) BSET (opr) (msk) BSR (rel) BVC (rel) BVS (rel) CBA CLC CLI CLR (opr)
Branch if Zero Branch if Lower Branch if Lower or Same Branch if < Zero Branch if Minus Branch if not = Zero Branch if Plus Branch Always Branch if Bit(s) Clear Branch Never Branch if Bit(s) Set Set Bit(s)
? Z + (N V) = 1 ?C=1 ?C+Z=1 ?NV=1 ?N=1 ?Z=0 ?N=0 ?1=1 ? M * mm = 0
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
18
?1=0 ? (M) * mm = 0 M + mm M
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
18
--
--
--
--
0
--
18
Branch to Subroutine Branch if Overflow Clear Branch if Overflow Set Compare A to B Clear Carry Bit Clear Interrupt Mask Clear Memory Byte Clear Accumulator A Clear Accumulator B Clear Overflow Flag Compare A to Memory
See Figure 3-2 ?V=0 ?V=1 A-B 0C 0I 0M 0A 0B 0V A-M
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- 0 --
-- -- -- -- -- 0
-- -- -- -- -- 1
-- -- -- -- -- 0
-- -- -- 0 -- 0
18
CLRA CLRB CLV CMPA (opr)
A B
-- -- -- --
-- -- -- --
-- -- -- --
-- -- -- --
0 0 --
1 1 --
0 0 0
0 0 --
18
Technical Data 58 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set
Table 3-2. Instruction Set (Sheet 3 of 7)
Mnemonic CMPB (opr) Operation Compare B to Memory Description B-M B B B B B Addressing Mode IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y EXT IND,X IND,Y INH Opcode C1 D1 F1 E1 18 E1 73 63 18 63 43 Instruction Operand ii dd hh ll ff ff hh ll ff ff -- Cycles 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 2 S -- X -- Condition Codes H I N Z -- -- V C
COM (opr)
COMA
COMB
CPD (opr)
Ones Complement Memory Byte Ones Complement A Ones Complement B Compare D to Memory 16-Bit
$FF - M M $FF - A A $FF - B B
--
--
--
--

0
1
A
--
--
--
--
0
1
B
INH
53
--
2
--
--
--
--
0
1
D-M:M +1
CPX (opr)
Compare X to Memory 16-Bit
IX - M : M + 1
CPY (opr)
Compare Y to Memory 16-Bit
IY - M : M + 1
DAA DEC (opr)
Decimal Adjust A Decrement Memory Byte Decrement Accumulator A Decrement Accumulator B Decrement Stack Pointer Decrement Index Register X Decrement Index Register Y Exclusive OR A with Memory
Adjust Sum to BCD M-1M A-1A B-1B SP - 1 SP IX - 1 IX IY - 1 IY AMA
IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y INH EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
1A 1A 1A 1A CD
CD 18 18 18 1A 18
83 93 B3 A3 A3 8C 9C BC AC AC 8C 9C BC AC AC 19 7A 6A 6A 4A
jj kk dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff -- hh ll ff ff --
5 6 7 7 7 4 5 6 6 7 5 6 7 7 7 2 6 6 7 2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--

--
--
--
--

-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --

--
18
DECA
A
--
--
--
--
--
DECB
B
INH
5A
--
2
--
--
--
--
--
DES DEX
INH INH
34 09
-- --
3 3
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
--
-- --
-- --
DEY
INH
18
09
--
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
EORA (opr)
EORB (opr)
Exclusive OR B with Memory
BMB
A A A A A B B B B B
FDIV IDIV INC (opr)
Fractional Divide 16 by 16 Integer Divide 16 by 16 Increment Memory Byte Increment Accumulator A
D / IX IX; r D D / IX IX; r D M+1M A+1A
IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y INH INH EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
18
18
88 98 B8 A8 A8 C8 D8 F8 E8 E8 03 02 7C 6C 6C 4C
ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff -- -- hh ll ff ff --
2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 41 41 6 6 7 2
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- --

0
--
18
INCA
A
--
--
--
--
--
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 59
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 3-2. Instruction Set (Sheet 4 of 7)
Mnemonic INCB Operation Increment Accumulator B Increment Stack Pointer Increment Index Register X Increment Index Register Y Jump Description B+1B SP + 1 SP IX + 1 IX IY + 1 IY Addressing Mode B INH Opcode 5C Instruction Operand -- Cycles 2 S -- X -- Condition Codes H I N Z -- -- V C --
INS INX
INH INH
31 08
-- --
3 3
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
--
-- --
-- --
INY
INH
18
08
--
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
JMP (opr)
See Figure 3-2
JSR (opr)
Jump to Subroutine
See Figure 3-2
LDAA (opr)
Load Accumulator A
MA
LDAB (opr)
Load Accumulator B
MB
A A A A A B B B B B
LDD (opr)
Load Double Accumulator D
M A,M + 1 B
LDS (opr)
Load Stack Pointer
M : M + 1 SP
LDX (opr)
Load Index Register X
M : M + 1 IX
LDY (opr)
Load Index Register Y
M : M + 1 IY
LSL (opr)
Logical Shift Left
C b7 b0
0
LSLA
Logical Shift Left A
C b7 b0
A
0
EXT IND,X IND,Y DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
18
18
18
18
18
18
CD 18 18 18 1A 18
18
7E 6E 6E 9D BD AD AD 86 96 B6 A6 A6 C6 D6 F6 E6 E6 CC DC FC EC EC 8E 9E BE AE AE CE DE FE EE EE CE DE FE EE EE 78 68 68 48
hh ll ff ff dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff hh ll ff ff --
3 3 4 5 6 6 7 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 3 4 5 5 6 3 4 5 5 6 3 4 5 5 6 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--

--
--
--
--
LSLB
Logical Shift Left B
C b7 b0
B
0
INH
58
--
2
--
--
--
--
LSLD
Logical Shift Left Double
C b7 A b0 b7 B b0
INH
0
05
--
3
--
--
--
--
LSR (opr)
Logical Shift Right Logical Shift Right A
0
b7
b0
C
LSRA
A
0 b7 b0 C
EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
18
74 64 64 44
hh ll ff ff --
6 6 7 2
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
0
Technical Data 60 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set
Table 3-2. Instruction Set (Sheet 5 of 7)
Mnemonic LSRB Operation Logical Shift Right B Logical Shift Right Double Multiply 8 by 8 Two's Complement Memory Byte Two's Complement A Two's Complement B No operation OR Accumulator A (Inclusive) Description Addressing Mode B INH
C
Opcode 54
Instruction Operand --
Cycles 2
S --
X --
Condition Codes H I N Z -- -- 0
V
C
0
b7
b0
LSRD
INH
0 b7 A b0 b7 B b0 C
04
--
3
--
--
--
--
0
MUL NEG (opr)
ABD 0-MM 0-AA 0-BB
NEGA
A
INH EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
18
3D 70 60 60 40
-- hh ll ff ff --
10 6 6 7 2
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
NEGB
B
INH
50
--
2
--
--
--
--
NOP ORAA (opr)
ORAB (opr)
OR Accumulator B (Inclusive)
PSHA PSHB PSHX
PSHY
PULA PULB PULX
PULY
ROL (opr)
Push A onto Stack Push B onto Stack Push X onto Stack (Lo First) Push Y onto Stack (Lo First) Pull A from Stack Pull B from Stack Pull X From Stack (Hi First) Pull Y from Stack (Hi First) Rotate Left
A A A A A B+MB B B B B B A Stk,SP = SP - 1 A B Stk,SP = SP - 1 B IX Stk,SP = SP - 2 IY Stk,SP = SP - 2 SP = SP + 1, A Stk A SP = SP + 1, B Stk B SP = SP + 2, IX Stk SP = SP + 2, IY Stk
No Operation A+MA
INH IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y INH INH INH
18
18
01 8A 9A BA AA AA CA DA FA EA EA 36 37 3C
-- ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff -- -- --
2 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 3 3 4
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
--
--
-- 0
-- --
--
--
--
--
0
--
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
INH
18
3C
--
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
INH INH INH
32 33 38
-- -- --
4 4 5
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
INH
18
38
--
6
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
C
b7
b0
ROLA
Rotate Left A
C b7 b0
A
EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
18
79 69 69 49
hh ll ff ff --
6 6 7 2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
ROLB
Rotate Left B
C b7 b0
B
INH
59
--
2
--
--
--
--
ROR (opr)
Rotate Right
b7 b0 C
RORA
Rotate Right A
b7 b0 C
A
EXT IND,X IND,Y INH
18
76 66 66 46
hh ll ff ff --
6 6 7 2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RORB
Rotate Right B
b7 b0 C
B
INH
56
--
2
--
--
--
--
RTI
Return from Interrupt
See Figure 3-2
INH
3B
--
12
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 61
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Table 3-2. Instruction Set (Sheet 6 of 7)
Mnemonic RTS SBA SBCA (opr) Operation Return from Subroutine Subtract B from A Subtract with Carry from A Description See Figure 3-2 A-BA A-M-CA A A A A A B B B B B Addressing Mode INH INH IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y INH INH INH A A A A B B B B DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y INH DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y IMM DIR EXT IND,X IND,Y INH INH INH INH Opcode 39 10 82 92 B2 A2 A2 C2 D2 F2 E2 E2 0D 0F 0B 97 B7 A7 A7 D7 F7 E7 E7 DD FD ED ED CF 9F BF AF AF DF FF EF EF DF FF EF EF 80 90 B0 A0 A0 C0 D0 F0 E0 E0 83 93 B3 A3 A3 3F 16 06 17 Instruction Operand -- -- ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff -- -- -- dd hh ll ff ff dd hh ll ff ff dd hh ll ff ff -- dd hh ll ff ff dd hh ll ff ff dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff ii dd hh ll ff ff jj kk dd hh ll ff ff -- -- -- -- Cycles 5 2 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 3 4 4 5 4 5 5 6 2 4 5 5 6 4 5 5 6 5 6 6 6 2 3 4 4 5 2 3 4 4 5 4 5 6 6 7 14 2 2 2 S -- -- -- X -- -- -- Condition Codes H I N Z -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- V -- C --
18
SBCB (opr)
Subtract with Carry from B
B-M-CB
--
--
--
--

18
SEC SEI SEV STAA (opr)
Set Carry Set Interrupt Mask Set Overflow Flag Store Accumulator A Store Accumulator B Store Accumulator D Stop Internal Clocks Store Stack Pointer
1C 1I 1V AM
-- -- -- --
-- -- -- --
-- -- -- --
-- 1 -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- 1 0
1 -- -- --
18
STAB (opr)
BM
--
--
--
--
0
--
18
STD (opr)
A M, B M + 1
--
--
--
--
0
--
18
STOP STS (opr)
-- SP M : M + 1
-- --
-- --
-- --
-- --
--
--
-- 0
-- --
18
STX (opr)
Store Index Register X
IX M : M + 1
--
--
--
--
0
--
STY (opr)
Store Index Register Y
IY M : M + 1
CD 18 18 1A 18
--
--
--
--
0
--
SUBA (opr)
Subtract Memory from A
A-MA
SUBB (opr)
Subtract Memory from B
B-MB
A A A A A A A A A A
--
--
--
--

18
--
--
--
--

18
SUBD (opr)
Subtract Memory from D
D-M:M+1D
--
--
--
--

18
SWI TAB TAP TBA
Software Interrupt Transfer A to B Transfer A to CC Register Transfer B to A
See Figure 3-2 AB A CCR BA
-- -- --
-- -- --
-- -- --
1 -- --
--
--
-- 0 0
-- -- --
Technical Data 62 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Central Processor Unit (CPU) Instruction Set
Table 3-2. Instruction Set (Sheet 7 of 7)
Mnemonic TEST TPA TST (opr) Operation TEST (Only in Test Modes) Transfer CC Register to A Test for Zero or Minus Test A for Zero or Minus Test B for Zero or Minus Transfer Stack Pointer to X Transfer Stack Pointer to Y Transfer X to Stack Pointer Transfer Y to Stack Pointer Wait for Interrupt Exchange D with X Exchange D with Y Description Address Bus Counts CCR A M-0 Addressing Mode INH INH EXT IND,X IND,Y INH INH INH INH INH INH INH INH INH 18 18 18 Opcode 00 07 7D 6D 6D 4D 5D 30 30 35 35 3E 8F 8F Instruction Operand -- -- hh ll ff ff -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Cycles * 2 6 6 7 2 2 3 4 3 4 ** 3 4 S -- -- -- X -- -- -- Condition Codes H I N Z -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- V -- -- 0 C -- -- 0
18
TSTA TSTB TSX TSY TXS TYS WAI XGDX XGDY
A-0 B-0 SP + 1 IX SP + 1 IY IX - 1 SP IY - 1 SP Stack Regs & WAIT IX D, D IX IY D, D IY
A B
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Cycle * **
Infinity or until reset occurs 12 cycles are used beginning with the opcode fetch. A wait state is entered which remains in effect for an integer number of MPU E-clock cycles (n) until an interrupt is recognized. Finally, two additional cycles are used to fetch the appropriate interrupt vector (14 + n total).
Operands dd = 8-bit direct address ($0000-$00FF) (high byte assumed to be $00) ff = 8-bit positive offset $00 (0) to $FF (255) (is added to index) hh = High-order byte of 16-bit extended address ii = One byte of immediate data jj = High-order byte of 16-bit immediate data kk = Low-order byte of 16-bit immediate data ll = Low-order byte of 16-bit extended address mm = 8-bit mask (set bits to be affected) rr = Signed relative offset $80 (-128) to $7F (+127) (offset relative to address following machine code offset byte)) Operators () Contents of register shown inside parentheses Is transferred to Is pulled from stack Is pushed onto stack * Boolean AND + Arithmetic addition symbol except where used as inclusive-OR symbol in Boolean formula Exclusive-OR Multiply : Concatenation - Arithmetic subtraction symbol or negation symbol (two's complement) Condition Codes -- Bit not changed 0 Bit always cleared 1 Bit always set Bit cleared or set, depending on operation Bit can be cleared, cannot become set
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 63
Central Processor Unit (CPU)
Technical Data 64 Central Processor Unit (CPU)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
4.1 Contents
4.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.3 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 4.3.1 Single-Chip Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 4.3.2 Expanded Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 4.3.3 Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 4.3.4 Bootstrap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.4 Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 4.4.1 RAM and Input/Output Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 4.4.2 Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 4.4.3 System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 4.4.3.1 System Configuration Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.4.3.2 RAM and I/O Mapping Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 4.4.3.3 System Configuration Options Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 4.5 EPROM/OTPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 4.5.1 Programming an Individual EPROM Address . . . . . . . . . . . 93 4.5.2 Programming the EPROM with Downloaded Data. . . . . . . . 94 4.5.3 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register . . . . 94 4.6 EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 4.6.1 EEPROM and CONFIG Programming and Erasure. . . . . . . 98 4.6.1.1 Block Protect Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 4.6.1.2 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 4.6.1.3 EEPROM Bulk Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4.6.1.4 EEPROM Row Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4.6.1.5 EEPROM Byte Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 4.6.1.6 CONFIG Register Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 4.6.2 EEPROM Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 65
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory 4.2 Introduction
This section contains information about the operating modes and the on-chip memory for M68HC11 E-series MCUs. Except for a few minor differences, operation is identical for all devices in the E series. Differences are noted where necessary.
4.3 Operating Modes
The values of the mode select inputs MODB and MODA during reset determine the operating mode. Single-chip and expanded multiplexed are the normal modes. * * In single-chip mode only on-chip memory is available. Expanded mode, however, allows access to external memory.
Each of the two normal modes is paired with a special mode: * * Bootstrap, a variation of the single-chip mode, is a special mode that executes a bootloader program in an internal bootstrap ROM. Test is a special mode that allows privileged access to internal resources.
4.3.1 Single-Chip Mode In single-chip mode, ports B and C and strobe pins A (STRA) and B (STRB) are available for general-purpose parallel input/output (I/O). In this mode, all software needed to control the MCU is contained in internal resources. If present, read-only memory (ROM) and/or erasable, programmable read-only memory (EPROM) will always be enabled out of reset, ensuring that the reset and interrupt vectors will be available at locations $FFC0-$FFFF.
NOTE:
For the MC68HC811E2, the vector locations are the same; however, they are contained in the 2048-byte EEPROM array.
Technical Data 66 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Operating Modes
4.3.2 Expanded Mode In expanded operating mode, the MCU can access the full 64-Kbyte address space. The space includes: * * The same on-chip memory addresses used for single-chip mode Addresses for external peripherals and memory devices
The expansion bus is made up of ports B and C, and control signals AS (address strobe) and R/W (read/write). R/W and AS allow the low-order address and the 8-bit data bus to be multiplexed on the same pins. During the first half of each bus cycle address information is present. During the second half of each bus cycle the pins become the bidirectional data bus. AS is an active-high latch enable signal for an external address latch. Address information is allowed through the transparent latch while AS is high and is latched when AS drives low. The address, R/W, and AS signals are active and valid for all bus cycles, including accesses to internal memory locations. The E clock is used to enable external devices to drive data onto the internal data bus during the second half of a read bus cycle (E clock high). R/W controls the direction of data transfers. R/W drives low when data is being written to the internal data bus. R/W will remain low during consecutive data bus write cycles, such as when a double-byte store occurs. Refer to Figure 4-1.
NOTE:
The write enable signal for an external memory is the NAND of the E clock and the inverted R/W signal.
4.3.3 Test Mode Test mode, a variation of the expanded mode, is primarily used during Motorola's internal production testing; however, it is accessible for programming the configuration (CONFIG) register, programming calibration data into electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), and supporting emulation and debugging during development.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 67
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 HC373 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 AS R/W E D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 LE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 OE
ADDR15 ADDR14 ADDR13 ADDR12 ADDR11 ADDR10 ADDR9 ADDR8 ADDR7 ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0
WE OE DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0
MCU
Figure 4-1. Address/Data Demultiplexing
4.3.4 Bootstrap Mode When the MCU is reset in special bootstrap mode, a small on-chip read-only memory (ROM) is enabled at address $BF00-$BFFF. The ROM contains a bootloader program and a special set of interrupt and reset vectors. The MCU fetches the reset vector, then executes the bootloader. Bootstrap mode is a special variation of the single-chip mode. Bootstrap mode allows special-purpose programs to be entered into internal random-access memory (RAM). When bootstrap mode is selected at reset, a small bootstrap ROM becomes present in the memory map. Reset and interrupt vectors are located in this ROM at $BFC0-$BFFF. The bootstrap ROM contains a small program which initializes the serial communications interface (SCI) and allows the user to download a program into on-chip RAM. The size of the downloaded program can be as large as the size of the on-chip RAM. After a 4-character delay, or after receiving the character for the highest address in RAM, control
Technical Data 68 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
passes to the loaded program at $0000. Refer to Figure 4-2, Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4, Figure 4-5, and Figure 4-6. Use of an external pullup resistor is required when using the SCI transmitter pin because port D pins are configured for wired-OR operation by the bootloader. In bootstrap mode, the interrupt vectors are directed to RAM. This allows the use of interrupts through a jump table. Refer to the application note AN1060 entitled M68HC11 Bootstrap Mode, that is included in this data book.
4.4 Memory Map
The operating mode determines memory mapping and whether external addresses can be accessed. Refer to Figure 4-2, Figure 4-3, Figure 4-4, Figure 4-5, and Figure 4-6, which illustrate the memory maps for each of the three families comprising the M68HC11 E series of MCUs. Memory locations for on-chip resources are the same for both expanded and single-chip modes. Control bits in the configuration (CONFIG) register allow EPROM and EEPROM (if present) to be disabled from the memory map. The RAM is mapped to $0000 after reset. It can be placed at any 4-Kbyte boundary ($x000) by writing an appropriate value to the RAM and I/O map register (INIT). The 64-byte register block is mapped to $1000 after reset and also can be placed at any 4-Kbyte boundary ($x000) by writing an appropriate value to the INIT register. If RAM and registers are mapped to the same boundary, the first 64 bytes of RAM will be inaccessible. Refer to Figure 4-7, which details the MCU register and control bit assignments. Reset states shown are for single-chip mode only.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 69
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
$0000 EXT $1000 EXT
0000 512 BYTES RAM 01FF 1000 103F 64-BYTE REGISTER BLOCK
$B600 EXT EXT BF00 BFFF $D000 BOOT ROM BFC0 BFFF SPECIAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
FFC0 $FFFF EXPANDED BOOTSTRAP SPECIAL TEST FFFF
NORMAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
Figure 4-2. Memory Map for MC68HC11E0
$0000 EXT $1000 EXT EXT EXT
0000 512 BYTES RAM 01FF 1000 103F 64-BYTE REGISTER BLOCK
B600 $B600 EXT EXT BFFF $D000 FFC0 FFFF EXPANDED BOOTSTRAP SPECIAL TEST B7FF BF00
512 BYTES EEPROM
BOOT ROM
BFC0 BFFF
SPECIAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
$FFFF
NORMAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
Figure 4-3. Memory Map for MC68HC11E1
Technical Data 70 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
$0000 EXT $1000 EXT EXT EXT
0000 512 BYTES RAM 01FF 1000 103F 64-BYTE REGISTER BLOCK
B600 $B600 EXT EXT B7FF BF00 BFFF $D000 D000
512 BYTES EEPROM
BOOT ROM
BFC0 BFFF
SPECIAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
12 KBYTES ROM/EPROM FFC0 NORMAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
$FFFF SINGLE CHIP EXPANDED BOOTSTRAP SPECIAL TEST
FFFF
FFFF
Figure 4-4. Memory Map for MC68HC(7)11E9
$0000 EXT $1000 EXT $9000 EXT $B600 EXT EXT EXT EXT EXT 0000 768 BYTES RAM 02FF 1000 103F 9000 AFFF B600 B7FF BF00 BFFF $D000 BOOT ROM BFC0 SPECIAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS BFFF 512 BYTES EEPROM 8 KBYTES ROM/EPROM * 64-BYTE REGISTER BLOCK
D000 12 KBYTES ROM/EPROM * FFC0 FFFF FFFF NORMAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
$FFFF
EXPANDED SINGLE BOOTSTRAP SPECIAL CHIP TEST * 20 Kbytes ROM/EPROM are contained in two segments of 8 Kbytes and 12 Kbytes each.
Figure 4-5. Memory Map for MC68HC(7)11E20
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 71
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
$0000 EXT $1000 EXT
0000 256 BYTES RAM 00FF 1000 103F 64-BYTE REGISTER BLOCK
EXT
EXT BF00 BFFF BOOT ROM BFC0 SPECIAL MODES INTERRUPT BFFF VECTORS
2048 BYTES EEPROM $F800 F800 FFC0 FFFF NORMAL MODES INTERRUPT VECTORS
$FFFF SINGLE CHIP EXPANDED BOOTSTRAP SPECIAL TEST
FFFF
Figure 4-6. Memory Map for MC68HC811E2
Addr.
Register Name Read: Port A Data Register (PORTA) Write: See page 134. Reset: Reserved
Bit 7 PA7 I R
6 PA6 0 R
5 PA5 0 R
4 PA4 0 R
3 PA3 I R
2 PA2 I R
1 PA1 I R
Bit 0 PA0 I R
$1000
$1001
$1002
Read: Parallel I/O Control Register STAF (PIOC) Write: See page 141. Reset: 0
STAI 0
CWOM 0
HNDS 0 R
OIN 0 = Reserved
PLS U
EGA 1
INVB 1
= Unimplemented I = Indeterminate after reset
U = Unaffected
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 1 of 8)
Technical Data 72 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name Read: Port C Data Register (PORTC) Write: See page 136. Reset: Read: Port B Data Register (PORTB) Write: See page 136. Reset:
Bit 7 PC7
6 PC6
5 PC5
4 PC4
3 PC3
2 PC2
1 PC1
Bit 0 PC0
$1003
Indeterminate after reset PB7 0 PB6 0 PCL6 PB5 0 PCL5 PB4 0 PCL4 PB3 0 PCL3 PB2 0 PCL2 PB1 0 PCL1 PB0 0 PCL0
$1004
$1005
Read: Port C Latched Register PCL7 (PORTCL) Write: See page 137. Reset: Reserved R
Indeterminate after reset R R R R R R R
$1006
Read: Port C Data Direction Register DDRC7 DDRC6 $1007 (DDRC) Write: See page 137. Reset: 0 0 Read: Port D Data Register (PORTD) Write: See page 138. Reset: 0 U 0 U
DDRC5 0 PD5 I DDRD5
DDRC4 0 PD4 I DDRD4 0 PE4
DDRC3 0 PD3 I DDRD3 0 PE3
DDRC2 0 PD2 I DDRD2 0 PE2
DDRC1 0 PD1 I DDRD1 0 PE1
DDRC0 0 PD0 I DDRD0 0 PE0
$1008
Read: Port D Data Direction Register $1009 (DDRD) Write: See page 138. Reset: Read: Port E Data Register (PORTE) Write: See page 139. Reset:
0 PE7
0 PE6
0 PE5
$100A
Indeterminate after reset FOC2 0 FOC3 0 FOC4 0 R FOC5 0 = Reserved 0 0 0
$100B
Read: Timer Compare Force FOC1 Register (CFORC) Write: See page 190. Reset: 0
= Unimplemented I = Indeterminate after reset
U = Unaffected
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 2 of 8)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 73
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5 OC1M5 0 OC1D5 0 Bit 13
4 OC1M4 0 OC1D4 0 Bit 12
3 OC1M3 0 OC1D3 0 Bit 11
2
1
Bit 0
$100C
Read: Output Compare 1 Mask OC1M7 OC1M6 Register (OC1M) Write: See page 191. Reset: 0 0 Read: Output Compare 1 Data OC1D7 Register (OC1D) Write: See page 192. Reset: 0 Read: Bit 15 Timer Counter Register High (TCNTH) Write: See page 193. Reset: 0 Read: Timer Counter Register Low (TCNTL) Write: See page 193. Reset: Bit 7 OC1D6 0 Bit 14
0
0
0
$100D
0 Bit 10
0 Bit 9
0 Bit 8
$100E
0 Bit 6
0 Bit 5
0 Bit 4
0 Bit 3
0 Bit 2
0 Bit 1
0 Bit 0
$100F
0
0 Bit 14
0 Bit 13
0 Bit 12
0 Bit 11
0 Bit 10
0 Bit 9
0 Bit 8
Read: Timer Input Capture 1 Register Bit 15 $1010 High (TIC1H) Write: See page 184. Reset: Read: Timer Input Capture 1 Register $1011 Low (TIC1L) Write: See page 184. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
Read: Timer Input Capture 2 Register Bit 15 $1012 High (TIC2H) Write: See page 185. Reset: Read: TImer Input Capture 2 Register Low (TIC2L) Write: See page 185. Reset: Bit 7
Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
$1013
Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
Read: Timer Input Capture 3 Register Bit 15 $1014 High (TIC3H) Write: See page 185. Reset:
Indeterminate after reset = Unimplemented R = Reserved U = Unaffected
I = Indeterminate after reset
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 3 of 8)
Technical Data 74 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7 Bit 7
6 Bit 6
5 Bit 5
4 Bit 4
3 Bit 3
2 Bit 2
1 Bit 1
Bit 0 Bit 0
Read: Timer Input Capture 3 Register $1015 Low (TIC3L) Write: See page 185. Reset:
Indeterminate after reset Bit 14 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 14 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 14 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 14 1 Bit 6 1 Bit 13 1 Bit 5 1 Bit 13 1 Bit 5 1 Bit 13 1 Bit 5 1 Bit 13 1 Bit 5 1 Bit 12 1 Bit 4 1 Bit 12 1 Bit 4 1 Bit 12 1 Bit 4 1 Bit 12 1 Bit 4 1 R Bit 11 1 Bit 3 1 Bit 11 1 Bit 3 1 Bit 11 1 Bit 3 1 Bit 11 1 Bit 3 1 = Reserved Bit 10 1 Bit 2 1 Bit 10 1 Bit 2 1 Bit 10 1 Bit 2 1 Bit 10 1 Bit 2 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1
$1016
Read: Timer Output Compare 1 Bit 15 Register High (TOC1H) Write: See page 188. Reset: 1 Read: Timer Output Compare 1 Register Low (TOC1L) Write: See page 188. Reset: Bit 7 1
$1017
$1018
Read: Timer Output Compare 2 Bit 15 Register High (TOC2H) Write: See page 188. Reset: 1 Read: Timer Output Compare 2 Register Low (TOC2L) Write: See page 188. Reset: Bit 7 1
$1019
$101A
Read: Timer Output Compare 3 Bit 15 Register High (TOC3H) Write: See page 189. Reset: 1 Read: Timer Output Compare 3 Register Low (TOC3L) Write: See page 189. Reset: Bit 7 1
$101B
$101C
Read: Timer Output Compare 4 Bit 15 Register High (TOC4H) Write: See page 189. Reset: 1 Read: Timer Output Compare 4 Register Low (TOC4L) Write: See page 189. Reset: Bit 7 1
$101D
= Unimplemented I = Indeterminate after reset
U = Unaffected
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 4 of 8)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 75
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 Bit 14 1 Bit 6 1 OL2 0 EDG4A 0 OC2I 0 OC2F 0 RTII 0 RTIF 0 PAEN 0
5 Bit 13 1 Bit 5 1 OM3 0 EDG1B 0 OC3I 0 OC3F 0 PAOVI 0 PAOVF 0 PAMOD 0
4 Bit 12 1 Bit 4 1 OL3 0 EDG1A 0 OC4I 0 OC4F 0 PAII 0 PAIF 0 PEDGE 0 R
3 Bit 11 1 Bit 3 1 OM4 0 EDG2B 0 I4/O5I 0 I4/O5F 0
2 Bit 10 1 Bit 2 1 OL4 0 EDG2A 0 IC1I 0 IC1F 0
1 Bit 9 1 Bit 1 1 OM5 0 EDG3B 0 IC2I 0 IC2F 0 PR1
Bit 0 Bit 8 1 Bit 0 1 OL5 0 EDG3A 0 IC3I 0 IC3F 0 PR0 0
$101E
Read: Timer Input Capture 4/Output Bit 15 Compare 5 Register High Write: (TI4/O5) See page 186. Reset: 1 Read: Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Register Low Write: (TI4/O5) See page 186. Reset: Read: Timer Control Register 1 (TCTL1) Write: See page 194. Reset: Bit 7 1 OM2 0
$101F
$1020
$1021
Read: Timer Control Register 2 EDG4B (TCTL2) Write: See page 183. Reset: 0 Read: Timer Interrupt Mask 1 Register (TMSK1) Write: See page 195. Reset: OC1I 0
$1022
$1023
Read: Timer Interrupt Flag 1 OC1F (TFLG1) Write: See page 196. Reset: 0 Read: Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register (TMSK2) Write: See page 196. Reset: Read: Timer Interrupt Flag 2 (TFLG2) Write: See page 201. Reset: TOI 0 TOF 0
$1024
0
0
0
$1025
0 DDRA3 0 = Reserved
0 I4/O5 0
0 RTR1 0
0 RTR0 0
$1026
Read: Pulse Accumulator Control DDRA7 Register (PACTL) Write: See page 202. Reset: 0
= Unimplemented I = Indeterminate after reset
U = Unaffected
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 5 of 8)
Technical Data 76 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
Addr.
Register Name Read: Pulse Accumulator Count Register (PACNT) Write: See page 206. Reset: Read: Serial Peripheral Control Register (SPCR) Write: See page 173. Reset: Read: Serial Peripheral Status Register (SPSR) Write: See page 175. Reset: Read: Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register (SPDR) Write: See page 176. Reset:
Bit 7 Bit 7
6 Bit 6
5 Bit 5
4 Bit 4
3 Bit 3
2 Bit 2
1 Bit 1
Bit 0 Bit 0
$1027
Indeterminate after reset SPIE 0 SPIF 0 Bit 7 SPE 0 WCOL 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 DWOM 0 MSTR 0 MODF 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 CPOL 0 CPHA 1 SPR1 U SPR0 U
$1028
$1029
$102A
Indeterminate after reset SCP2(1) 0 T8 I TCIE 0 TC 1 0 RIE 0 RDRF 0 SCP1 0 SCP0 0 M 0 ILIE 0 IDLE 0 RCKB 0 WAKE 0 TE 0 OR 0 0 RE 0 NF 0 0 RWU 0 FE 0 0 0 SBK 0 SCR2 U SCR1 U SCR0 U
$102B
Read: Baud Rate Register TCLR (BAUD) Write: See page 157. Reset: 0 Read: Serial Communications Control Register 1 (SCCR1) Write: See page 153. Reset: Read: Serial Communications Control Register 2 (SCCR2) Write: See page 154. Reset: R8 I TIE 0
$102C
$102D
Read: Serial Communications Status TDRE $102E Register (SCSR) Write: See page 155. Reset: 1
1. SCP2 adds /39 to SCI prescaler and is present only in MC68HC(7)11E20. = Unimplemented I = Indeterminate after reset R = Reserved U = Unaffected
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 6 of 8)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 77
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Addr.
Register Name
Bit 7
6 R6/T6
5 R5/T5
4 R4/T4
3 R3/T3
2 R2/T2
1 R1/T1
Bit 0 R0/T0
$102F
Read: Serial Communications Data R7/T7 Register (SCDR) Write: See page 152. Reset: Read: Analog-to-Digital Control Status Register (ADCTL) Write: See page 218. Reset: Read: Analog-to-Digital Results Register 1 (ADR1) Write: See page 220. Reset: Read: Analog-to-Digital Results Register 2 (ADR2) Write: See page 220. Reset: Read: Analog-to-Digital Results Register 3 (ADR3) Write: See page 220. Reset: Read: Analog-to-Digital Results Register 4 (ADR4) Write: See page 220. Reset: Read: Block Protect Register (BPROT) Write: See page 99. Reset: CCF
Indeterminate after reset SCAN MULT CD CC CB CA
$1030
0 Bit 7
0 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
Indeterminate after reset Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
$1031
Indeterminate after reset Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
$1032
Indeterminate after reset Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
$1033
Indeterminate after reset Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
$1034
Indeterminate after reset PTCON 0 MBE 0 R 0 R 0 0 ELAT 0 R 1 EXCOL 0 R BPRT3 1 EXROW 0 R BPRT2 1 T1 0 R BPRT1 1 T0 0 R BPRT0 1 PGM 0 R
$1035
Read: EPROM Programming Control $1036 Register (EPROG)(1) Write: See page 101. Reset: $1037 Reserved
1. MC68HC711E20 only = Unimplemented I = Indeterminate after reset R = Reserved U = Unaffected
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 7 of 8)
Technical Data 78 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
Addr. $1038
Register Name Reserved
Bit 7 R
6 R
5 R
4 R
3 R
2 R
1 R
Bit 0 R
$1039
Read: System Configuration Options ADPU Register (OPTION) Write: See page 91. Reset: 0 Read: Arm/Reset COP Timer Circuitry Register (COPRST) Write: See page 111. Reset: Bit 7 0 ODD 0
CSEL 0 Bit 6 0 EVEN 0 SMOD 0 RAM2 0 R
IRQE(1) 0 Bit 5 0 ELAT(2) 0 MDA 0 RAM1 0 R
DLY(1) 1 Bit 4 0 BYTE 0 IRV(NE) 0 RAM0 0 R
CME 0 Bit 3 0 ROW 0 PSEL3 0 REG3 0 R 0 Bit 2 0 ERASE 0 PSEL2 1 REG2 0 R
CR1(1) 0 Bit 1 0 EELAT 0 PSEL1 1 REG1 0 R
CR0 (1) 0 Bit 0 0 EPGM 0 PSEL0 0 REG0 1 R
$103A
Read: EPROM and EEPROM $103B Programming Control Register Write: (PPROG) See page 95. Reset:
$103C
Read: Highest Priority I Bit Interrupt RBOOT and Miscellaneous Register Write: (HPRIO) See page 83. Reset: 0 Read: RAM and I/O Mapping RAM3 Register (INIT) Write: See page 89. Reset: 0 Reserved R
$103D
$103E
Read: System Configuration Register $103F (CONFIG) Write: See page 87. Reset: Read: System Configuration Register $103F (CONFIG)(3) Write: See page 87. Reset:
NOSEC 0 EE3 1 0 EE2 1 0 EE1 1 0 EE0 1 U NOSEC U
NOCOP ROMON U NOCOP U 1 1
EEON U EEON 1
1. Can be written only once in first 64 cycles out of reset in normal modes or at any time during special modes. 2. MC68HC711E9 only
3. MC68HC811E2 only = Unimplemented I = Indeterminate after reset R = Reserved U = Unaffected
Figure 4-7. Register and Control Bit Assignments (Sheet 8 of 8)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 79
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
4.4.1 RAM and Input/Output Mapping Hardware priority is built into RAM and I/O mapping. Registers have priority over RAM and RAM has priority over ROM. When a lower priority resource is mapped at the same location as a higher priority resource, a read/write of a location results in a read/write of the higher priority resource only. For example, if both the register block and the RAM are mapped to the same location, only the register block will be accessed. If RAM and ROM are located at the same position, RAM has priority. The fully static RAM can be used to store instructions, variables, and temporary data. The direct addressing mode can access RAM locations using a 1-byte address operand, saving program memory space and execution time, depending on the application. RAM contents can be preserved during periods of processor inactivity by two methods, both of which reduce power consumption. They are: 1. In the software-based stop mode, the clocks are stopped while VDD powers the MCU. Because power supply current is directly related to operating frequency in CMOS integrated circuits, only a very small amount of leakage exists when the clocks are stopped. 2. In the second method, the MODB/VSTBY pin can supply RAM power from a battery backup or from a second power supply. Figure 4-8 shows a typical standby voltage circuit for a standard 5-volt device. Adjustments to the circuit must be made for devices that operate at lower voltages. Using the MODB/VSTBY pin may require external hardware, but can be justified when a significant amount of external circuitry is operating from VDD. If VSTBY is used to maintain RAM contents, reset must be held low whenever VDD is below normal operating level. Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts.
Technical Data 80 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
VDD MAX 690 VDD 4.7 k VOUT 4.8-V NiCd VBATT + TO MODB/VSTBY OF M68HC11
Figure 4-8. RAM Standby MODB/VSTBY Connections The bootloader program is contained in the internal bootstrap ROM. This ROM, which appears as internal memory space at locations $BF00-$BFFF, is enabled only if the MCU is reset in special bootstrap mode. In expanded modes, the ROM/EPROM/OTPROM (if present) is enabled out of reset and located at the top of the memory map if the ROMON bit in the CONFIG register is set. ROM or EPROM is enabled out of reset in single-chip and bootstrap modes, regardless of the state of ROMON. For devices with 512 bytes of EEPROM, the EEPROM is located at $B600-$B7FF and has the same read cycle time as the internal ROM. The 512 bytes of EEPROM cannot be remapped to other locations. For the MC68HC811E2, EEPROM is located at $F800-$FFFF and can be remapped to any 4-Kbyte boundary. EEPROM mapping control bits (EE[3:0] in CONFIG) determine the location of the 2048 bytes of EEPROM and are present only on the MC68HC811E2. Refer to 4.4.3.1 System Configuration Register for a description of the MC68HC811E2 CONFIG register. EEPROM can be programmed or erased by software and an on-chip charge pump, allowing EEPROM changes using the single VDD supply.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 81
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
4.4.2 Mode Selection The four mode variations are selected by the logic states of the MODA and MODB pins during reset. The MODA and MODB logic levels determine the logic state of SMOD and the MDA control bits in the highest priority I-bit interrupt and miscellaneous (HPRIO) register. After reset is released, the mode select pins no longer influence the MCU operating mode. In single-chip operating mode, the MODA pin is connected to a logic level 0. In expanded mode, MODA is normally connected to VDD through a pullup resistor of 4.7 k. The MODA pin also functions as the load instruction register LIR pin when the MCU is not in reset. The open-drain active low LIR output pin drives low during the first E cycle of each instruction. The MODB pin also functions as standby power input (VSTBY), which allows RAM contents to be maintained in absence of VDD. Refer to Table 4-1, which is a summary of mode pin operation, the mode control bits, and the four operating modes. Table 4-1. Hardware Mode Select Summary
Input Levels at Reset MODB 1 1 0 0 MODA 0 1 0 1 Single chip Expanded Bootstrap Special test Mode Control Bits in HPRIO (Latched at Reset) RBOOT 0 0 1 0 SMOD 0 0 1 1 MDA 0 1 0 1
A normal mode is selected when MODB is logic 1 during reset. One of three reset vectors is fetched from address $FFFA-$FFFF, and program execution begins from the address indicated by this vector. If MODB is logic 0 during reset, the special mode reset vector is fetched from addresses $BFFA-$BFFF, and software has access to special test features. Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts.
Technical Data 82 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
Address:
$103C Bit 7 6 5 MDA(1) 4 IRV(NE)(1) 3 PSEL3 2 PSEL2 1 PSEL1 Bit 0 PSEL0
Read: Write: Resets: Single chip: Expanded: Bootstrap: Test:
RBOOT (1) SMOD(1)
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
1. The reset values depend on the mode selected at the RESET pin rising edge.
Figure 4-9. Highest Priority I-Bit Interrupt and Miscellaneous Register (HPRIO) RBOOT -- Read Bootstrap ROM Bit Valid only when SMOD is set (bootstrap or special test mode); can be written only in special modes 0 = Bootloader ROM disabled and not in map 1 = Bootloader ROM enabled and in map at $BE00-$BFFF SMOD and MDA -- Special Mode Select and Mode Select A Bits The initial value of SMOD is the inverse of the logic level present on the MODB pin at the rising edge of reset. The initial value of MDA equals the logic level present on the MODA pin at the rising edge of reset. These two bits can be read at any time. They can be written anytime in special modes. MDA can be written only once in normal modes. SMOD cannot be set once it has been cleared.
Input MODB 1 1 0 0 MODA 0 1 0 1 Single chip Expanded Bootstrap Special test Mode Latched at Reset SMOD 0 0 1 1 MDA 0 1 0 1
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 83
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
IRV(NE) -- Internal Read Visibility (Not E) Bit IRVNE can be written once in any mode. In expanded modes, IRVNE determines whether IRV is on or off. In special test mode, IRVNE is reset to 1. In all other modes, IRVNE is reset to 0. For the MC68HC811E2, this bit is IRV and only controls the internal read visibility function. 0 = No internal read visibility on external bus 1 = Data from internal reads is driven out the external data bus. In single-chip modes this bit determines whether the E clock drives out from the chip. For the MC68HC811E2, this bit has no meaning or effect in single-chip and bootstrap modes. 0 = E is driven out from the chip. 1 = E pin is driven low. Refer to the following table.
Mode Single chip Expanded Bootstrap Special test IRVNE Out of Reset 0 0 0 1 E Clock Out of Reset On On On On IRV Out of Reset Off Off Off On IRVNE Affects Only E IRV E IRV IRVNE Can Be Written Once Once Once Once
PSEL[3:0] -- Priority Select Bits Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts.
Technical Data 84 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
4.4.3 System Initialization Registers and bits that control initialization and the basic operation of the MCU are protected against writes except under special circumstances. Table 4-2 lists registers that can be written only once after reset or that must be written within the first 64 cycles after reset.
Table 4-2. Write Access Limited Registers
Operating Mode SMOD = 0 Register Address $x024 $x035 $x039 $x03C $x03D SMOD = 1 $x024 $x035 $x039 $x03C $x03D Register Name Timer interrupt mask 2 (TMSK2) Block protect register (BPROT) System configuration options (OPTION) Highest priority I-bit interrupt and miscellaneous (HPRIO) RAM and I/O map register (INIT) Timer interrupt mask 2 (TMSK2) Block protect register (BPROT) System configuration options (OPTION) Highest priority I-bit interrupt and miscellaneous (HPRIO) RAM and I/O map register (INIT) Must be Written in First 64 Cycles Bits [1:0], once only Clear bits, once only Bits [5:4], bits [2:0], once only See HPRIO description Yes, once only -- -- -- See HPRIO description -- Write Anytime Bits [7:2] Set bits only Bits [7:6], bit 3 See HPRIO description -- All, set or clear All, set or clear All, set or clear See HPRIO description All, set or clear
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 85
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
4.4.3.1 System Configuration Register The system configuration register (CONFIG) consists of an EEPROM byte and static latches that control the startup configuration of the MCU. The contents of the EEPROM byte are transferred into static working latches during reset sequences. The operation of the MCU is controlled directly by these latches and not by CONFIG itself. In normal modes, changes to CONFIG do not affect operation of the MCU until after the next reset sequence. When programming, the CONFIG register itself is accessed. When the CONFIG register is read, the static latches are accessed. See 4.6.1 EEPROM and CONFIG Programming and Erasure for information on modifying CONFIG. To take full advantage of the MCU's functionality, customers can program the CONFIG register in bootstrap mode. This can be accomplished by setting the mode pins to logic 0 and downloading a small program to internal RAM. For more information, Motorola application note AN1060 entitled M68HC11 Bootstrap Mode has been included at the back of this document. The downloadable talker will consist of: * * * Bulk erase Byte programming Communication server
All of this functionality is provided by PCbug11 which can be found on the Motorola Web site at http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/. For more information on using PCbug11 to program an E-series device, Motorola engineering bulletin EB296 entitled Programming MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 and the M68HC11EVBU has been included at the back of this document.
NOTE:
The CONFIG register on the 68HC11 is an EEPROM cell and must be programmed accordingly. Operation of the CONFIG register in the MC68HC811E2 differs from other devices in the M68HC11 E series. See Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11.
Technical Data 86 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
Address:
$103F Bit 7 6 5 4 3 NOSEC 2 NOCOP 1 ROMON Bit 0 EEON
Read: Write: Resets: Single chip: Bootstrap: Expanded: Test: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U U 1 1 U U(L) U U(L) 1 U U U U U U U
= Unimplemented U indicates a previously programmed bit. U(L) indicates that the bit resets to the logic level held in the latch prior to reset, but the function of COP is controlled by the DISR bit in TEST1 register.
Figure 4-10. System Configuration Register (CONFIG)
Address:
$103F Bit 7 6 EE2 5 EE1 4 EE0 3 NOSEC 2 NOCOP 1 Bit 0 EEON
Read: Write: Resets: Single chip: Bootstrap: Expanded: Test:
EE3
1 1 U U
1 1 U U
1 1 U U
1 1 U U
U U 1 1
U U(L) U U(L)
1 1 1 1
1 1 U 0
= Unimplemented U indicates a previously programmed bit. U(L) indicates that the bit resets to the logic level held in the latch prior to reset, but the function of COP is controlled by the DISR bit in TEST1 register.
Figure 4-11. MC68HC811E2 System Configuration Register (CONFIG)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 87
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
EE[3:0] -- EEPROM Mapping Bits EE[3:0] apply only to MC68HC811E2 and allow the 2048 bytes of EEPROM to be remapped to any 4-Kbyte boundary. See Table 4-3. Table 4-3. EEPROM Mapping
EE[3:0] 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 EEPROM Location $0800-$0FFF $1800-$1FFF $2800-$2FFF $3800-$3FFF $4800-$4FFF $5800-$5FFF $6800-$6FFF $7800-$7FFF $8800-$8FFF $9800-$9FFF $A800-$AFFF $B800-$BFFF $C800-$CFFF $D800-$DFFF $E800-$EFFF $F800-$FFFF
NOSEC -- Security Disable Bit NOSEC is invalid unless the security mask option is specified before the MCU is manufactured. If the security mask option is omitted NOSEC always reads 1. The enhanced security feature is available in the MC68S711E9 MCU. The enhancement to the standard security feature protects the EPROM as well as RAM and EEPROM. 0 = Security enabled 1 = Security disabled NOCOP -- COP System Disable Bit Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts. 1 = COP disabled 0 = COP enabled
Technical Data 88 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
ROMON -- ROM/EPROM/OTPROM Enable Bit When this bit is 0, the ROM or EPROM is disabled and that memory space becomes externally addressed. In single-chip mode, ROMON is forced to 1 to enable ROM/EPROM regardless of the state of the ROMON bit. 0 = ROM disabled from the memory map 1 = ROM present in the memory map EEON -- EEPROM Enable Bit When this bit is 0, the EEPROM is disabled and that memory space becomes externally addressed. 0 = EEPROM removed from the memory map 1 = EEPROM present in the memory map 4.4.3.2 RAM and I/O Mapping Register The internal registers used to control the operation of the MCU can be relocated on 4-Kbyte boundaries within the memory space with the use of the RAM and I/O mapping register (INIT). This 8-bit special-purpose register can change the default locations of the RAM and control registers within the MCU memory map. It can be written only once within the first 64 E-clock cycles after a reset in normal modes, and then it becomes a read-only register.
Address: $103D Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: RAM3 0 RAM2 0 RAM1 0 RAM0 0 REG3 0 REG2 0 REG1 0 REG0 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 4-12. RAM and I/O Mapping Register (INIT) RAM[3:0] -- RAM Map Position Bits These four bits, which specify the upper hexadecimal digit of the RAM address, control position of RAM in the memory map. RAM can be positioned at the beginning of any 4-Kbyte page in the memory map. It is initialized to address $0000 out of reset. Refer to Table 4-4.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 89
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
REG[3:0] -- 64-Byte Register Block Position These four bits specify the upper hexadecimal digit of the address for the 64-byte block of internal registers. The register block, positioned at the beginning of any 4-Kbyte page in the memory map, is initialized to address $1000 out of reset. Refer to Table 4-5. Table 4-4. RAM Mapping
RAM[3:0] 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Address $0000-$0xFF $1000-$1xFF $2000-$2xFF $3000-$3xFF $4000-$4xFF $5000-$5xFF $6000-$6xFF $7000-$7xFF $8000-$8xFF $9000-$9xFF $A000-$AxFF $B000-$BxFF $C000-$CxFF $D000-$DxFF $E000-$ExFF $F000-$FxFF
Table 4-5. Register Mapping
REG[3:0] 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Address $0000-$003F $1000-$103F $2000-$203F $3000-$303F $4000-$403F $5000-$503F $6000-$603F $7000-$703F $8000-$803F $9000-$903F $A000-$A03F $B000-$B03F $C000-$C03F $D000-$D03F $E000-$E03F $F000-$F03F
Technical Data 90 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Memory Map
4.4.3.3 System Configuration Options Register The 8-bit, special-purpose system configuration options register (OPTION) sets internal system configuration options during initialization. The time protected control bits, IRQE, DLY, and CR[1:0], can be written only once after a reset and then they become read-only. This minimizes the possibility of any accidental changes to the system configuration.
Address: $1039 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ADPU 6 CSEL 5 IRQE(1) 4 DLY(1) 3 CME 2 1 CR1 (1) Bit 0 CR0 (1)
1. Can be written only once in first 64 cycles out of reset in normal modes or at any time during special modes.
= Unimplemented
Figure 4-13. System Configuration Options Register (OPTION) ADPU -- Analog-to-Digital Converter Power-Up Bit Refer to Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter. CSEL -- Clock Select Bit Selects alternate clock source for on-chip EEPROM charge pump. Refer to 4.6.1 EEPROM and CONFIG Programming and Erasure for more information on EEPROM use. CSEL also selects the clock source for the A/D converter, a function discussed in Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter. IRQE -- Configure IRQ for Edge-Sensitive Only Operation Bit Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts. DLY -- Enable Oscillator Startup Delay Bit 0 = The oscillator startup delay coming out of stop mode is bypassed and the MCU resumes processing within about four bus cycles. 1 = A delay of approximately 4000 E-clock cycles is imposed as the MCU is started up from the stop power-saving mode. This delay allows the crystal oscillator to stabilize.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Technical Data 91
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
CME -- Clock Monitor Enable Bit Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts. Bit 2 -- Not implemented Always reads 0 CR[1:0] -- COP Timer Rate Select Bits The internal E clock is divided by 215 before it enters the COP watchdog system. These control bits determine a scaling factor for the watchdog timer. Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts.
4.5 EPROM/OTPROM
Certain devices in the M68HC11 E series include on-chip EPROM/OTPROM. For instance: * * * The MC68HC711E9 devices contain 12 Kbytes of on-chip EPROM (OTPROM in non-windowed package). The MC68HC711E20 has 20 Kbytes of EPROM (OTPROM in non-windowed package). The MC68HC711E32 has 32 Kbytes of EPROM (OTPROM in non-windowed package).
Standard MC68HC71E9 and MC68HC711E20 devices are shipped with the EPROM/OTPROM contents erased (all 1s). The programming operation programs 0s. Windowed devices must be erased using a suitable ultraviolet light source before reprogramming. Depending on the light source, erasing can take from 15 to 45 minutes. Using the on-chip EPROM/OTPROM programming feature requires an external 12-volt nominal power supply (VPPE). Normal programming is accomplished using the EPROM/OTPROM programming register (PPROG). PPROG is the combined EPROM/OTPROM and EEPROM programming register on all devices with EPROM/OTPROM except the MC68HC711E20. For the MC68HC711E20, there is a separate register for EPROM/OTPROM programming called the EPROG register.
Technical Data 92 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory EPROM/OTPROM
As described in the following subsections, these two methods of programming and verifying EPROM are possible: * * Programming an individual EPROM address Programming the EPROM with downloaded data
4.5.1 Programming an Individual EPROM Address In this method, the MCU programs its own EPROM by controlling the PPROG register (EPROG in MC68HC711E20). Use these procedures to program the EPROM through the MCU with: * * * The ROMON bit set in the CONFIG register The 12-volt nominal programming voltage present on the XIRQ/VPPE pin The IRQ pin must be pulled high.
NOTE:
Any operating mode can be used. This example applies to all devices with EPROM/OTPROM except for the MC68HC711E20.
EPROG LDAB STAB STAA LDAB STAB JSR CLR #$20 $103B $0,X #$21 $103B DLYEP $103B Set ELAT bit in (EPGM = 0) to enable EPROM latches. Store data to EPROM address Set EPGM bit with ELAT = 1 to enable EPROM programming voltage Delay 2-4 ms Turn off programming voltage and set to READ mode
This example applies only to MC68HC711E20.
EPROG LDAB STAB STAA LDAB STAB JSR CLR #$20 $1036 $0,X #$21 $1036 DLYEP $1036 Set ELAT bit (EPGM = 0) to enable EPROM latches. Store data to EPROM address Set EPGM bit with ELAT = 1 to enable EPROM programming voltage Delay 2-4 ms Turn off programming voltage and set to READ mode
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 93
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
4.5.2 Programming the EPROM with Downloaded Data When using this method, the EPROM is programmed by software while in the special test or bootstrap modes. User-developed software can be uploaded through the SCI or a ROM-resident EPROM programming utility can be used. The 12-volt nominal programming voltage must be present on the XIRQ/VPPE pin. To use the resident utility, bootload a 3-byte program consisting of a single jump instruction to $BF00. $BF00 is the starting address of a resident EPROM programming utility. The utility program sets the X and Y index registers to default values, then receives programming data from an external host, and puts it in EPROM. The value in IX determines programming delay time. The value in IY is a pointer to the first address in EPROM to be programmed (default = $D000). When the utility program is ready to receive programming data, it sends the host the $FF character. Then it waits. When the host sees the $FF character, the EPROM programming data is sent, starting with the first location in the EPROM array. After the last byte to be programmed is sent and the corresponding verification data is returned, the programming operation is terminated by resetting the MCU. For more information, Motorola application note AN1060 entitled M68HC11 Bootstrap Mode has been included at the back of this document.
4.5.3 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register The EPROM and EEPROM programming control register (PPROG) enables the EPROM programming voltage and controls the latching of data to be programmed. * * For MC68HC711E9, PPROG is also the EEPROM programming control register. For the MC68HC711E20, EPROM programming is controlled by the EPROG register and EEPROM programming is controlled by the PPROG register.
Technical Data 94 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory EPROM/OTPROM
Address:
$103B Bit 7 6 EVEN 0 5 ELAT(1) 0 4 BYTE 0 3 ROW 0 2 ERASE 0 1 EELAT 0 Bit 0 EPGM 0
Read: ODD Write: Reset: 0
1. MC68HC711E9 only
Figure 4-14. EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register (PPROG) ODD -- Program Odd Rows in Half of EEPROM (Test) Bit Refer to 4.6 EEPROM. EVEN -- Program Even Rows in Half of EEPROM (Test) Bit Refer to 4.6 EEPROM. ELAT -- EPROM/OTPROM Latch Control Bit When ELAT = 1, writes to EPROM cause address and data to be latched and the EPROM/OTPROM cannot be read. ELAT can be read any time. ELAT can be written any time except when EPGM = 1; then the write to ELAT is disabled. 0 = EPROM address and data bus configured for normal reads 1 = EPROM address and data bus configured for programming For the MC68HC711E9: a. EPGM enables the high voltage necessary for both EEPROM and EPROM/OTPROM programming. b. ELAT and EELAT are mutually exclusive and cannot both equal 1. BYTE -- Byte/Other EEPROM Erase Mode Bit Refer to 4.6 EEPROM. ROW -- Row/All EEPROM Erase Mode Bit Refer to 4.6 EEPROM.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 95
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
ERASE -- Erase Mode Select Bit Refer to 4.6 EEPROM. EELAT -- EEPROM Latch Control Bit Refer to 4.6 EEPROM. EPGM -- EPROM/OTPROM/EEPROM Programming Voltage Enable Bit EPGM can be read any time and can be written only when ELAT = 1 (for EPROM/OTPROM programming) or when EELAT = 1 (for EEPROM programming). 0 = Programming voltage to EPROM/OTPROM/EEPROM array disconnected 1 = Programming voltage to EPROM/OTPROM/EEPROM array connected
Address:
$1036 Bit 7 6 5 ELAT 0 0 4 EXCOL 0 3 EXROW 0 2 T1 0 1 T0 0 Bit 0 PGM 0
Read: MBE Write: Reset: 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 4-15. MC68HC711E20 EPROM Programming Control Register (EPROG) MBE -- Multiple-Byte Programming Enable Bit When multiple-byte programming is enabled, address bit 5 is considered a don't care so that bytes with address bit 5 = 0 and address bit 5 = 1 both get programmed. MBE can be read in any mode and always reads 0 in normal modes. MBE can be written only in special modes. 0 = EPROM array configured for normal programming 1 = Program two bytes with the same data Bit 6 -- Unimplemented Always reads 0
Technical Data 96 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory EPROM/OTPROM
ELAT -- EPROM/OTPROM Latch Control Bit When ELAT = 1, writes to EPROM cause address and data to be latched and the EPROM/OTPROM cannot be read. ELAT can be read any time. ELAT can be written any time except when PGM = 1; then the write to ELAT is disabled. 0 = EPROM/OTPROM address and data bus configured for normal reads 1 = EPROM/OTPROM address and data bus configured for programming EXCOL -- Select Extra Columns Bit 0 = User array selected 1 = User array is disabled and extra columns are accessed at bits [7:0]. Addresses use bits [13:5] and bits [4:0] are don't care. EXCOL can be read and written only in special modes and always returns 0 in normal modes. EXROW -- Select Extra Rows Bit 0 = User array selected 1 = User array is disabled and two extra rows are available. Addresses use bits [7:0] and bits [13:8] are don't care. EXROW can be read and written only in special modes and always returns 0 in normal modes. T[1:0] -- EPROM Test Mode Select Bits These bits allow selection of either gate stress or drain stress test modes. They can be read and written only in special modes and always read 0 in normal modes.
T1 0 0 1 1 T0 0 1 0 1 Function Selected Normal mode Reserved Gate stress Drain stress
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 97
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
PGM -- EPROM Programming Voltage Enable Bit PGM can be read any time and can be written only when ELAT = 1. 0 = Programming voltage to EPROM array disconnected 1 = Programming voltage to EPROM array connected
4.6 EEPROM
Some E-series devices contain 512 bytes of on-chip EEPROM. The MC68HC811E2 contains 2048 bytes of EEPROM with selectable base address. All E-series devices contain the EEPROM-based CONFIG register.
4.6.1 EEPROM and CONFIG Programming and Erasure The erased state of an EEPROM bit is 1. During a read operation, bit lines are precharged to 1. The floating gate devices of programmed bits conduct and pull the bit lines to 0. Unprogrammed bits remain at the precharged level and are read as 1s. Programming a bit to 1 causes no change. Programming a bit to 0 changes the bit so that subsequent reads return 0. When appropriate bits in the BPROT register are cleared, the PPROG register controls programming and erasing the EEPROM. The PPROG register can be read or written at any time, but logic enforces defined programming and erasing sequences to prevent unintentional changes to EEPROM data. When the EELAT bit in the PPROG register is cleared, the EEPROM can be read as if it were a ROM. The on-chip charge pump that generates the EEPROM programming voltage from VDD uses MOS capacitors, which are relatively small in value. The efficiency of this charge pump and its drive capability are affected by the level of VDD and the frequency of the driving clock. The load depends on the number of bits being programmed or erased and capacitances in the EEPROM array. The clock source driving the charge pump is software selectable. When the clock select (CSEL) bit in the OPTION register is 0, the E clock is
Technical Data 98 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory EEPROM
used; when CSEL is 1, an on-chip resistor-capacitor (RC) oscillator is used. The EEPROM programming voltage power supply voltage to the EEPROM array is not enabled until there has been a write to PPROG with EELAT set and PGM cleared. This must be followed by a write to a valid EEPROM location or to the CONFIG address, and then a write to PPROG with both the EELAT and EPGM bits set. Any attempt to set both EELAT and EPGM during the same write operation results in neither bit being set. 4.6.1.1 Block Protect Register This register prevents inadvertent writes to both the CONFIG register and EEPROM. The active bits in this register are initialized to 1 out of reset and can be cleared only during the first 64 E-clock cycles after reset in the normal modes. When these bits are cleared, the associated EEPROM section and the CONFIG register can be programmed or erased. EEPROM is only visible if the EEON bit in the CONFIG register is set. The bits in the BPROT register can be written to 1 at any time to protect EEPROM and the CONFIG register. In test or bootstrap modes, write protection is inhibited and BPROT can be written repeatedly. Address ranges for protected areas of EEPROM differ significantly for the MC68HC811E2. Refer to Figure 4-16.
Address: $1035 Bit 7 Read: PTCON Write: Reset: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 BPRT3 BPRT2 BPRT1 BPRT0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 4-16. Block Protect Register (BPROT) Bits [7:5] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 99
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
PTCON -- Protect CONFIG Register Bit 0 = CONFIG register can be programmed or erased normally. 1 = CONFIG register cannot be programmed or erased. BPRT[3:0] -- Block Protect Bits for EEPROM When set, these bits protect a block of EEPROM from being programmed or electronically erased. Ultraviolet light, however, can erase the entire EEPROM contents regardless of BPRT[3:0] (windowed packages only). Refer to Table 4-6 and Table 4-7. When cleared, BPRT[3:0] allow programming and erasure of the associated block. Table 4-6. EEPROM Block Protect
Bit Name BPRT0 BPRT1 BPRT2 BPRT3 Block Protected $B600-$B61F $B620-$B65F $B660-$B6DF $B6E0-$B7FF Block Size 32 bytes 64 bytes 128 bytes 288 bytes
Table 4-7. EEPROM Block Protect in MC68HC811E2 MCUs
Bit Name BPRT0 BPRT1 BPRT2 BPRT3 Block Protected $x800-$x9FF(1) $xA00-$xBFF(1) $xC00-$xDFF(1) $xE00-$xFFF(1) Block Size 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes
1. x is determined by the value of EE[3:0] in CONFIG register. Refer to Figure 4-13.
Technical Data 100 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory EEPROM
4.6.1.2 EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register The EPROM and EEPROM programming control register (PPROG) selects and controls the EEPROM programming function. Bits in PPROG enable the programming voltage, control the latching of data to be programmed, and select the method of erasure (for example, byte, row, etc.).
Address: $103B Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: ODD 0 EVEN 0 6 5 ELAT(1) 0 4 BYTE 0 3 ROW 0 2 ERASE 0 1 EELAT 0 Bit 0 EPGM 0
1. MC68HC711E9 only
Figure 4-17. EPROM and EEPROM Programming Control Register (PPROG) ODD -- Program Odd Rows in Half of EEPROM (Test) Bit EVEN -- Program Even Rows in Half of EEPROM (Test) Bit ELAT -- EPROM/OTPROM Latch Control Bit For the MC68HC711E9, EPGM enables the high voltage necessary for both EPROM/OTPROM and EEPROM programming. For MC68HC711E9, ELAT and EELAT are mutually exclusive and cannot both equal 1. 0 = EPROM address and data bus configured for normal reads 1 = EPROM address and data bus configured for programming BYTE -- Byte/Other EEPROM Erase Mode Bit This bit overrides the ROW bit. 0 = Row or bulk erase 1 = Erase only one byte ROW -- Row/All EEPROM Erase Mode Bit If BYTE is 1, ROW has no meaning. 0 = Bulk erase 1 = Row erase
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory Technical Data 101
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Table 4-8. EEPROM Erase
BYTE 0 0 1 1 ROW 0 1 0 1 Action Bulk erase (entire array) Row erase (16 bytes) Byte erase Byte erase
ERASE -- Erase Mode Select Bit 0 = Normal read or program mode 1 = Erase mode EELAT -- EEPROM Latch Control Bit 0 = EEPROM address and data bus configured for normal reads and cannot be programmed 1 = EEPROM address and data bus configured for programming or erasing and cannot be read EPGM -- EPROM/OTPROM/EEPROM Programming Voltage Enable Bit 0 = Programming voltage to EEPROM array switched off 1 = Programming voltage to EEPROM array switched on During EEPROM programming, the ROW and BYTE bits of PPROG are not used. If the frequency of the E clock is 1 MHz or less, set the CSEL bit in the OPTION register. Recall that 0s must be erased by a separate erase operation before programming. The following examples of how to program an EEPROM byte assume that the appropriate bits in BPROT are cleared.
PROG LDAB STAB STAA LDAB STAB JSR CLR #$02 $103B $XXXX #$03 $103B DLY10 $103B EELAT = 1 Set EELAT bit Store data to EEPROM address (for valid EEPROM address see memory map for each device) EELAT = 1, EPGM = 1 Turn on programming voltage Delay 10 ms Turn off high voltage and set to READ mode
Technical Data 102 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory EEPROM
4.6.1.3 EEPROM Bulk Erase This is an example of how to bulk erase the entire EEPROM. The CONFIG register is not affected in this example.
BULKE LDAB STAB STAA #$06 $103B $XXXX EELAT = 1, ERASE = 1 Set to BULK erase mode Store data to any EEPROM address (for valid EEPROM address see memory map for each device) EELAT = 1, EPGM = 1, ERASE = 1 Turn on high voltage Delay 10 ms Turn off high voltage and set to READ mode
LDAB STAB JSR CLR
#$07 $103B DLY10 $103B
4.6.1.4 EEPROM Row Erase This example shows how to perform a fast erase of large sections of EEPROM.
ROWE LDAB STAB STAB LDAB STAB JSR CLR #$0E $103B 0,X #$0F $103B DLY10 $103B ROW = 1, ERASE = 1, EELAT = 1 Set to ROW erase mode Write any data to any address in ROW ROW = 1, ERASE = 1, EELAT = 1, EPGM = 1 Turn on high voltage Delay 10 ms Turn off high voltage and set to READ mode
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 103
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
4.6.1.5 EEPROM Byte Erase This is an example of how to erase a single byte of EEPROM.
BYTEE LDAB STAB STAB LDAB STAB JSR CLR #$16 $103B 0,X #$17 $103B DLY10 $103B BYTE = 1, ERASE = 1, EELAT = 1 Set to BYTE erase mode Write any data to address to be erased BYTE = 1, ERASE = 1, EELAT = 1, EPGM = 1 Turn on high voltage Delay 10 ms Turn off high voltage and set to READ mode
4.6.1.6 CONFIG Register Programming Because the CONFIG register is implemented with EEPROM cells, use EEPROM procedures to erase and program this register. The procedure for programming is the same as for programming a byte in the EEPROM array, except that the CONFIG register address is used. CONFIG can be programmed or erased (including byte erase) while the MCU is operating in any mode, provided that PTCON in BPROT is clear. To change the value in the CONFIG register, complete this procedure. 1. Erase the CONFIG register. 2. Program the new value to the CONFIG address. 3. Initiate reset.
NOTE:
Do not initiate a reset until the procedure is complete.
4.6.2 EEPROM Security The optional security feature, available only on ROM-based MCUs, protects the EEPROM and RAM contents from unauthorized access. A program, or a key portion of a program, can be protected against unauthorized duplication. To accomplish this, the protection mechanism restricts operation of protected devices to the single-chip modes. This
Technical Data 104 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory EEPROM
prevents the memory locations from being monitored externally because single-chip modes do not allow visibility of the internal address and data buses. Resident programs, however, have unlimited access to the internal EEPROM and RAM and can read, write, or transfer the contents of these memories. An enhanced security feature which protects EPROM contents, RAM, and EEPROM from unauthorized accesses is available in MC68S711E9. Refer to Section 12. Mechanical Data and Section 13. Ordering Information for the exact part number. For further information, these engineering bulletins have been included at the back of this data book: * * EB183 -- Enabling the Security Feature on the MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR EB188 -- Enabling the Security Feature on M68HC811E2 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 105
Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
Technical Data 106 Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 5. Resets and Interrupts
5.1 Contents
5.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.3 Resets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 5.3.1 Power-On Reset (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 5.3.2 External Reset (RESET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 5.3.3 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 5.3.4 Clock Monitor Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 5.3.5 System Configuration Options Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 5.3.6 Configuration Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5.4 Effects of Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 5.4.1 Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.4.2 Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.4.3 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.4.4 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.5 Pulse Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.6 Computer Operating Properly (COP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.7 Serial Communications Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.4.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.4.9 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.4.10 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.5 Reset and Interrupt Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5.5.1 Highest Priority Interrupt and Miscellaneous Register . . . . 119 5.6 Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 5.6.1 Interrupt Recognition and Register Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . 122 5.6.2 Non-Maskable Interrupt Request (XIRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 5.6.3 Illegal Opcode Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 5.6.4 Software Interrupt (SWI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.5 Maskable Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.6 Reset and Interrupt Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts Technical Data 107
Resets and Interrupts
5.7 Low-Power Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 5.7.1 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 5.7.2 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
5.2 Introduction
Resets and interrupt operations load the program counter with a vector that points to a new location from which instructions are to be fetched. A reset immediately stops execution of the current instruction and forces the program counter to a known starting address. Internal registers and control bits are initialized so the MCU can resume executing instructions. An interrupt temporarily suspends normal program execution while an interrupt service routine is being executed. After an interrupt has been serviced, the main program resumes as if there had been no interruption.
5.3 Resets
The four possible sources of reset are: * * * * Power-on reset (POR) External reset (RESET) Computer operating properly (COP) reset Clock monitor reset
POR and RESET share the normal reset vector. COP reset and the clock monitor reset each has its own vector.
Technical Data 108 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Resets
5.3.1 Power-On Reset (POR) A positive transition on VDD generates a power-on reset (POR), which is used only for power-up conditions. POR cannot be used to detect drops in power supply voltages. A 4064 tcyc (internal clock cycle) delay after the oscillator becomes active allows the clock generator to stabilize. If RESET is at logical 0 at the end of 4064 tcyc, the CPU remains in the reset condition until RESET goes to logical 1. The POR circuit only initializes internal circuitry during cold starts. Refer to Figure 2-6. External Reset Circuit.
NOTE:
It is important to protect the MCU during power transitions. Most M68HC11 systems need an external circuit that holds the RESET pin low whenever VDD is below the minimum operating level. This external voltage level detector, or other external reset circuits, are the usual source of reset in a system.
5.3.2 External Reset (RESET) The CPU distinguishes between internal and external reset conditions by sensing whether the reset pin rises to a logic 1 in less than two E-clock cycles after an internal device releases reset. When a reset condition is sensed, the RESET pin is driven low by an internal device for four E-clock cycles, then released. Two E-clock cycles later it is sampled. If the pin is still held low, the CPU assumes that an external reset has occurred. If the pin is high, it indicates that the reset was initiated internally by either the COP system or the clock monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect an external resistor capacitor (RC) power-up delay circuit to the reset pin of M68HC11 devices because the circuit charge time constant can cause the device to misinterpret the type of reset that occurred.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 109
Resets and Interrupts
5.3.3 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Reset The MCU includes a COP system to help protect against software failures. When the COP is enabled, the software is responsible for keeping a free-running watchdog timer from timing out. When the software is no longer being executed in the intended sequence, a system reset is initiated. The state of the NOCOP bit in the CONFIG register determines whether the COP system is enabled or disabled. To change the enable status of the COP system, change the contents of the CONFIG register and then perform a system reset. In the special test and bootstrap operating modes, the COP system is initially inhibited by the disable resets (DISR) control bit in the TEST1 register. The DISR bit can subsequently be written to 0 to enable COP resets. The COP timer rate control bits CR[1:0] in the OPTION register determine the COP timeout period. The system E clock is divided by 215 and then further scaled by a factor shown in Table 5-1. After reset, these bits are 0, which selects the fastest timeout period. In normal operating modes, these bits can be written only once within 64 bus cycles after reset. Table 5-1. COP Timer Rate Select
CR[1:0] 00 01 10 11 Divide E/215 By 1 4 16 64 E= XTAL = 4.0 MHz Timeout - 0 ms, + 32.8 ms 32.768 ms 131.072 ms 524.28 ms 2.098 s 1.0 MHz XTAL = 8.0 MHz Timeout - 0 ms, + 16.4 ms 16.384 ms 65.536 ms 262.14 ms 1.049 s 2.0 MHz XTAL = 12.0 MHz Timeout - 0 ms, + 10.9 ms 10.923 ms 43.691 ms 174.76 ms 699.05 ms 3.0 MHz XTAL = 16.0 MHz Timeout - 0 ms, + 8.2 ms 8.19 ms 32.8 ms 131 ms 524 ms 4.0 MHz
Technical Data 110 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Resets
Address:
$103A Bit 7 6 Bit 6 0 5 Bit 5 0 4 Bit 4 0 3 Bit 3 0 2 Bit 2 0 1 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 0
Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 0
Figure 5-1. Arm/Reset COP Timer Circuitry Register (COPRST) Complete this 2-step reset sequence to service the COP timer: 1. Write $55 to COPRST to arm the COP timer clearing mechanism. 2. Write $AA to COPRST to clear the COP timer. Performing instructions between these two steps is possible as long as both steps are completed in the correct sequence before the timer times out.
5.3.4 Clock Monitor Reset The clock monitor circuit is based on an internal resistor capacitor (RC) time delay. If no MCU clock edges are detected within this RC time delay, the clock monitor can optionally generate a system reset. The clock monitor function is enabled or disabled by the CME control bit in the OPTION register. The presence of a timeout is determined by the RC delay, which allows the clock monitor to operate without any MCU clocks. Clock monitor is used as a backup for the COP system. Because the COP needs a clock to function, it is disabled when the clock stops. Therefore, the clock monitor system can detect clock failures not detected by the COP system. Semiconductor wafer processing causes variations of the RC timeout values between individual devices. An E-clock frequency below 10 kHz is detected as a clock monitor error. An E-clock frequency of 200 kHz or more prevents clock monitor errors. Using the clock monitor function when the E-clock is below 200 kHz is not recommended.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 111
Resets and Interrupts
Special considerations are needed when a STOP instruction is executed and the clock monitor is enabled. Because the STOP function causes the clocks to be halted, the clock monitor function generates a reset sequence if it is enabled at the time the stop mode was initiated. Before executing a STOP instruction, clear the CME bit in the OPTION register to 0 to disable the clock monitor. After recovery from STOP, set the CME bit to logic 1 to enable the clock monitor. Alternatively, executing a STOP instruction with the CME bit set to logic 1 can be used as a software initiated reset.
5.3.5 System Configuration Options Register
Address: $1039 Bit 7 Read: ADPU Write: Reset: 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 CSEL 6 5 IRQE(1) 4 DLY(1) 3 CME 2 1 CR1(1) Bit 0 CR0(1)
1. Can be written only once in first 64 cycles out of reset in normal mode or at any time in special modes = Unimplemented
Figure 5-2. System Configuration Options Register (OPTION) ADPU -- Analog-to-Digital Converter Power-Up Bit Refer to Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter. CSEL -- Clock Select Bit Refer to Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter. IRQE -- Configure IRQ for Edge-Sensitive-Only Operation Bit 0 = IRQ is configured for level-sensitive operation. 1 = IRQ is configured for edge-sensitive-only operation. DLY -- Enable Oscillator Startup Delay Bit Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory and Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter.
Technical Data 112 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Resets
CME -- Clock Monitor Enable Bit This control bit can be read or written at any time and controls whether or not the internal clock monitor circuit triggers a reset sequence when the system clock is slow or absent. When it is clear, the clock monitor circuit is disabled, and when it is set, the clock monitor circuit is enabled. Reset clears the CME bit. 0 = Clock monitor circuit disabled 1 = Slow or stopped clocks cause reset Bit 2 -- Unimplemented Always reads 0 CR[1:0] -- COP Timer Rate Select Bit The internal E clock is first divided by 215 before it enters the COP watchdog system. These control bits determine a scaling factor for the watchdog timer. See Table 5-1 for specific timeout settings.
5.3.6 Configuration Control Register
Address: $103F Bit 7 Read: EE3 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 EE2 EE1 EE0 NOSEC NOCOP ROMON EEON 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 5-3. Configuration Control Register (CONFIG) EE[3:0] -- EEPROM Mapping Bits EE[3:0] apply only to MC68HC811E2. Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory. NOSEC -- Security Mode Disable Bit Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 113
Resets and Interrupts
NOCOP -- COP System Disable Bit 0 = COP enabled (forces reset on timeout) 1 = COP disabled (does not force reset on timeout) ROMON -- ROM (EPROM) Enable Bit Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory. EEON -- EEPROM Enable Bit Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory.
5.4 Effects of Reset
When a reset condition is recognized, the internal registers and control bits are forced to an initial state. Depending on the cause of the reset and the operating mode, the reset vector can be fetched from any of six possible locations. Refer to Table 5-2. Table 5-2. Reset Cause, Reset Vector, and Operating Mode
Cause of Reset POR or RESET pin Clock monitor failure COP Watchdog Timeout Normal Mode Vector $FFFE, FFFF $FFFC, FFFD $FFFA, FFFB Special Test or Bootstrap $BFFE, $BFFF $BFFC, $BFFD $BFFA, $BFFB
These initial states then control on-chip peripheral systems to force them to known startup states, as described in the following subsections.
Technical Data 114 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Effects of Reset
5.4.1 Central Processor Unit (CPU) After reset, the central processor unit (CPU) fetches the restart vector from the appropriate address during the first three cycles and begins executing instructions. The stack pointer and other CPU registers are indeterminate immediately after reset; however, the X and I interrupt mask bits in the condition code register (CCR) are set to mask any interrupt requests. Also, the S bit in the CCR is set to inhibit stop mode.
5.4.2 Memory Map After reset, the INIT register is initialized to $01, mapping the RAM at $00 and the control registers at $1000. For the MC68HC811E2, the CONFIG register resets to $FF. EEPROM mapping bits (EE[3:0]) place the EEPROM at $F800. Refer to the memory map diagram for MC68HC811E2 in Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory.
5.4.3 Timer During reset, the timer system is initialized to a count of $0000. The prescaler bits are cleared, and all output compare registers are initialized to $FFFF. All input capture registers are indeterminate after reset. The output compare 1 mask (OC1M) register is cleared so that successful OC1 compares do not affect any I/O pins. The other four output compares are configured so that they do not affect any I/O pins on successful compares. All input capture edge-detector circuits are configured for capture disabled operation. The timer overflow interrupt flag and all eight timer function interrupt flags are cleared. All nine timer interrupts are disabled because their mask bits have been cleared. The I4/O5 bit in the PACTL register is cleared to configure the I4/O5 function as OC5; however, the OM5:OL5 control bits in the TCTL1 register are clear so OC5 does not control the PA3 pin.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 115
Resets and Interrupts
5.4.4 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI) The real-time interrupt flag (RTIF) is cleared and automatic hardware interrupts are masked. The rate control bits are cleared after reset and can be initialized by software before the real-time interrupt (RTI) system is used.
5.4.5 Pulse Accumulator The pulse accumulator system is disabled at reset so that the pulse accumulator input (PAI) pin defaults to being a general-purpose input pin.
5.4.6 Computer Operating Properly (COP) The COP watchdog system is enabled if the NOCOP control bit in the CONFIG register is cleared and disabled if NOCOP is set. The COP rate is set for the shortest duration timeout.
5.4.7 Serial Communications Interface (SCI) The reset condition of the SCI system is independent of the operating mode. At reset, the SCI baud rate control register (BAUD) is initialized to $04. All transmit and receive interrupts are masked and both the transmitter and receiver are disabled so the port pins default to being general-purpose I/O lines. The SCI frame format is initialized to an 8-bit character size. The send break and receiver wakeup functions are disabled. The TDRE and TC status bits in the SCI status register (SCSR) are both 1s, indicating that there is no transmit data in either the transmit data register or the transmit serial shift register. The RDRF, IDLE, OR, NF, FE, PF, and RAF receive-related status bits in the SCI control register 2 (SCCR2) are cleared.
Technical Data 116 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Reset and Interrupt Priority
5.4.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) The SPI system is disabled by reset. The port pins associated with this function default to being general-purpose I/O lines.
5.4.9 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter The analog-to-digital (A/D) converter configuration is indeterminate after reset. The ADPU bit is cleared by reset, which disables the A/D system. The conversion complete flag is indeterminate.
5.4.10 System The EEPROM programming controls are disabled, so the memory system is configured for normal read operation. PSEL[3:0] are initialized with the value %0110, causing the external IRQ pin to have the highest I-bit interrupt priority. The IRQ pin is configured for level-sensitive operation (for wired-OR systems). The RBOOT, SMOD, and MDA bits in the HPRIO register reflect the status of the MODB and MODA inputs at the rising edge of reset. MODA and MODB inputs select one of the four operating modes. After reset, writing SMOD and MDA in special modes causes the MCU to change operating modes. Refer to the description of HPRIO register in Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory for a detailed description of SMOD and MDA. The DLY control bit is set to specify that an oscillator startup delay is imposed upon recovery from stop mode. The clock monitor system is disabled because CME is cleared.
5.5 Reset and Interrupt Priority
Resets and interrupts have a hardware priority that determines which reset or interrupt is serviced first when simultaneous requests occur. Any maskable interrupt can be given priority over other maskable interrupts.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 117
Resets and Interrupts
The first six interrupt sources are not maskable. The priority arrangement for these sources is: 1. POR or RESET pin 2. Clock monitor reset 3. COP watchdog reset 4. XIRQ interrupt 5. Illegal opcode interrupt 6. Software interrupt (SWI) The maskable interrupt sources have this priority arrangement: 1. IRQ 2. Real-time interrupt 3. Timer input capture 1 4. Timer input capture 2 5. Timer input capture 3 6. Timer output compare 1 7. Timer output compare 2 8. Timer output compare 3 9. Timer output compare 4 10. Timer input capture 4/output compare 5 11. Timer overflow 12. Pulse accumulator overflow 13. Pulse accumulator input edge 14. SPI transfer complete 15. SCI system (refer to Figure 5-7) Any one of these interrupts can be assigned the highest maskable interrupt priority by writing the appropriate value to the PSEL bits in the HPRIO register. Otherwise, the priority arrangement remains the same. An interrupt that is assigned highest priority is still subject to global
Technical Data 118 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Reset and Interrupt Priority
masking by the I bit in the CCR, or by any associated local bits. Interrupt vectors are not affected by priority assignment. To avoid race conditions, HPRIO can be written only while I-bit interrupts are inhibited.
5.5.1 Highest Priority Interrupt and Miscellaneous Register
Address: $103C Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Single chip: Expanded: Bootstrap: Special test: 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 6 5 MDA(1) 4 IRVNE 3 PSEL2 2 PSEL2 1 PSEL1 Bit 0 PSEL0
RBOOT(1) SMOD(1)
1. The values of the RBOOT, SMOD, and MDA reset bits depend on the mode selected at the RESET pin rising edge. Refer to Table 4-1. Hardware Mode Select Summary.
Figure 5-4. Highest Priority I-Bit Interrupt and Miscellaneous Register (HPRIO) RBOOT -- Read Bootstrap ROM Bit Has meaning only when the SMOD bit is a 1 (bootstrap mode or special test mode). At all other times this bit is clear and cannot be written. Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory for more information. SMOD -- Special Mode Select Bit This bit reflects the inverse of the MODB input pin at the rising edge of reset. Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory for more information.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 119
Resets and Interrupts
MDA -- Mode Select A Bit The mode select A bit reflects the status of the MODA input pin at the rising edge of reset. Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory for more information. IRVNE -- Internal Read Visibility/Not E Bit The IRVNE control bit allows internal read accesses to be available on the external data bus during operation in expanded modes. In single-chip and bootstrap modes, IRVNE determines whether the E clock is driven out an external pin. For the MC68HC811E2, this bit is IRV and only controls internal read visibility. Refer to Section 4. Operating Modes and On-Chip Memory for more information. PSEL[3:0] -- Priority Select Bits These bits select one interrupt source to be elevated above all other I-bit-related sources and can be written only while the I bit in the CCR is set (interrupts disabled). Table 5-3. Highest Priority Interrupt Selection
PSEL[3:0] 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Interrupt Source Promoted Timer overflow Pulse accumulator overflow Pulse accumulator input edge SPI serial transfer complete SCI serial system Reserved (default to IRQ) IRQ (external pin or parallel I/O) Real-time interrupt Timer input capture 1 Timer input capture 2 Timer input capture 3 Timer output compare 1 Timer output compare 2 Timer output compare 3 Timer output compare 4 Timer input capture 4/output compare 5
Technical Data 120 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Interrupts
5.6 Interrupts
The MCU has 18 interrupt vectors that support 22 interrupt sources. The 15 maskable interrupts are generated by on-chip peripheral systems. These interrupts are recognized when the global interrupt mask bit (I) in the condition code register (CCR) is clear. The three non-maskable interrupt sources are illegal opcode trap, software interrupt, and XIRQ pin. Refer to Table 5-4, which shows the interrupt sources and vector assignments for each source. Table 5-4. Interrupt and Reset Vector Assignments
Vector Address
FFC0, C1 - FFD4, D5 Reserved
Interrupt Source
CCR Mask Bit
--
Local Mask
--
FFD6, D7
SCI serial system * SCI receive data register full * SCI receiver overrun * SCI transmit data register empty * SCI transmit complete * SCI idle line detect SPI serial transfer complete Pulse accumulator input edge Pulse accumulator overflow Timer overflow Timer input capture 4/output compare 5 Timer output compare 4 Timer output compare 3 Timer output compare 2 Timer output compare 1 Timer input capture 3 Timer input capture 2 Timer input capture 1 Real-time interrupt IRQ (external pin) XIRQ pin Software interrupt Illegal opcode trap COP failure Clock monitor fail RESET
I
RIE RIE TIE TCIE ILIE SPIE PAII PAOVI TOI I4/O5I OC4I OC3I OC2I OC1I IC3I IC2I IC1I RTII None None None None NOCOP CME None
FFD8, D9 FFDA, DB FFDC, DD FFDE, DF FFE0, E1 FFE2, E3 FFE4, E5 FFE6, E7 FFE8, E9 FFEA, EB FFEC, ED FFEE, EF FFF0, F1 FFF2, F3 FFF4, F5 FFF6, F7 FFF8, F9 FFFA, FB FFFC, FD FFFE, FF MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I X None None None None None
Technical Data Resets and Interrupts 121
Resets and Interrupts
For some interrupt sources, such as the SCI interrupts, the flags are automatically cleared during the normal course of responding to the interrupt requests. For example, the RDRF flag in the SCI system is cleared by the automatic clearing mechanism consisting of a read of the SCI status register while RDRF is set, followed by a read of the SCI data register. The normal response to an RDRF interrupt request would be to read the SCI status register to check for receive errors, then to read the received data from the SCI data register. These steps satisfy the automatic clearing mechanism without requiring special instructions.
5.6.1 Interrupt Recognition and Register Stacking An interrupt can be recognized at any time after it is enabled by its local mask, if any, and by the global mask bit in the CCR. Once an interrupt source is recognized, the CPU responds at the completion of the instruction being executed. Interrupt latency varies according to the number of cycles required to complete the current instruction. When the CPU begins to service an interrupt, the contents of the CPU registers are pushed onto the stack in the order shown in Table 5-5. After the CCR value is stacked, the I bit and the X bit, if XIRQ is pending, are set to inhibit further interrupts. The interrupt vector for the highest priority pending source is fetched and execution continues at the address specified by the vector. At the end of the interrupt service routine, the return-from-interrupt instruction is executed and the saved registers are pulled from the stack in reverse order so that normal program execution can resume. Refer to Section 3. Central Processor Unit (CPU). Table 5-5. Stacking Order on Entry to Interrupts
Memory Location SP SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 SP-4 SP-5 SP-6 SP-7 SP-8 CPU Registers PCL PCH IYL IYH IXL IXH ACCA ACCB CCR
Technical Data 122 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Interrupts
5.6.2 Non-Maskable Interrupt Request (XIRQ) Non-maskable interrupts are useful because they can always interrupt CPU operations. The most common use for such an interrupt is for serious system problems, such as program runaway or power failure. The XIRQ input is an updated version of the NMI (non-maskable interrupt) input of earlier MCUs. Upon reset, both the X bit and I bit of the CCR are set to inhibit all maskable interrupts and XIRQ. After minimum system initialization, software can clear the X bit by a TAP instruction, enabling XIRQ interrupts. Thereafter, software cannot set the X bit. Thus, an XIRQ interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt. Because the operation of the I-bit-related interrupt structure has no effect on the X bit, the internal XIRQ pin remains unmasked. In the interrupt priority logic, the XIRQ interrupt has a higher priority than any source that is maskable by the I bit. All I-bit-related interrupts operate normally with their own priority relationship. When an I-bit-related interrupt occurs, the I bit is automatically set by hardware after stacking the CCR byte. The X bit is not affected. When an X-bit-related interrupt occurs, both the X and I bits are automatically set by hardware after stacking the CCR. A return-from-interrupt instruction restores the X and I bits to their pre-interrupt request state.
5.6.3 Illegal Opcode Trap Because not all possible opcodes or opcode sequences are defined, the MCU includes an illegal opcode detection circuit, which generates an interrupt request. When an illegal opcode is detected and the interrupt is recognized, the current value of the program counter is stacked. After interrupt service is complete, reinitialize the stack pointer so repeated execution of illegal opcodes does not cause stack underflow. Left uninitialized, the illegal opcode vector can point to a memory location that contains an illegal opcode. This condition causes an infinite loop that causes stack underflow. The stack grows until the system crashes. The illegal opcode trap mechanism works for all unimplemented opcodes on all four opcode map pages. The address stacked as the
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts Technical Data 123
Resets and Interrupts
return address for the illegal opcode interrupt is the address of the first byte of the illegal opcode. Otherwise, it would be almost impossible to determine whether the illegal opcode had been one or two bytes. The stacked return address can be used as a pointer to the illegal opcode so the illegal opcode service routine can evaluate the offending opcode.
5.6.4 Software Interrupt (SWI) SWI is an instruction, and thus cannot be interrupted until complete. SWI is not inhibited by the global mask bits in the CCR. Because execution of SWI sets the I mask bit, once an SWI interrupt begins, other interrupts are inhibited until SWI is complete, or until user software clears the I bit in the CCR.
5.6.5 Maskable Interrupts The maskable interrupt structure of the MCU can be extended to include additional external interrupt sources through the IRQ pin. The default configuration of this pin is a low-level sensitive wired-OR network. When an event triggers an interrupt, a software accessible interrupt flag is set. When enabled, this flag causes a constant request for interrupt service. After the flag is cleared, the service request is released.
5.6.6 Reset and Interrupt Processing Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6 illustrate the reset and interrupt process. Figure 5-5 illustrates how the CPU begins from a reset and how interrupt detection relates to normal opcode fetches. Figure 5-6 is an expansion of a block in Figure 5-5 and illustrates interrupt priorities. Figure 5-7 shows the resolution of interrupt sources within the SCI subsystem.
Technical Data 124 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Interrupts
HIGHEST PRIORITY
POWER-ON RESET (POR)
DELAY 4064 E CYCLES EXTERNAL RESET
CLOCK MONITOR FAIL (WITH CME = 1)
LOWEST PRIORITY
COP WATCHDOG TIMEOUT (WITH NOCOP = 0) LOAD PROGRAM COUNTER WITH CONTENTS OF $FFFE, $FFFF (VECTOR FETCH) LOAD PROGRAM COUNTER WITH CONTENTS OF $FFFC, $FFFD (VECTOR FETCH) LOAD PROGRAM COUNTER WITH CONTENTS OF $FFFA, $FFFB (VECTOR FETCH)
SET BITS S, I, AND X RESET MCU HARDWARE
1A
BEGIN INSTRUCTION SEQUENCE
Y
BIT X IN CCR = 1? N XIRQ PIN LOW? N Y
STACK CPU REGISTERS SET BITS I AND X FETCH VECTOR $FFF4, $FFF5
2A
Figure 5-5. Processing Flow Out of Reset (Sheet 1 of 2)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 125
Resets and Interrupts
2A
Y
BIT I IN CCR = 1? N ANY I-BIT INTERRUPT PENDING? N FETCH OPCODE Y
STACK CPU REGISTERS
STACK CPU REGISTERS SET BIT I IN CCR FETCH VECTOR $FFF8, $FFF9
Y
ILLEGAL OPCODE? N WAI Y INSTRUCTION? N
STACK CPU REGISTERS
STACK CPU REGISTERS SET BIT I IN CCR FETCH VECTOR $FFF6, $FFF7 RESTORE CPU REGISTERS FROM STACK
Y
SWI INSTRUCTION? N
N
ANY INTERRUPT PENDING? Y SET BIT I IN CCR
Y
RTI INSTRUCTION? N EXECUTE THIS INSTRUCTION
RESOLVE INTERRUPT PRIORITY AND FETCH VECTOR FOR HIGHEST PENDING SOURCE SEE FIGURE 5-2
1A
Figure 5-5. Processing Flow Out of Reset (Sheet 2 of 2)
Technical Data 126 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Interrupts
BEGIN
X BIT IN CCR SET ? NO
YES
XIRQ PIN LOW ? NO
YES SET X BIT IN CCR FETCH VECTOR $FFF4, FFF5
HIGHEST PRIORITY INTERRUPT ? NO
YES
FETCH VECTOR
IRQ ? NO
YES
FETCH VECTOR $FFF2, FFF3
RTII = 1 ? NO
YES
REAL-TIME INTERRUPT ? NO
YES
FETCH VECTOR $FFF0, FFF1
YES IC1I = 1 ? NO
TIMER IC1F ? NO
YES
FETCH VECTOR $FFEE, FFEF
YES IC2I = 1 ? NO
TIMER IC2F ? NO
YES
FETCH VECTOR $FFEC, FFED
YES IC3I = 1 ? NO
TIMER IC3F ? NO
YES
FETCH VECTOR $FFEA, FFEB
YES OC1I = 1 ? NO 2A
TIMER OC1F ? NO
YES
FETCH VECTOR $FFE8, FFE9
2B
Figure 5-6. Interrupt Priority Resolution (Sheet 1 of 2)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 127
Resets and Interrupts
2A
2B
Y OC2I = 1? N Y
FLAG OC2F = 1? N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFE6, $FFE7
OC3I = 1? N
FLAG OC3F = 1 N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFE4, $FFE5
OC4I = 1? N
Y
FLAG OC4F = 1? N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFE2, $FFE3
I4/O5I = 1? N
Y
FLAG I4/O5IF = 1? N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFE0, $FFE1
Y TOI = 1? N Y
FLAG TOF = 1? N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFDE, $FFDF
PAOVI = 1? N
FLAG PAOVF = 1 N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFDC, $FFDD
PAII = 1? N
Y
FLAG PAIF = 1? N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFDA, $FFDB
SPIE = 1? N SCI INTERRUPT? SEE FIGURE 5-3 N
Y
FLAGS SPIF = 1? OR MODF = 1? N
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFD8, $FFD9
Y
FETCH VECTOR $FFD6, $FFD7 FETCH VECTOR $FFF2, $FFF3 END
Figure 5-6. Interrupt Priority Resolution (Sheet 2 of 2)
Technical Data 128 Resets and Interrupts MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Low-Power Operation
BEGIN
FLAG RDRF = 1? N
Y
OR = 1? N
Y
RIE = 1? N
Y
RE = 1? N
Y
TDRE = 1? N
Y
TIE = 1? N
Y
TE = 1? N
Y
TC = 1? N
Y
TCIE = 1? N
Y
IDLE = 1? N
Y ILIE = 1? N
Y
RE = 1? N
Y
NO VALID SCI REQUEST
VALID SCI REQUEST
Figure 5-7. Interrupt Source Resolution Within SCI
5.7 Low-Power Operation
Both stop mode and wait mode suspend CPU operation until a reset or interrupt occurs. Wait mode suspends processing and reduces power consumption to an intermediate level. Stop mode turns off all on-chip clocks and reduces power consumption to an absolute minimum while retaining the contents of the entire RAM array.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 129
Resets and Interrupts
5.7.1 Wait Mode The WAI opcode places the MCU in wait mode, during which the CPU registers are stacked and CPU processing is suspended until a qualified interrupt is detected. The interrupt can be an external IRQ, an XIRQ, or any of the internally generated interrupts, such as the timer or serial interrupts. The on-chip crystal oscillator remains active throughout the wait standby period. The reduction of power in the wait condition depends on how many internal clock signals driving on-chip peripheral functions can be shut down. The CPU is always shut down during wait. While in the wait state, the address/data bus repeatedly runs read cycles to the address where the CCR contents were stacked. The MCU leaves the wait state when it senses any interrupt that has not been masked. The free-running timer system is shut down only if the I bit is set to 1 and the COP system is disabled by NOCOP being set to 1. Several other systems also can be in a reduced power-consumption state depending on the state of software-controlled configuration control bits. Power consumption by the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter is not affected significantly by the wait condition. However, the A/D converter current can be eliminated by writing the ADPU bit to 0. The SPI system is enabled or disabled by the SPE control bit. The SCI transmitter is enabled or disabled by the TE bit, and the SCI receiver is enabled or disabled by the RE bit. Therefore, the power consumption in wait is dependent on the particular application.
5.7.2 Stop Mode Executing the STOP instruction while the S bit in the CCR is equal to 0 places the MCU in stop mode. If the S bit is not 0, the stop opcode is treated as a no-op (NOP). Stop mode offers minimum power consumption because all clocks, including the crystal oscillator, are stopped while in this mode. To exit stop and resume normal processing, a logic low level must be applied to one of the external interrupts (IRQ or XIRQ) or to the RESET pin. A pending edge-triggered IRQ can also bring the CPU out of stop.
Technical Data 130 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Resets and Interrupts Low-Power Operation
Because all clocks are stopped in this mode, all internal peripheral functions also stop. The data in the internal RAM is retained as long as VDD power is maintained. The CPU state and I/O pin levels are static and are unchanged by stop. Therefore, when an interrupt comes to restart the system, the MCU resumes processing as if there were no interruption. If reset is used to restart the system, a normal reset sequence results in which all I/O pins and functions are also restored to their initial states. To use the IRQ pin as a means of recovering from stop, the I bit in the CCR must be clear (IRQ not masked). The XIRQ pin can be used to wake up the MCU from stop regardless of the state of the X bit in the CCR, although the recovery sequence depends on the state of the X bit. If X is set to 0 (XIRQ not masked), the MCU starts up, beginning with the stacking sequence leading to normal service of the XIRQ request. If X is set to 1 (XIRQ masked or inhibited), then processing continues with the instruction that immediately follows the STOP instruction, and no XIRQ interrupt service is requested or pending. Because the oscillator is stopped in stop mode, a restart delay may be imposed to allow oscillator stabilization upon leaving stop. If the internal oscillator is being used, this delay is required; however, if a stable external oscillator is being used, the DLY control bit can be used to bypass this startup delay. The DLY control bit is set by reset and can be optionally cleared during initialization. If the DLY equal to 0 option is used to avoid startup delay on recovery from stop, then reset should not be used as the means of recovering from stop, as this causes DLY to be set again by reset, imposing the restart delay. This same delay also applies to power-on reset, regardless of the state of the DLY control bit, but does not apply to a reset while the clocks are running.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 131
Resets and Interrupts
Technical Data 132 Resets and Interrupts
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
6.1 Contents
6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Port C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Port D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Port E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Handshake Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Parallel I/O Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.2 Introduction
All M68HC11 E-series MCUs have five input/output (I/O) ports and up to 38 I/O lines, depending on the operating mode. Refer to Table 6-1 for a summary of the ports and their shared functions. Table 6-1. Input/Output Ports
Port Port A Port B Port C Port D Port E Input Pins 3 -- -- -- 8 Output Pins 3 8 -- -- -- Bidirectional Pins 2 -- 8 6 -- Timer High-order address Low-order address and data bus Serial communications interface (SCI) and serial peripheral interface (SPI) Analog-to-digital (A/D) converter Shared Functions
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Technical Data 133
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Port pin function is mode dependent. Do not confuse pin function with the electrical state of the pin at reset. Port pins are either driven to a specified logic level or are configured as high-impedance inputs. I/O pins configured as high-impedance inputs have port data that is indeterminate. In port descriptions, an I indicates this condition. Port pins that are driven to a known logic level during reset are shown with a value of either 1 or 0. Some control bits are unaffected by reset. Reset states for these bits are indicated with a U.
6.3 Port A
Port A shares functions with the timer system and has: * * * Three input-only pins Three output-only pins Two bidirectional I/O pins
Address:
$1000 Bit 7 6 PA6 0 OC2 OC1 5 PA5 0 OC3 OC1 4 PA4 0 OC4 OC1 3 PA3 I IC4/OC5 OC1 2 PA2 I IC1 -- 1 PA1 I IC2 -- Bit 0 PA0 I IC3 --
Read: PA7 Write: Reset: Alternate function: And/or: I PAI OC1
I = Indeterminate after reset
Figure 6-1. Port A Data Register (PORTA)
Technical Data 134 Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port A
Address:
$1026 Bit 7 6 PAEWN 0 5 PAMOD 0 4 PEDGE 0 3 DDRA3 0 2 I4/O5 0 1 RTR1 0 Bit 0 RTR0 0
Read: Write: Reset: DDRA7 0
Figure 6-2. Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) DDRA7 -- Data Direction for Port A Bit 7 Overridden if an output compare function is configured to control the PA7 pin 0 = Input 1 = Output The pulse accumulator uses port A bit 7 as the PAI input, but the pin can also be used as general-purpose I/O or as an output compare.
NOTE:
Even when port A bit 7 is configured as an output, the pin still drives the input to the pulse accumulator. PAEN -- Pulse Accumulator System Enable Bit Refer to Section 9. Timing System. PAMOD -- Pulse Accumulator Mode Bit Refer to Section 9. Timing System. PEDGE -- Pulse Accumulator Edge Control Bit Refer to Section 9. Timing System. DDRA3 -- Data Direction for Port A Bit 3 This bit is overridden if an output compare function is configured to control the PA3 pin. 0 = Input 1 = Output I4/O5 -- Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Bit Refer to Section 9. Timing System. RTR[1:0] -- RTI Interrupt Rate Select Bits Refer to Section 9. Timing System.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Technical Data 135
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports 6.4 Port B
In single-chip or bootstrap modes, port B pins are general-purpose outputs. In expanded or special test modes, port B pins are high-order address outputs.
Address: $1004 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Single-chip or bootstrap modes: Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0
Expanded or special test modes: Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADDR15 ADDR14 ADDR13 ADDR12 ADDR11 ADDR10 ADDR9 ADDR8
Figure 6-3. Port B Data Register (PORTB)
6.5 Port C
In single-chip and bootstrap modes, port C pins reset to high-impedance inputs. (DDRC bits are set to 0.) In expanded and special test modes, port C pins are multiplexed address/data bus and the port C register address is treated as an external memory location.
Address: $1003 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Single-chip or bootstrap modes: Read: Write: Reset: Expanded or special test modes: Read: Write: Reset: ADDR7 DATA7 ADDR6 DATA6 ADDR5 DATA5 ADDR4 DATA4 ADDR3 DATA3 ADDR2 DATA2 ADDR1 DATA1 ADDR0 DATA0 Indeterminate after reset PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
Indeterminate after reset
Figure 6-4. Port C Data Register (PORTC)
Technical Data 136 Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port C
Address:
$1005 Bit 7 6 PCL6 5 PCL5 4 PCL4 3 PCL3 2 PCL2 1 PCL1 Bit 0 PCL0
Read: PCL7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset
Figure 6-5. Port C Latched Register (PORTCL) PORTCL is used in the handshake clearing mechanism. When an active edge occurs on the STRA pin, port C data is latched into the PORTCL register. Reads of this register return the last value latched into PORTCL and clear STAF flag (following a read of PIOC with STAF set).
Address: $1007 Bit 7 Read: DDRC7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DDRC6 DDRC5 DDRC4 DDRC3 DDRC2 DDRC1 DDRC0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 6-6. Port C Data Direction Register (DDRC) DDRC[7:0] -- Port C Data Direction Bits In handshake output mode, DDRC bits select the 3-stated output option (DDCx = 1). 0 = Input 1 = Output
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Technical Data 137
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports 6.6 Port D
In all modes, port D bits [5:0] can be used either for general-purpose I/O or with the serial communications interface (SCI) and serial peripheral interface (SPI) subsystems. During reset, port D pins PD[5:0] are configured as high-impedance inputs (DDRD bits cleared).
Address: $1008 Bit 7 Read: 0 Write: Reset: Alternate Function: -- -- -- -- I PD5 SS I PD4 SCK I PD3 MOSI I PD2 MISO I PD1 Tx I PD0 RxD 0 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
I = Indeterminate after reset
Figure 6-7. Port D Data Register (PORTD)
Address:
$1009 Bit 7 6 5 DDRD5 4 DDRD4 0 3 DDRD3 0 2 DDRD2 0 1 DDRD1 0 Bit 0 DDRD0 0
Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 6-8. Port D Data Direction Register (DDRD) Bits [7:6] -- Unimplemented Always read 0 DDRD[5:0] -- Port D Data Direction Bits When DDRD bit 5 is 1 and MSTR = 1 in SPCR, PD5/SS is a general-purpose output and mode fault logic is disabled. 0 = Input 1 = Output
Technical Data 138 Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports Port E
6.7 Port E
Port E is used for general-purpose static inputs or pins that share functions with the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter system. When some port E pins are being used for general-purpose input and others are being used as A/D inputs, PORTE should not be read during the sample portion of an A/D conversion.
Address: $100A Bit 7 Read: PE7 Write: Reset: Alternate Function: AN7 AN6 AN5 Indeterminate after reset AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 6-9. Port E Data Register (PORTE)
6.8 Handshake Protocol
Simple and full handshake input and output functions are available on ports B and C pins in single-chip mode. In simple strobed mode, port B is a strobed output port and port C is a latching input port. The two activities are available simultaneously. The STRB output is pulsed for two E-clock periods each time there is a write to the PORTB register. The INVB bit in the PIOC register controls the polarity of STRB pulses. Port C levels are latched into the alternate port C latch (PORTCL) register on each assertion of the STRA input. STRA edge select, flag, and interrupt enable bits are located in the PIOC register. Any or all of the port C lines can still be used as general-purpose I/O while in strobed input mode.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Technical Data 139
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Full handshake modes use port C pins and the STRA and STRB lines. Input and output handshake modes are supported, and output handshake mode has a 3-stated variation. STRA is an edge-detecting input and STRB is a handshake output. Control and enable bits are located in the PIOC register. In full input handshake mode, the MCU asserts STRB to signal an external system that it is ready to latch data. Port C logic levels are latched into PORTCL when the STRA line is asserted by the external system. The MCU then negates STRB. The MCU reasserts STRB after the PORTCL register is read. In this mode, a mix of latched inputs, static inputs, and static outputs is allowed on port C, differentiated by the data direction bits and use of the PORTC and PORTCL registers. In full output handshake mode, the MCU writes data to PORTCL which, in turn, asserts the STRB output to indicate that data is ready. The external system reads port C data and asserts the STRA input to acknowledge that data has been received. In the 3-state variation of output handshake mode, lines intended as 3-state handshake outputs are configured as inputs by clearing the corresponding DDRC bits. The MCU writes data to PORTCL and asserts STRB. The external system responds by activating the STRA input, which forces the MCU to drive the data in PORTC out on all of the port C lines. After the trailing edge of the active signal on STRA, the MCU negates the STRB signal. The 3-state mode variation does not allow part of port C to be used for static inputs while other port C pins are being used for handshake outputs. Refer to the 6.9 Parallel I/O Control Register for further information.
Technical Data 140 Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports Parallel I/O Control Register
6.9 Parallel I/O Control Register
The parallel handshake functions are available only in the single-chip operating mode. PIOC is a read/write register except for bit 7, which is read only. Table 6-2 shows a summary of handshake operations.
Address: $1002 Bit 7 Read: STAF Write: Reset: 0 U = Unaffected 0 0 0 0 U 1 1 STAI CWOM HNDS OIN PLS EGA INVB 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 6-10. Parallel I/O Control Register (PIOC) STAF -- Strobe A Interrupt Status Flag STAF is set when the selected edge occurs on strobe A. This bit can be cleared by a read of PIOC with STAF set followed by a read of PORTCL (simple strobed or full input handshake mode) or a write to PORTCL (output handshake mode). 0 = No edge on strobe A 1 = Selected edge on strobe A STAI -- Strobe A Interrupt Enable Mask Bit 0 = STAF does not request interrupt 1 = STAF requests interrupt CWOM -- Port C Wired-OR Mode Bit (affects all eight port C pins) It is customary to have an external pullup resistor on lines that are driven by open-drain devices. 0 = Port C outputs are normal CMOS outputs. 1 = Port C outputs are open-drain outputs. HNDS -- Handshake Mode Bit 0 = Simple strobe mode 1 = Full input or output handshake mode
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Technical Data 141
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
OIN -- Output or Input Handshake Select Bit HNDS must be set to 1 for this bit to have meaning. 0 = Input handshake 1 = Output handshake PLS -- Pulsed/Interlocked Handshake Operation Bit HNDS must be set to 1 for this bit to have meaning. When interlocked handshake is selected, strobe B is active until the selected edge of strobe A is detected. 0 = Interlocked handshake 1 = Pulsed handshake (Strobe B pulses high for two E-clock cycles.) EGA -- Active Edge for Strobe A Bit 0 = STRA falling edge selected, high level activates port C outputs (output handshake) 1 = STRA rising edge selected, low level activates port C outputs (output handshake) INVB -- Invert Strobe B Bit 0 = Active level is logic 0. 1 = Active level is logic 1.
Technical Data 142 Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports Parallel I/O Control Register
Table 6-2. Parallel I/O Control
STAF Clearing Sequence Simple strobed mode Read PIOC with STAF = 1 then read PORTCL Read PIOC with STAF = 1 then read PORTCL Read PIOC with STAF = 1 then write PORTCL HNDS OIN PLS EGA Port B Port C
0
X
X
0 1
Inputs latched STRB pulses into PORTCL on on writes any active edge to PORTB on STRA Inputs latched into PORTCL on any active edge on STRA Normal output port, unaffected in handshake modes
Full-input handshake mode Fulloutput handshake mode
1
0
0 = STRB active level 1 = STRB active pulse
1 0
1
1
0 = STRB active level 1 = STRB active pulse
0 1 Port C Driven
STRA Follow Active Edge Follow DDRC DDRC
Driven as outputs Normal output if STRA at active port, level; follows unaffected in DDRC handshake if STRA not at modes active level
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Technical Data 143
Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
Technical Data 144 Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 7. Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
7.1 Contents
7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Transmit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.6 Wakeup Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 7.6.1 Idle-Line Wakeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 7.6.2 Address-Mark Wakeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 7.7 SCI Error Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
7.8 SCI Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 7.8.1 Serial Communications Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 7.8.2 Serial Communications Control Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 7.8.3 Serial Communications Control Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 7.8.4 Serial Communication Status Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 7.8.5 Baud Rate Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 7.9 7.10 Status Flags and Interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Receiver Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.2 Introduction
The serial communications interface (SCI) is a universal asynchronous receiver transmitter (UART), one of two independent serial input/output (I/O) subsystems in the M68HC11 E series of microcontrollers. It has a standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format (one start bit , eight or nine data bits, and one stop bit). Several baud rates are available. The SCI
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 145
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
transmitter and receiver are independent, but use the same data format and bit rate. All members of the E series contain the same SCI, with one exception. The SCI system in the MC68HC11E20 and MC68HC711E20 MCUs have an enhanced SCI baud rate generator. A divide-by-39 stage has been added that is enabled by an extra bit in the BAUD register. This increases the available SCI baud rate selections. Refer to Figure 7-8 and 7.8.5 Baud Rate Register.
7.3 Data Format
The serial data format requires these conditions: 1. An idle line in the high state before transmission or reception of a message 2. A start bit, logic 0, transmitted or received, that indicates the start of each character 3. Data that is transmitted and received least significant bit (LSB) first 4. A stop bit, logic 1, used to indicate the end of a frame. A frame consists of a start bit, a character of eight or nine data bits, and a stop bit. 5. A break, defined as the transmission or reception of a logic 0 for some multiple number of frames Selection of the word length is controlled by the M bit of SCI control register (SCCR1).
7.4 Transmit Operation
The SCI transmitter includes a parallel transmit data register (SCDR) and a serial shift register. The contents of the serial shift register can be written only through the SCDR. This double buffered operation allows a character to be shifted out serially while another character is waiting in the SCDR to be transferred into the serial shift register. The output of the serial shift register is applied to TxD as long as transmission is in
Technical Data 146 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Transmit Operation
progress or the transmit enable (TE) bit of serial communication control register 2 (SCCR2) is set. The block diagram, Figure 7-1, shows the transmit serial shift register and the buffer logic at the top of the figure.
TRANSMITTER BAUD RATE CLOCK
WRITE ONLY SCDR Tx BUFFER DDD1 10 (11) - BIT Tx SHIFT REGISTER H (8) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L PIN BUFFER AND CONTROL SEE NOTE PD1 TxD
SHIFT ENABLE
TRANSFER Tx BUFFER
JAM ENABLE
SIZE 8/9
PREAMBLE--JAM 1s
BREAK--JAM 0s
8
FORCE PIN DIRECTION (OUT) TRANSMITTER CONTROL LOGIC
8 WAKE RDRF TDRE IDLE OR TC NF R8 T8 M FE
SCCR1 SCI CONTROL 1
SCSR INTERRUPT STATUS
8 TDRE TIE TC TCIE RWU
TCIE
SCCR2 SCI CONTROL 2
SCI Rx REQUESTS
SCI INTERRUPT REQUEST
SBK
ILIE
RIE
TIE
RE
TE
INTERNAL DATA BUS
Note: Refer to Figure B-1. EVBU Schematic Diagram for an example of connecting TxD to a PC.
Figure 7-1. SCI Transmitter Block Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Technical Data 147
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) 7.5 Receive Operation
During receive operations, the transmit sequence is reversed. The serial shift register receives data and transfers it to a parallel receive data register (SCDR) as a complete word. This double buffered operation allows a character to be shifted in serially while another character is already in the SCDR. An advanced data recovery scheme distinguishes valid data from noise in the serial data stream. The data input is selectively sampled to detect receive data, and a majority voting circuit determines the value and integrity of each bit. See Figure 7-2.
7.6 Wakeup Feature
The wakeup feature reduces SCI service overhead in multiple receiver systems. Software for each receiver evaluates the first character of each message. The receiver is placed in wakeup mode by writing a 1 to the RWU bit in the SCCR2 register. While RWU is 1, all of the receiver-related status flags (RDRF, IDLE, OR, NF, and FE) are inhibited (cannot become set). Although RWU can be cleared by a software write to SCCR2, to do so would be unusual. Normally, RWU is set by software and is cleared automatically with hardware. Whenever a new message begins, logic alerts the sleeping receivers to wake up and evaluate the initial character of the new message. Two methods of wakeup are available: * * Idle-line wakeup Address-mark wakeup
During idle-line wakeup, a sleeping receiver awakens as soon as the RxD line becomes idle. In the address-mark wakeup, logic 1 in the most significant bit (MSB) of a character wakes up all sleeping receivers.
Technical Data 148 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Wakeup Feature
RECEIVER BAUD RATE CLOCK DDD0 SEE NOTE PD0 RxD PIN BUFFER AND CONTROL DISABLE DRIVER RE DATA RECOVERY STOP 10 (11) - BIT Rx SHIFT REGISTER (8) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ALL 1s START 8 WAKE RDRF TDRE IDLE READ ONLY 8 RDRF RIE IDLE ILIE OR RIE 8 INTERNAL DATA BUS /16
MSB
M
WAKEUP LOGIC
RWU
OR
TC
NF
R8
SCCR1 SCI CONTROL 1
SCSR SCI STATUS 1
FE
T8
M
SCDR Rx BUFFER
RWU
TCIE
SCCR2 SCI CONTROL 2
SCI Tx REQUESTS
SCI INTERRUPT REQUEST
Note: Refer to Figure B-1. EVBU Schematic Diagram for an example of connecting RxD to a PC.
Figure 7-2. SCI Receiver Block Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Technical Data 149
SBK
ILIE
RIE
TIE
RE
TE
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
7.6.1 Idle-Line Wakeup To use the receiver wakeup method, establish a software addressing scheme to allow the transmitting devices to direct a message to individual receivers or to groups of receivers. This addressing scheme can take any form as long as all transmitting and receiving devices are programmed to understand the same scheme. Because the addressing information is usually the first frame(s) in a message, receivers that are not part of the current task do not become burdened with the entire set of addressing frames. All receivers are awake (RWU = 0) when each message begins. As soon as a receiver determines that the message is not intended for it, software sets the RWU bit (RWU = 1), which inhibits further flag setting until the RxD line goes idle at the end of the message. As soon as an idle line is detected by receiver logic, hardware automatically clears the RWU bit so that the first frame of the next message can be received. This type of receiver wakeup requires a minimum of one idle-line frame time between messages and no idle time between frames in a message.
7.6.2 Address-Mark Wakeup The serial characters in this type of wakeup consist of seven (eight if M = 1) information bits and an MSB, which indicates an address character (when set to 1, or mark). The first character of each message is an addressing character (MSB = 1). All receivers in the system evaluate this character to determine if the remainder of the message is directed toward this particular receiver. As soon as a receiver determines that a message is not intended for it, the receiver activates the RWU function by using a software write to set the RWU bit. Because setting RWU inhibits receiver-related flags, there is no further software overhead for the rest of this message. When the next message begins, its first character has its MSB set, which automatically clears the RWU bit and enables normal character reception. The first character whose MSB is set is also the first character to be received after wakeup because RWU gets cleared before the stop bit for that frame is serially received. This type of wakeup allows messages to include gaps of idle time, unlike the idle-line method, but
Technical Data 150 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) SCI Error Detection
there is a loss of efficiency because of the extra bit time for each character (address bit) required for all characters.
7.7 SCI Error Detection
Three error conditions - SCDR overrun, received bit noise, and framing - can occur during generation of SCI system interrupts. Three bits (OR, NF, and FE) in the serial communications status register (SCSR) indicate if one of these error conditions exists. The overrun error (OR) bit is set when the next byte is ready to be transferred from the receive shift register to the SCDR and the SCDR is already full (RDRF bit is set). When an overrun error occurs, the data that caused the overrun is lost and the data that was already in SCDR is not disturbed. The OR is cleared when the SCSR is read (with OR set), followed by a read of the SCDR. The noise flag (NF) bit is set if there is noise on any of the received bits, including the start and stop bits. The NF bit is not set until the RDRF flag is set. The NF bit is cleared when the SCSR is read (with FE equal to 1) followed by a read of the SCDR. When no stop bit is detected in the received data character, the framing error (FE) bit is set. FE is set at the same time as the RDRF. If the byte received causes both framing and overrun errors, the processor only recognizes the overrun error. The framing error flag inhibits further transfer of data into the SCDR until it is cleared. The FE bit is cleared when the SCSR is read (with FE equal to 1) followed by a read of the SCDR.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 151
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) 7.8 SCI Registers
Five addressable registers are associated with the SCI: * Four control and status registers: - Serial communications control register 1 (SCCR1) - Serial communications control register 2 (SCCR2) - Baud rate register (BAUD) - Serial communications status register (SCSR) * One data register: - Serial communications data register (SCDR) The SCI registers are the same for all M68HC11 E-series devices with one exception. The SCI system for MC68HC(7)11E20 contains an extra bit in the BAUD register that provides a greater selection of baud prescaler rates. Refer to 7.8.5 Baud Rate Register, Figure 7-8, and Figure 7-9.
7.8.1 Serial Communications Data Register SCDR is a parallel register that performs two functions: * * The receive data register when it is read The transmit data register when it is written
Reads access the receive data buffer and writes access the transmit data buffer. Receive and transmit are double buffered.
Address: $102F Bit 7 Read: R7/T7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset R6/T6 R5/T5 R4/T4 R3/T3 R2/T2 R1/T1 R0/T0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 7-3. Serial Communications Data Register (SCDR)
Technical Data 152 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) SCI Registers
7.8.2 Serial Communications Control Register 1 The SCCR1 register provides the control bits that determine word length and select the method used for the wakeup feature.
Address: $102C Bit 7 Read: R8 Write: Reset: I I 0 0 0 0 0 0 T8 M WAKE 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
I = Indeterminate after reset = Unimplemented
Figure 7-4. Serial Communications Control Register 1 (SCCR1) R8 -- Receive Data Bit 8 If M bit is set, R8 stores the ninth bit in the receive data character. T8 -- Transmit Data Bit 8 If M bit is set, T8 stores the ninth bit in the transmit data character. Bit 5 -- Unimplemented Always reads 0 M -- Mode Bit (select character format) 0 = Start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit 1 = Start bit, 9 data bits, 1 stop bit WAKE -- Wakeup by Address Mark/Idle Bit 0 = Wakeup by IDLE line recognition 1 = Wakeup by address mark (most significant data bit set) Bits [2:0] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 153
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
7.8.3 Serial Communications Control Register 2 The SCCR2 register provides the control bits that enable or disable individual SCI functions.
Address: $102D Bit 7 Read: TIE Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCIE RIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 7-5. Serial Communications Control Register 2 (SCCR2) TIE -- Transmit Interrupt Enable Bit 0 = TDRE interrupts disabled 1 = SCI interrupt requested when TDRE status flag is set TCIE -- Transmit Complete Interrupt Enable Bit 0 = TC interrupts disabled 1 = SCI interrupt requested when TC status flag is set RIE -- Receiver Interrupt Enable Bit 0 = RDRF and OR interrupts disabled 1 = SCI interrupt requested when RDRF flag or the OR status flag is set ILIE -- Idle-Line Interrupt Enable Bit 0 = IDLE interrupts disabled 1 = SCI interrupt requested when IDLE status flag is set TE -- Transmitter Enable Bit When TE goes from 0 to 1, one unit of idle character time (logic 1) is queued as a preamble. 0 = Transmitter disabled 1 = Transmitter enabled RE -- Receiver Enable Bit 0 = Receiver disabled 1 = Receiver enabled
Technical Data 154 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) SCI Registers
RWU -- Receiver Wakeup Control Bit 0 = Normal SCI receiver 1 = Wakeup enabled and receiver interrupts inhibited SBK -- Send Break At least one character time of break is queued and sent each time SBK is written to 1. As long as the SBK bit is set, break characters are queued and sent. More than one break may be sent if the transmitter is idle at the time the SBK bit is toggled on and off, as the baud rate clock edge could occur between writing the 1 and writing the 0 to SBK. 0 = Break generator off 1 = Break codes generated
7.8.4 Serial Communication Status Register The SCSR provides inputs to the interrupt logic circuits for generation of the SCI system interrupt.
Address: $102E Bit 7 Read: TDRE Write: Reset: 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 TC RDRF IDLE OR NF FE 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 7-6. Serial Communications Status Register (SCSR) TDRE -- Transmit Data Register Empty Flag This flag is set when SCDR is empty. Clear the TDRE flag by reading SCSR with TDRE set and then writing to SCDR. 0 = SCDR busy 0 = SCDR empty
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 155
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
TC -- Transmit Complete Flag This flag is set when the transmitter is idle (no data, preamble, or break transmission in progress). Clear the TC flag by reading SCSR with TC set and then writing to SCDR. 0 = Transmitter busy 1 = Transmitter idle RDRF -- Receive Data Register Full Flag This flag is set if a received character is ready to be read from SCDR. Clear the RDRF flag by reading SCSR with RDRF set and then reading SCDR. 0 = SCDR empty 1 = SCDR full IDLE -- Idle Line Detected Flag This flag is set if the RxD line is idle. Once cleared, IDLE is not set again until the RxD line has been active and becomes idle again. The IDLE flag is inhibited when RWU = 1. Clear IDLE by reading SCSR with IDLE set and then reading SCDR. 0 = RxD line active 1 = RxD line idle OR -- Overrun Error Flag OR is set if a new character is received before a previously received character is read from SCDR. Clear the OR flag by reading SCSR with OR set and then reading SCDR. 0 = No overrun 1 = Overrun detected NF -- Noise Error Flag NF is set if majority sample logic detects anything other than a unanimous decision. Clear NF by reading SCSR with NF set and then reading SCDR. 0 = Unanimous decision 1 = Noise detected
Technical Data 156 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) SCI Registers
FE -- Framing Error Flag FE is set when a 0 is detected where a stop bit was expected. Clear the FE flag by reading SCSR with FE set and then reading SCDR. 0 = Stop bit detected 1 = Zero detected Bit 0 -- Unimplemented Always reads 0
7.8.5 Baud Rate Register Use this register to select different baud rates for the SCI system. The SCP[1:0] (SCP[2:0] in MC68HC(7)11E20) bits function as a prescaler for the SCR[2:0] bits. Together, these five bits provide multiple baud rate combinations for a given crystal frequency. Normally, this register is written once during initialization. The prescaler is set to its fastest rate by default out of reset and can be changed at any time. Refer to Table 7-1 for normal baud rate selections.
Address: $102B Bit 7 Read: TCLR Write: Reset: 0 U = Unaffected 0 0 0 0 U U U SCP2 SCP1 SCP0 RCKB SCR2 SCR1 SCR0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 7-7. Baud Rate Register (BAUD) TCLR -- Clear Baud Rate Counter Bit (Test) SCP[2:0] -- SCI Baud Rate Prescaler Select Bits
NOTE:
SCP2 applies to MC68HC(7)11E20 only. When SCP2 = 1, SCP[1:0] must equal 0s. Any other values for SCP[1:0] are not decoded in the prescaler and the results are unpredictable. Refer to Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-9.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 157
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Table 7-1. Baud Rate Values
Crystal Frequency (MHz) Baud 4.00 4.9152 8.00 10.00 12.00 Prescale Set Divide Prescaler Selects Bus Frequency (MHz) Divide SCP2 SCP1 SCP0 SCR2 SCR1 SCR0 1.00 1.23 2.00 2.50 3.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 62500 31250 15625 7813 3906 1953 977 488 20833 10417 5208 2604 1302 651 326 163 15625 7813 3906 1953 977 488 244 122 4808 2404 1202 601 300 150 75 38 1603 801 401 200 100 50 25 13 16.00 4.00
76800 125000 156250 187500 250000 38400 62500 78125 93750 125000 19200 31250 39063 46875 62500 9600 15625 19531 23438 31250 11719 15625 9766 7813 4800 7813 5859 4883 3906 2400 3906 2930 2441 1953 1200 1953 1465 1221 977 600 25600 12800 6400 3200 1600 800 400 200 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 150 5908 2954 1477 738 369 185 92 46 1969 985 492 246 123 62 31 15 41667 20833 10417 5208 2604 1302 651 326 31250 15625 7813 3906 1953 977 488 244 9615 4808 2404 1202 601 300 150 75 3205 1603 801 401 200 100 50 25 52083 26042 13021 6510 3255 1628 814 407 39063 19531 9766 4883 2441 1221 610 305 12019 6010 3005 1502 751 376 188 94 4006 2003 1002 501 250 125 63 31 62500 31250 15625 7813 3906 1953 977 488 46875 23438 11719 5859 2930 1465 732 366 14423 7212 3606 1803 901 451 225 113 4808 2404 1202 601 300 150 75 38 83333 41667 20833 10417 5208 2604 1302 651 62500 31250 15625 7813 3906 1953 977 488 19231 9615 4808 2404 1202 601 300 150 6410 3205 1603 801 401 200 100 50
Shaded areas reflect standard baud rates. On MC68HC(7)11E20 do not set SCP1 or SCP0 when SCP2 is 1.
Technical Data 158 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) SCI Registers
RCKB -- SCI Baud Rate Clock Check Bit (Test) SCR[2:0] -- SCI Baud Rate Select Bits Selects receiver and transmitter bit rate based on output from baud rate prescaler stage. Refer to Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-9. The prescaler bits, SCP[2:0], determine the highest baud rate, and the SCR[2:0] bits select an additional binary submultiple (/1, /2, /4, through /128) of this highest baud rate. The result of these two dividers in series is the 16X receiver baud rate clock. The SCR[2:0] bits are not affected by reset and can be changed at any time, although they should not be changed when any SCI transfer is in progress. Figure 7-8 and Figure 7-9 illustrate the SCI baud rate timing chain. The prescaler select bits determine the highest baud rate. The rate select bits determine additional divide by two stages to arrive at the receiver timing (RT) clock rate. The baud rate clock is the result of dividing the RT clock by 16.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 159
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
EXTAL OSCILLATOR AND CLOCK GENERATOR (/4) XTAL E AS 0:0 0:1 1:0 INTERNAL BUS CLOCK (PH2)
/3
/4
/ 13
SCP[1:0] 1:1
SCR[2:0] 0:0:0
/2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2
0:0:1
0:1:0
0:1:1
/ 16
1:0:0 SCI TRANSMIT BAUD RATE (1X)
1:0:1
1:1:0
1:1:1
SCI RECEIVE BAUD RATE (16X)
Figure 7-8. SCI Baud Rate Generator Block Diagram
7.9 Status Flags and Interrupts
The SCI transmitter has two status flags. These status flags can be read by software (polled) to tell when the corresponding condition exists. Alternatively, a local interrupt enable bit can be set to enable each of these status conditions to generate interrupt requests when the corresponding condition is present. Status flags are automatically set by hardware logic conditions, but must be cleared by software, which provides an interlock mechanism that enables logic to know when
Technical Data 160 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Status Flags and Interrupts
EXTAL OSCILLATOR AND CLOCK GENERATOR (/4) XTAL E AS 0:0:0 0:0:1 0:1:0 0:1:1 INTERNAL BUS CLOCK (PH2)
/3
/4
/ 13
/ 39
SCP[2:0]* 1:0:0
SCR[2:0] 0:0:0
/2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2 /2
0:0:1
0:1:0
0:1:1
/ 16
1:0:0 SCI TRANSMIT BAUD RATE (1X)
1:0:1
1:1:0
1:1:1
SCI RECEIVE BAUD RATE (16X)
*SCP2 is present only on MC68HC(7)11E20.
Figure 7-9. MC68HC(7)11E20 SCI Baud Rate Generator Block Diagram software has noticed the status indication. The software clearing sequence for these flags is automatic. Functions that are normally performed in response to the status flags also satisfy the conditions of the clearing sequence. TDRE and TC flags are normally set when the transmitter is first enabled (TE set to 1). The TDRE flag indicates there is room in the transmit queue to store another data character in the TDR. The TIE bit is the local
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Technical Data 161
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
interrupt mask for TDRE. When TIE is 0, TDRE must be polled. When TIE and TDRE are 1, an interrupt is requested. The TC flag indicates the transmitter has completed the queue. The TCIE bit is the local interrupt mask for TC. When TCIE is 0, TC must be polled. When TCIE is 1 and TC is 1, an interrupt is requested. Writing a 0 to TE requests that the transmitter stop when it can. The transmitter completes any transmission in progress before actually shutting down. Only an MCU reset can cause the transmitter to stop and shut down immediately. If TE is written to 0 when the transmitter is already idle, the pin reverts to its general-purpose I/O function (synchronized to the bit-rate clock). If anything is being transmitted when TE is written to 0, that character is completed before the pin reverts to general-purpose I/O, but any other characters waiting in the transmit queue are lost. The TC and TDRE flags are set at the completion of this last character, even though TE has been disabled.
7.10 Receiver Flags
The SCI receiver has five status flags, three of which can generate interrupt requests. The status flags are set by the SCI logic in response to specific conditions in the receiver. These flags can be read (polled) at any time by software. Refer to Figure 7-10, which shows SCI interrupt arbitration. When an overrun takes place, the new character is lost, and the character that was in its way in the parallel RDR is undisturbed. RDRF is set when a character has been received and transferred into the parallel RDR. The OR flag is set instead of RDRF if overrun occurs. A new character is ready to be transferred into RDR before a previous character is read from RDR. The NF and FE flags provide additional information about the character in the RDR, but do not generate interrupt requests. The last receiver status flag and interrupt source come from the IDLE flag. The RxD line is idle if it has constantly been at logic 1 for a full character time. The IDLE flag is set only after the RxD line has been
Technical Data 162 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Receiver Flags
busy and becomes idle, which prevents repeated interrupts for the whole time RxD remains idle.
BEGIN
FLAG RDRF = 1? N
Y
OR = 1? N
Y
RIE = 1? N
Y
RE = 1? N
Y
TDRE = 1? N
Y
TIE = 1? N
Y
TE = 1? N
Y
TC = 1? N
Y
TCIE = 1? N
Y
IDLE = 1? N
Y ILIE = 1? N
Y
RE = 1? N
Y
NO VALID SCI REQUEST
VALID SCI REQUEST
Figure 7-10. Interrupt Source Resolution Within SCI
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 163
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
Technical Data 164 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 8. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
8.1 Contents
8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 SPI Transfer Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.6 SPI Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 8.6.1 Master In/Slave Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.6.2 Master Out/Slave In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.6.3 Serial Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.6.4 Slave Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 8.7 SPI System Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.8 SPI Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 8.8.1 Serial Peripheral Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 8.8.2 Serial Peripheral Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 8.8.3 Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Technical Data 165
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) 8.2 Introduction
The serial peripheral interface (SPI), an independent serial communications subsystem, allows the MCU to communicate synchronously with peripheral devices, such as: * * * * Frequency synthesizers Liquid crystal display (LCD) drivers Analog-to-digital (A/D) converter subsystems Other microprocessors
The SPI is also capable of inter-processor communication in a multiple master system. The SPI system can be configured as either a master or a slave device. When configured as a master, data transfer rates can be as high as one-half the E-clock rate (1.5 Mbits per second for a 3-MHz bus frequency). When configured as a slave, data transfers can be as fast as the E-clock rate (3 Mbits per second for a 3-MHz bus frequency).
8.3 Functional Description
The central element in the SPI system is the block containing the shift register and the read data buffer. The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direction. This means that new data for transmission cannot be written to the shifter until the previous transfer is complete; however, received data is transferred into a parallel read data buffer so the shifter is free to accept a second serial character. As long as the first character is read out of the read data buffer before the next serial character is ready to be transferred, no overrun condition occurs. A single MCU register address is used for reading data from the read data buffer and for writing data to the shifter. The SPI status block represents the SPI status functions (transfer complete, write collision, and mode fault) performed by the serial peripheral status register (SPSR). The SPI control block represents those functions that control the SPI system through the serial peripheral control register (SPCR).
Technical Data 166 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Functional Description
Refer to Figure 8-1, which shows the SPI block diagram.
S INTERNAL MCU CLOCK MSB DIVIDER /2 /4 /16 /32 LSB M M S
MISO PD2
8--BIT SHIFT REGISTER READ DATA BUFFER
CLOCK SELECT SPRO SPRI CLOCK LOGIC S M
PIN CONTROL LOGIC
MOSI PD3
SCK PD4 SS PD5
MSTD
SEC
SPI CONTROL
MSTR SPE
MODE
WCOL
SPIF
DWOM
INSTR
SPI STATUS REGISTER
SPI CONTROL REGISTER
SPI INTERRUPT REQUEST
INTERNAL DATA BUS
Figure 8-1. SPI Block Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
SPRO
CPHA
CPOL
SPRI
SPIF
SPE
DWOM
Technical Data 167
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) 8.4 SPI Transfer Formats
During an SPI transfer, data is simultaneously transmitted and received. A serial clock line synchronizes shifting and sampling of the information on the two serial data lines. A slave select line allows individual selection of a slave SPI device; slave devices that are not selected do not interfere with SPI bus activities. On a master SPI device, the select line can optionally be used to indicate a multiple master bus contention. Refer to Figure 8-2.
SCK CYCLE # SCK (CPOL = 0) SCK (CPOL = 1) SAMPLE INPUT (CPHA = 0) DATA OUT SAMPLE INPUT (CPHA = 1) DATA OUT SS (TO SLAVE) MSB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
SLAVE CPHA = 1 TRANSFER IN PROGRESS 3 MASTER TRANSFER IN PROGRESS 2 1 1. SS ASSERTED 2. MASTER WRITES TO SPDR 3. FIRST SCK EDGE 4. SPIF SET 5. SS NEGATED SLAVE CPHA = 0 TRANSFER IN PROGRESS 4 5
Figure 8-2. SPI Transfer Format
Technical Data 168 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Clock Phase and Polarity Controls
8.5 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls
Software can select one of four combinations of serial clock phase and polarity using two bits in the SPI control register (SPCR). The clock polarity is specified by the CPOL control bit, which selects an active high or active low clock, and has no significant effect on the transfer format. The clock phase (CPHA) control bit selects one of two different transfer formats. The clock phase and polarity should be identical for the master SPI device and the communicating slave device. In some cases, the phase and polarity are changed between transfers to allow a master device to communicate with peripheral slaves having different requirements. When CPHA equals 0, the SS line must be negated and reasserted between each successive serial byte. Also, if the slave writes data to the SPI data register (SPDR) while SS is low, a write collision error results. When CPHA equals 1, the SS line can remain low between successive transfers.
8.6 SPI Signals
This subsection contains descriptions of the four SPI signals: * * * * Master in/slave out (MISO) Master out/slave in (MOSI) Serial clock (SCK) Slave select (SS)
Any SPI output line must have its corresponding data direction bit in DDRD register set. If the DDR bit is clear, that line is disconnected from the SPI logic and becomes a general-purpose input. All SPI input lines are forced to act as inputs regardless of the state of the corresponding DDR bits in DDRD register.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Technical Data 169
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
8.6.1 Master In/Slave Out MISO is one of two unidirectional serial data signals. It is an input to a master device and an output from a slave device. The MISO line of a slave device is placed in the high-impedance state if the slave device is not selected.
8.6.2 Master Out/Slave In The MOSI line is the second of the two unidirectional serial data signals. It is an output from a master device and an input to a slave device. The master device places data on the MOSI line a half-cycle before the clock edge that the slave device uses to latch the data.
8.6.3 Serial Clock SCK, an input to a slave device, is generated by the master device and synchronizes data movement in and out of the device through the MOSI and MISO lines. Master and slave devices are capable of exchanging a byte of information during a sequence of eight clock cycles. Four possible timing relationships can be chosen by using control bits CPOL and CPHA in the serial peripheral control register (SPCR). Both master and slave devices must operate with the same timing. The SPI clock rate select bits, SPR[1:0], in the SPCR of the master device, select the clock rate. In a slave device, SPR[1:0] have no effect on the operation of the SPI.
8.6.4 Slave Select The slave select (SS) input of a slave device must be externally asserted before a master device can exchange data with the slave device. SS must be low before data transactions and must stay low for the duration of the transaction. The SS line of the master must be held high. If it goes low, a mode fault error flag (MODF) is set in the serial peripheral status register (SPSR). To disable the mode fault circuit, write a 1 in bit 5 of the port D data
Technical Data 170 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) SPI System Errors
direction register. This sets the SS pin to act as a general-purpose output rather than the dedicated input to the slave select circuit, thus inhibiting the mode fault flag. The other three lines are dedicated to the SPI whenever the serial peripheral interface is on. The state of the master and slave CPHA bits affects the operation of SS. CPHA settings should be identical for master and slave. When CPHA = 0, the shift clock is the OR of SS with SCK. In this clock phase mode, SS must go high between successive characters in an SPI message. When CPHA = 1, SS can be left low between successive SPI characters. In cases where there is only one SPI slave MCU, its SS line can be tied to VSS as long as only CPHA = 1 clock mode is used.
8.7 SPI System Errors
Two system errors can be detected by the SPI system. The first type of error arises in a multiple-master system when more than one SPI device simultaneously tries to be a master. This error is called a mode fault. The second type of error, write collision, indicates that an attempt was made to write data to the SPDR while a transfer was in progress. When the SPI system is configured as a master and the SS input line goes to active low, a mode fault error has occurred -- usually because two devices have attempted to act as master at the same time. In cases where more than one device is concurrently configured as a master, there is a chance of contention between two pin drivers. For push-pull CMOS drivers, this contention can cause permanent damage. The mode fault mechanism attempts to protect the device by disabling the drivers. The MSTR control bit in the SPCR and all four DDRD control bits associated with the SPI are cleared and an interrupt is generated subject to masking by the SPIE control bit and the I bit in the CCR. Other precautions may need to be taken to prevent driver damage. If two devices are made masters at the same time, mode fault does not help protect either one unless one of them selects the other as slave. The amount of damage possible depends on the length of time both devices attempt to act as master.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Technical Data 171
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
A write collision error occurs if the SPDR is written while a transfer is in progress. Because the SPDR is not double buffered in the transmit direction, writes to SPDR cause data to be written directly into the SPI shift register. Because this write corrupts any transfer in progress, a write collision error is generated. The transfer continues undisturbed, and the write data that caused the error is not written to the shifter. A write collision is normally a slave error because a slave has no control over when a master initiates a transfer. A master knows when a transfer is in progress, so there is no reason for a master to generate a write-collision error, although the SPI logic can detect write collisions in both master and slave devices. The SPI configuration determines the characteristics of a transfer in progress. For a master, a transfer begins when data is written to SPDR and ends when SPIF is set. For a slave with CPHA equal to 0, a transfer starts when SS goes low and ends when SS returns high. In this case, SPIF is set at the middle of the eighth SCK cycle when data is transferred from the shifter to the parallel data register, but the transfer is still in progress until SS goes high. For a slave with CPHA equal to 1, transfer begins when the SCK line goes to its active level, which is the edge at the beginning of the first SCK cycle. The transfer ends in a slave in which CPHA equals 1 when SPIF is set.
8.8 SPI Registers
The three SPI registers are: * * * Serial peripheral control register (SPCR) Serial peripheral status register (SPSR) Serial peripheral data register (SPDR)
These registers provide control, status, and data storage functions.
Technical Data 172 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) SPI Registers
8.8.1 Serial Peripheral Control Register
Address: $1028 Bit 7 Read: SPIE Write: Reset: 0 U = Unaffected 0 0 0 0 1 U U SPE DWOM MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 8-3. Serial Peripheral Control Register (SPCR) SPIE -- Serial Peripheral Interrupt Enable Bit Set the SPE bit to 1 to request a hardware interrupt sequence each time the SPIF or MODF status flag is set. SPI interrupts are inhibited if this bit is clear or if the I bit in the condition code register is 1. 0 = SPI system interrupts disabled 1 = SPI system interrupts enabled SPE -- Serial Peripheral System Enable Bit When the SPE bit is set, the port D bit 2, 3, 4, and 5 pins are dedicated to the SPI function. If the SPI is in the master mode and DDRD bit 5 is set, then the port D bit 5 pin becomes a general-purpose output instead of the SS input. 0 = SPI system disabled 1 = SPI system enabled DWOM -- Port D Wired-OR Mode Bit DWOM affects all port D pins. 0 = Normal CMOS outputs 1 = Open-drain outputs MSTR -- Master Mode Select Bit It is customary to have an external pullup resistor on lines that are driven by open-drain devices. 0 = Slave mode 1 = Master mode
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Technical Data 173
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
CPOL -- Clock Polarity Bit When the clock polarity bit is cleared and data is not being transferred, the SCK pin of the master device has a steady state low value. When CPOL is set, SCK idles high. Refer to Figure 8-2 and 8.5 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls. CPHA -- Clock Phase Bit The clock phase bit, in conjunction with the CPOL bit, controls the clock-data relationship between master and slave. The CPHA bit selects one of two different clocking protocols. Refer to Figure 8-2 and 8.5 Clock Phase and Polarity Controls. SPR[1:0] -- SPI Clock Rate Select Bits These two bits select the SPI clock (SCK) rate when the device is configured as master. When the device is configured as slave, these bits have no effect. Refer to Table 8-1. Table 8-1. SPI Clock Rates
SPR[1:0] 00 01 10 11 Divide E Clock By 2 4 16 32 Frequency at E = 1 MHz (Baud) 500 kHz 250 kHz 62.5 kHz 31.3 kHz Frequency at E = 2 MHz (Baud) 1.0 MHz 500 kHz 125 kHz 62.5 kHz Frequency at E = 3 MHz (Baud) 1.5 MHz 750 kHz 187.5 kHz 93.8 kHz Frequency at E = 4 MHz (Baud) 2 MHz 1 MHz 250 kHz 125 kHz
Technical Data 174 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) SPI Registers
8.8.2 Serial Peripheral Status Register
Address: $1029 Bit 7 Read: SPIF Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WCOL MODF 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 8-4. Serial Peripheral Status Register (SPSR) SPIF -- SPI Interrupt Complete Flag SPIF is set upon completion of data transfer between the processor and the external device. If SPIF goes high, and if SPIE is set, a serial peripheral interrupt is generated. To clear the SPIF bit, read the SPSR with SPIF set, then access the SPDR. Unless SPSR is read (with SPIF set) first, attempts to write SPDR are inhibited. WCOL -- Write Collision Bit Clearing the WCOL bit is accomplished by reading the SPSR (with WCOL set) followed by an access of SPDR. Refer to 8.6.4 Slave Select and 8.7 SPI System Errors. 0 = No write collision 1 = Write collision Bit 5 -- Unimplemented Always reads 0 MODF -- Mode Fault Bit To clear the MODF bit, read the SPSR (with MODF set), then write to the SPCR. Refer to 8.6.4 Slave Select and 8.7 SPI System Errors. 0 = No mode fault 1 = Mode fault Bits [3:0] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Technical Data 175
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
8.8.3 Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register The SPDR is used when transmitting or receiving data on the serial bus. Only a write to this register initiates transmission or reception of a byte, and this only occurs in the master device. At the completion of transferring a byte of data, the SPIF status bit is set in both the master and slave devices. A read of the SPDR is actually a read of a buffer. To prevent an overrun and the loss of the byte that caused the overrun, the first SPIF must be cleared by the time a second transfer of data from the shift register to the read buffer is initiated.
Address: $102A Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 8-5. Serial Peripheral Data I/O Register (SPDR) SPI is double buffered in and single buffered out.
Technical Data 176 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 9. Timing System
9.1 Contents
9.2 9.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Timer Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9.4 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 9.4.1 Timer Control Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 9.4.2 Timer Input Capture Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 9.4.3 Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Register . . . . . . 186 9.5 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 9.5.1 Timer Output Compare Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 9.5.2 Timer Compare Force Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 9.5.3 Output Compare Mask Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 9.5.4 Output Compare Data Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 9.5.5 Timer Counter Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 9.5.6 Timer Control Register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 9.5.7 Timer Interrupt Mask 1 Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 9.5.8 Timer Interrupt Flag 1 Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 9.5.9 Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 9.5.10 Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 9.6 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 9.6.1 Timer Interrupt Mask Register 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 9.6.2 Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 9.6.3 Pulse Accumulator Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 9.7 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Watchdog Function . . . 203
9.8 Pulse Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 9.8.1 Pulse Accumulator Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 9.8.2 Pulse Accumulator Count Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 9.8.3 Pulse Accumulator Status and Interrupt Bits . . . . . . . . . . . 207
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 177
Timing System 9.2 Introduction
The M68HC11 timing system is composed of five clock divider chains. The main clock divider chain includes a 16-bit free-running counter, which is driven by a programmable prescaler. The main timer's programmable prescaler provides one of the four clocking rates to drive the 16-bit counter. Two prescaler control bits select the prescale rate. The prescaler output divides the system clock by 1, 4, 8, or 16. Taps off of this main clocking chain drive circuitry that generates the slower clocks used by the pulse accumulator, the real-time interrupt (RTI), and the computer operating properly (COP) watchdog subsystems, also described in this section. Refer to Figure 9-1. All main timer system activities are referenced to this free-running counter. The counter begins incrementing from $0000 as the MCU comes out of reset and continues to the maximum count, $FFFF. At the maximum count, the counter rolls over to $0000, sets an overflow flag, and continues to increment. As long as the MCU is running in a normal operating mode, there is no way to reset, change, or interrupt the counting. The capture/compare subsystem features three input capture channels, four output compare channels, and one channel that can be selected to perform either input capture or output compare. Each of the three input capture functions has its own 16-bit input capture register (time capture latch) and each of the output compare functions has its own 16-bit compare register. All timer functions, including the timer overflow and RTI, have their own interrupt controls and separate interrupt vectors. The pulse accumulator contains an 8-bit counter and edge select logic. The pulse accumulator can operate in either event counting mode or gated time accumulation mode. During event counting mode, the pulse accumulator's 8-bit counter increments when a specified edge is detected on an input signal. During gated time accumulation mode, an internal clock source increments the 8-bit counter while an input signal has a predetermined logic level. The real-time interrupt (RTI) is a programmable periodic interrupt circuit that permits pacing the execution of software routines by selecting one of four interrupt rates.
Technical Data 178 Timing System MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Introduction
The COP watchdog clock input (E / 215) is tapped off of the free-running counter chain. The COP automatically times out unless it is serviced within a specific time by a program reset sequence. If the COP is allowed to time out, a reset is generated, which drives the RESET pin low to reset the MCU and the external system. Refer to Table 9-1 for crystal-related frequencies and periods.
OSCILLATOR AND CLOCK GENERATOR (DIVIDE BY FOUR)
AS E CLOCK INTERNAL BUS CLOCK (PH2)
PRESCALER (/ 2, 4, 16, 32) SPR[1:0]
SPI
PRESCALER (/ 1, 3, 4, 13) SCP[1:0] E/2
6
/39 SCP2*
PRESCALER (/ 1, 2, 4,....128) SCR[2:0] /16
SCI RECEIVER CLOCK SCI TRANSMIT CLOCK PULSE ACCUMULATOR
E / 213 /4
PRESCALER (// 1, 2, 4, 8) RTR[1:0] E/215
REAL-TIME INTERRUPT
PRESCALER (/ 1, 4, 8, 16) PR[1:0]
PRESCALER (/1, 4, 16, 64) CR[1:0] TOF FF1 S R Q Q S R
TCNT
FF2 Q Q FORCE COP RESET
IC/OC * SCP2 present on MC68HC(7)11E20 only CLEAR COP TIMER SYSTEM RESET
E SERIES TIM DIV CHAIN
Figure 9-1. Timer Clock Divider Chains
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 179
Timing System
Table 9-1. Timer Summary
XTAL Frequencies 4.0 MHz Control Bits PR1, PR0 1.0 MHz 1000 ns 8.0 MHz 2.0 MHz 500 ns 12.0 MHz 3.0 MHz 333 ns Other Rates (E) (1/E)
Main Timer Count Rates 00 1 count -- overflow -- 01 1 count -- overflow -- 10 1 count -- overflow -- 11 1 count -- overflow -- 1000 ns 65.536 ms 4.0 s 262.14 ms 8.0 s 524.29 ms 16.0 s 1.049 s 500 ns 32.768 ms 2.0 s 131.07 ms 4.0 s 262.14 ms 8.0 s 524.29 ms 333 ns 21.845 ms 1.333 s 87.381 ms 2.667 s 174.76 ms 5.333 s 349.52 ms (E/1) (E/216) (E/4) (E/218) (E/8) (E/219) (E/16) (E/220)
9.3 Timer Structure
Figure 9-2 shows the capture/compare system block diagram. The port A pin control block includes logic for timer functions and for general-purpose I/O. For pins PA3, PA2, PA1, and PA0, this block contains both the edge-detection logic and the control logic that enables the selection of which edge triggers an input capture. The digital level on PA[3:0] can be read at any time (read PORTA register), even if the pin is being used for the input capture function. Pins PA[6:3] are used for either general-purpose I/O, or as output compare pins. When one of these pins is being used for an output compare function, it cannot be written directly as if it were a general-purpose output. Each of the output compare functions (OC[5:2]) is related to one of the port A output pins. Output compare one (OC1) has extra control logic, allowing it optional control of any combination of the PA[7:3] pins. The PA7 pin can be used as a general-purpose I/O pin, as an input to the pulse accumulator, or as an OC1 output pin.
Technical Data 180 Timing System MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Timer Structure
MCU E CLK
PRESCALER DIVIDE BY 1, 4, 8, OR 16 PR1 PR0
TCNT (HI)
TCNT (LO)
TOI TOF TAPS FOR RTI, COP WATCHDOG, AND PULSE ACCUMULATOR
16-BIT FREE-RUNNING COUNTER
9
16-BIT TIMER BUS OC1I 16-BIT COMPARATOR = TOC1 (HI) TOC1 (LO) OC1F FOC1 OC2I 16-BIT COMPARATOR = TOC2 (HI) TOC2 (LO) OC2F FOC2 OC3I 16-BIT COMPARATOR = TOC3 (HI) TOC3 (LO) OC3F FOC3 OC4I 16-BIT COMPARATOR = TOC4 (HI) TOC4 (LO) OC5 I4/O5F IC4 I4/O5 16-BIT LATCH TIC1 (HI) CLK IC1F IC2I IC2F IC3I IC3F TFLG 1 STATUS FLAGS TMSK 1 INTERRUPT ENABLES CFORC FORCE OUTPUT COMPARE IC1I FOC5 OC4F FOC4 I4/O5I 16-BIT COMPARATOR = TI4/O5 (HI) TI4/O5 (LO) CLK
INTERRUPT REQUESTS (FURTHER QUALIFIED BY I BIT IN CCR) TO PULSE ACCUMULATOR 8 BIT 7 7 BIT 6 6 BIT 5 5 BIT 4 4 BIT 3 PA3/OC5/ IC4/OC1 PA4/OC4/ OC1 PA5/OC3/ OC1 PA6/OC2/ OC1 PIN FUNCTIONS PA7/OC1/ PAI
16-BIT LATCH
3 BIT 2 2 BIT 1 1 BIT 0 PA0/IC3 PA1/IC2 PA2/IC1
TIC1 (LO) CLK
16-BIT LATCH TIC2 (HI)
TIC2 (LO) CLK
16-BIT LATCH TIC3 (HI)
TIC3 (LO) PORT A PIN CONTROL
CAPTURE COMPARE BLOCK
Figure 9-2. Capture/Compare Block Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 181
Timing System 9.4 Input Capture
The input capture function records the time an external event occurs by latching the value of the free-running counter when a selected edge is detected at the associated timer input pin. Software can store latched values and use them to compute the periodicity and duration of events. For example, by storing the times of successive edges of an incoming signal, software can determine the period and pulse width of a signal. To measure period, two successive edges of the same polarity are captured. To measure pulse width, two alternate polarity edges are captured. In most cases, input capture edges are asynchronous to the internal timer counter, which is clocked relative to an internal clock (PH2). These asynchronous capture requests are synchronized to PH2 so that the latching occurs on the opposite half cycle of PH2 from when the timer counter is being incremented. This synchronization process introduces a delay from when the edge occurs to when the counter value is detected. Because these delays offset each other when the time between two edges is being measured, the delay can be ignored. When an input capture is being used with an output compare, there is a similar delay between the actual compare point and when the output pin changes state. The control and status bits that implement the input capture functions are contained in: * * * * Pulse accumulator control register (PACTL) Timer control 2 register (TCTL2) Timer interrupt mask 1 register (TMSK1) Timer interrupt flag 2 register (TFLG1)
To configure port A bit 3 as an input capture, clear the DDRA3 bit of the PACTL register. Note that this bit is cleared out of reset. To enable PA3 as the fourth input capture, set the I4/O5 bit in the PACTL register. Otherwise, PA3 is configured as a fifth output compare out of reset, with bit I4/O5 being cleared. If the DDRA3 bit is set (configuring PA3 as an output), and IC4 is enabled, then writes to PA3 cause edges on the pin
Technical Data 182 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Input Capture
to result in input captures. Writing to TI4/O5 has no effect when the TI4/O5 register is acting as IC4.
9.4.1 Timer Control Register 2 Use the control bits of this register to program input capture functions to detect a particular edge polarity on the corresponding timer input pin. Each of the input capture functions can be independently configured to detect rising edges only, falling edges only, any edge (rising or falling), or to disable the input capture function. The input capture functions operate independently of each other and can capture the same TCNT value if the input edges are detected within the same timer count cycle.
Address: $1021 Bit 7 Read: EDG4B Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EDG4A EDG1B EDG1A EDG2B EDG2A EDG3B EDG3A 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-3. Timer Control Register 2 (TCTL2) EDGxB and EDGxA -- Input Capture Edge Control Bits There are four pairs of these bits. Each pair is cleared to 0 by reset and must be encoded to configure the corresponding input capture edge detector circuit. IC4 functions only if the I4/O5 bit in the PACTL register is set. Refer to Table 9-2 for timer control configuration. Table 9-2. Timer Control Configuration
EDGxB 0 0 1 1 EDGxA 0 1 0 1 Configuration Capture disabled Capture on rising edges only Capture on falling edges only Capture on any edge
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 183
Timing System
9.4.2 Timer Input Capture Registers When an edge has been detected and synchronized, the 16-bit free-running counter value is transferred into the input capture register pair as a single 16-bit parallel transfer. Timer counter value captures and timer counter incrementing occur on opposite half-cycles of the phase 2 clock so that the count value is stable whenever a capture occurs. The timer input capture registers are not affected by reset. Input capture values can be read from a pair of 8-bit read-only registers. A read of the high-order byte of an input capture register pair inhibits a new capture transfer for one bus cycle. If a double-byte read instruction, such as load double accumulator D (LDD), is used to read the captured value, coherency is assured. When a new input capture occurs immediately after a high-order byte read, transfer is delayed for an additional cycle but the value is not lost.
Register name: Timer Input Capture 1 Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 6 5 4
Address: $1010 3 Bit 11 2 Bit 10 1 Bit 9 Bit 0 Bit 8
Indeterminate after reset Address: $1011 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
Register name: Timer Input Capture 1 Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6 5 4
Indeterminate after reset
Figure 9-4. Timer Input Capture 1 Register Pair (TIC1)
Technical Data 184 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Input Capture
Register name: Timer Input Capture 2 Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 6 5 4
Address: $1012 3 Bit 11 2 Bit 10 1 Bit 9 Bit 0 Bit 8
Indeterminate after reset Address: $1013 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
Register name: Timer Input Capture 2 Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6 5 4
Indeterminate after reset
Figure 9-5. Timer Input Capture 2 Register Pair (TIC2)
Register name: Timer Input Capture 3 Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 6 5 4
Address: $1014 3 Bit 11 2 Bit 10 1 Bit 9 Bit 0 Bit 8
Indeterminate after reset Address: $1015 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
Register name: Timer Input Capture 3 Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6 5 4
Indeterminate after reset
Figure 9-6. Timer Input Capture 3 Register Pair (TIC3)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 185
Timing System
9.4.3 Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Register Use TI4/O5 as either an input capture register or an output compare register, depending on the function chosen for the PA3 pin. To enable it as an input capture pin, set the I4/O5 bit in the pulse accumulator control register (PACTL) to logic level 1. To use it as an output compare register, set the I4/O5 bit to a logic level 0. Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator.
Register name: Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 6 5 4 3
Address: $101E 2 Bit 10 1 Address: $101F 3 2 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 1 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 0 Bit 8 1
Register name: Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 6 5 4
Figure 9-7. Timer Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Register Pair (TI4/O5)
9.5 Output Compare
Use the output compare (OC) function to program an action to occur at a specific time -- when the 16-bit counter reaches a specified value. For each of the five output compare functions, there is a separate 16-bit compare register and a dedicated 16-bit comparator. The value in the compare register is compared to the value of the free-running counter on every bus cycle. When the compare register matches the counter value, an output compare status flag is set. The flag can be used to initiate the automatic actions for that output compare function. To produce a pulse of a specific duration, write a value to the output compare register that represents the time the leading edge of the pulse is to occur. The output compare circuit is configured to set the
Technical Data 186 Timing System MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Output Compare
appropriate output either high or low, depending on the polarity of the pulse being produced. After a match occurs, the output compare register is reprogrammed to change the output pin back to its inactive level at the next match. A value representing the width of the pulse is added to the original value, and then written to the output compare register. Because the pin state changes occur at specific values of the free-running counter, the pulse width can be controlled accurately at the resolution of the free-running counter, independent of software latencies. To generate an output signal of a specific frequency and duty cycle, repeat this pulse-generating procedure. The five 16-bit read/write output compare registers are: TOC1, TOC2, TOC3, and TOC4, and the TI4/O5. TI4/O5 functions under software control as either IC4 or OC5. Each of the OC registers is set to $FFFF on reset. A value written to an OC register is compared to the free-running counter value during each E-clock cycle. If a match is found, the particular output compare flag is set in timer interrupt flag register 1 (TFLG1). If that particular interrupt is enabled in the timer interrupt mask register 1 (TMSK1), an interrupt is generated. In addition to an interrupt, a specified action can be initiated at one or more timer output pins. For OC[5:2], the pin action is controlled by pairs of bits (OMx and OLx) in the TCTL1 register. The output action is taken on each successful compare, regardless of whether or not the OCxF flag in the TFLG1 register was previously cleared. OC1 is different from the other output compares in that a successful OC1 compare can affect any or all five of the OC pins. The OC1 output action taken when a match is found is controlled by two 8-bit registers with three bits unimplemented: the output compare 1 mask register, OC1M, and the output compare 1 data register, OC1D. OC1M specifies which port A outputs are to be used, and OC1D specifies what data is placed on these port pins.
9.5.1 Timer Output Compare Registers All output compare registers are 16-bit read-write. Each is initialized to $FFFF at reset. If an output compare register is not used for an output compare function, it can be used as a storage location. A write to the
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 187
Timing System
high-order byte of an output compare register pair inhibits the output compare function for one bus cycle. This inhibition prevents inappropriate subsequent comparisons. Coherency requires a complete 16-bit read or write. However, if coherency is not needed, byte accesses can be used. For output compare functions, write a comparison value to output compare registers TOC1-TOC4 and TI4/O5. When TCNT value matches the comparison value, specified pin actions occur.
Register name: Timer Output Compare 1 Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 1 Address: $1017 3 Bit 3 1 2 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 6 5 4 Address: $1016 3 2 1 Bit 0
Register name: Timer Output Compare 1 Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6 5 4
Figure 9-8. Timer Output Compare 1 Register Pair (TOC1)
Register name: Timer Output Compare 2 Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 6 5 4
Address: $1018 3 Bit 11 1 Address: $1019 3 Bit 3 1 2 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 1 2 Bit 10 1 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 0 Bit 8 1
Register name: Timer Output Compare 2 Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6 5 4
Figure 9-9. Timer Output Compare 2 Register Pair (TOC2)
Technical Data 188 Timing System MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Output Compare
Register name: Timer Output Compare 3 Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 6 5 4
Address: $101A 3 Bit 11 1 2 Bit 10 1 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 0 Bit 8 1
Register name: Timer Output Compare 3 Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6 5 4
Address: $101B 3 Bit 3 1 2 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 1
Figure 9-10. Timer Output Compare 3 Register Pair (TOC3)
Register name: Timer Output Compare 4 Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Bit 15 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 6 5 4
Address: $101C 3 Bit 11 1 2 Bit 10 1 1 Bit 9 1 Bit 0 Bit 8 1
Register name: Timer Output Compare 4 Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 6 5 4
Address: $101D 3 Bit 3 1 2 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 1
Figure 9-11. Timer Output Compare 4 Register Pair (TOC4)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 189
Timing System
9.5.2 Timer Compare Force Register The CFORC register allows forced early compares. FOC[1:5] correspond to the five output compares. These bits are set for each output compare that is to be forced. The action taken as a result of a forced compare is the same as if there were a match between the OCx register and the free-running counter, except that the corresponding interrupt status flag bits are not set. The forced channels trigger their programmed pin actions to occur at the next timer count transition after the write to CFORC. The CFORC bits should not be used on an output compare function that is programmed to toggle its output on a successful compare because a normal compare that occurs immediately before or after the force can result in an undesirable operation.
Address: $100B Bit 7 Read: FOC1 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FOC2 FOC3 FOC4 FOC5 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-12. Timer Compare Force Register (CFORC) FOC[1:5] -- Force Output Comparison Bit When the FOC bit associated with an output compare circuit is set, the output compare circuit immediately performs the action it is programmed to do when an output match occurs. 0 = Not affected 1 = Output x action occurs Bits [2:0] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
Technical Data 190 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Output Compare
9.5.3 Output Compare Mask Register Use OC1M with OC1 to specify the bits of port A that are affected by a successful OC1 compare. The bits of the OC1M register correspond to PA[7:3].
Address: $100C Bit 7 Read: OC1M7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OC1M6 OC1M5 OC1M4 OC1M3 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-13. Output Compare 1 Mask Register (OC1M) OC1M[7:3] -- Output Compare Masks 0 = OC1 disabled 1 = OC1 enabled to control the corresponding pin of port A Bits [2:0] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 191
Timing System
9.5.4 Output Compare Data Register Use this register with OC1 to specify the data that is to be stored on the affected pin of port A after a successful OC1 compare. When a successful OC1 compare occurs, a data bit in OC1D is stored in the corresponding bit of port A for each bit that is set in OC1M.
Address: $100D Bit 7 Read: OC1D7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OC1D6 OC1D5 OC1D4 OC1D3 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-14. Output Compare 1 Data Register (OC1D) If OC1Mx is set, data in OC1Dx is output to port A bit x on successful OC1 compares. Bits [2:0] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
Technical Data 192 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Output Compare
9.5.5 Timer Counter Register The 16-bit read-only TCNT register contains the prescaled value of the 16-bit timer. A full counter read addresses the most significant byte (MSB) first. A read of this address causes the least significant byte (LSB) to be latched into a buffer for the next CPU cycle so that a double-byte read returns the full 16-bit state of the counter at the time of the MSB read cycle.
Register name: Timer Counter Register (High) Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 Bit 15 6 Bit 14 5 Bit 13
Address: $100E 4 Bit 12 3 Bit 11 2 Bit 10 1 Bit 9 Bit 0 Bit 8
0
0
0
0
0
Register name: Timer Counter Register (Low) Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 Bit 6 5 Bit 5
Address: $100F 4 Bit 4 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-15. Timer Counter Register (TCNT)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 193
Timing System
9.5.6 Timer Control Register 1 The bits of this register specify the action taken as a result of a successful OCx compare.
Address: $1020 Bit 7 Read: OM2 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OL2 OM3 OL3 OM4 OL4 OM5 OL5 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-16. Timer Control Register 1 (TCTL1) OM[2:5] -- Output Mode Bits OL[2:5] -- Output Level Bits These control bit pairs are encoded to specify the action taken after a successful OCx compare. OC5 functions only if the I4/O5 bit in the PACTL register is clear. Refer to Table 9-3 for the coding. Table 9-3. Timer Output Compare Actions
OMx 0 0 1 1 OLx 0 1 0 1 Action Taken on Successful Compare Timer disconnected from output pin logic Toggle OCx output line Clear OCx output line to 0 Set OCx output line to 1
Technical Data 194 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Output Compare
9.5.7 Timer Interrupt Mask 1 Register Use this 8-bit register to enable or inhibit the timer input capture and output compare interrupts.
Address: $1022 Bit 7 Read: OC1I Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OC2I OC3I OC4I I4/O5I IC1I IC2I IC3I 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-17. Timer Interrupt Mask 1 Register (TMSK1) OC1I-OC4I -- Output Compare x Interrupt Enable Bits If the OCxI enable bit is set when the OCxF flag bit is set, a hardware interrupt sequence is requested. I4/O5I -- Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Interrupt Enable Bit When I4/O5 in PACTL is 1, I4/O5I is the input capture 4 interrupt enable bit. When I4/O5 in PACTL is 0, I4/O5I is the output compare 5 interrupt enable bit. IC1I-IC3I -- Input Capture x Interrupt Enable Bits If the ICxI enable bit is set when the ICxF flag bit is set, a hardware interrupt sequence is requested.
NOTE:
Bits in TMSK1 correspond bit for bit with flag bits in TFLG1. Bits in TMSK1 enable the corresponding interrupt sources.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 195
Timing System
9.5.8 Timer Interrupt Flag 1 Register Bits in this register indicate when timer system events have occurred. Coupled with the bits of TMSK1, the bits of TFLG1 allow the timer subsystem to operate in either a polled or interrupt driven system. Each bit of TFLG1 corresponds to a bit in TMSK1 in the same position.
Address: $1023 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: OC1F 0 OC2F 0 OC3F 0 OC4F 0 I4/O5F 0 IC1F 0 IC2F 0 IC3F 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-18. Timer Interrupt Flag 1 Register (TFLG1) Clear flags by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit position(s). OC1F-OC4F -- Output Compare x Flag Set each time the counter matches output compare x value I4/O5F -- Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Flag Set by IC4 or OC5, depending on the function enabled by I4/O5 bit in PACTL IC1F-IC3F -- Input Capture x Flag Set each time a selected active edge is detected on the ICx input line
9.5.9 Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register Use this 8-bit register to enable or inhibit timer overflow and real-time interrupts. The timer prescaler control bits are included in this register.
Address: $1024 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: TOI 0 RTII 0 PAOVI 0 PAII 0 0 0 PR1 0 PR0 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-19. Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register (TMSK2)
Technical Data 196 Timing System MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Output Compare
TOI -- Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit 0 = TOF interrupts disabled 1 = Interrupt requested when TOF is set to 1 RTII -- Real-Time Interrupt Enable Bit Refer to 9.6 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI). PAOVI -- Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit Refer to 9.8.3 Pulse Accumulator Status and Interrupt Bits. PAII -- Pulse Accumulator Input Edge Interrupt Enable Bit Refer to 9.8.3 Pulse Accumulator Status and Interrupt Bits. Bits [3:2] -- Unimplemented Always read 0 PR[1:0] -- Timer Prescaler Select Bits These bits are used to select the prescaler divide-by ratio. In normal modes, PR[1:0] can be written only once, and the write must be within 64 cycles after reset. Refer to Table 9-1 and Table 9-4 for specific timing values. Table 9-4. Timer Prescale
PR[1:0] 00 01 10 11 Prescaler 1 4 8 16
NOTE:
Bits in TMSK2 correspond bit for bit with flag bits in TFLG2. Bits in TMSK2 enable the corresponding interrupt sources.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 197
Timing System
9.5.10 Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2 Bits in this register indicate when certain timer system events have occurred. Coupled with the four high-order bits of TMSK2, the bits of TFLG2 allow the timer subsystem to operate in either a polled or interrupt driven system. Each bit of TFLG2 corresponds to a bit in TMSK2 in the same position.
Address: $1025 Bit 7 Read: TOF Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RTIF PAOVF PAIF 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-20. Timer Interrupt Flag 2 Register (TFLG2) Clear flags by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit position(s). TOF -- Timer Overflow Interrupt Flag Set when TCNT changes from $FFFF to $0000 RTIF -- Real-Time (Periodic) Interrupt Flag Refer to 9.6 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI). PAOVF -- Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt Flag Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. PAIF -- Pulse Accumulator Input Edge Interrupt Flag Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. Bits [3:0] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
Technical Data 198 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Real-Time Interrupt (RTI)
9.6 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI)
The real-time interrupt (RTI) feature, used to generate hardware interrupts at a fixed periodic rate, is controlled and configured by two bits (RTR1 and RTR0) in the pulse accumulator control (PACTL) register. The RTII bit in the TMSK2 register enables the interrupt capability. The four different rates available are a product of the MCU oscillator frequency and the value of bits RTR[1:0]. Refer to Table 9-5, which shows the periodic real-time interrupt rates. Table 9-5. RTI Rates
RTR[1:0] 00 01 10 11 E = 3 MHz 2.731 ms 5.461 ms 10.923 ms 21.845 ms E = 2 MHz 4.096 ms 8.192 ms 16.384 ms 32.768 ms E = 1 MHz 8.192 ms 16.384 ms 32.768 ms 65.536 ms E = X MHz (E/213) (E/214) (E/215) (E/216)
The clock source for the RTI function is a free-running clock that cannot be stopped or interrupted except by reset. This clock causes the time between successive RTI timeouts to be a constant that is independent of the software latencies associated with flag clearing and service. For this reason, an RTI period starts from the previous timeout, not from when RTIF is cleared. Every timeout causes the RTIF bit in TFLG2 to be set, and if RTII is set, an interrupt request is generated. After reset, one entire RTI period elapses before the RTIF is set for the first time. Refer to the 9.5.9 Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register, 9.6.2 Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2, and 9.6.3 Pulse Accumulator Control Register.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 199
Timing System
9.6.1 Timer Interrupt Mask Register 2 This register contains the real-time interrupt enable bits.
Address: $1024 Bit 7 Read: TOI Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RTI PAOVI PAII PR1 PR0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-21. Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register (TMSK2) TOI -- Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit 0 = TOF interrupts disabled 1 = Interrupt requested when TOF is set to 1 RTII -- Real-Time Interrupt Enable Bit 0 = RTIF interrupts disabled 1 = Interrupt requested when RTIF set to 1 PAOVI -- Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. PAII -- Pulse Accumulator Input Edge Bit Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. Bits [3:2] -- Unimplemented Always read 0 PR[1:0] -- Timer Prescaler Select Bits Refer to Table 9-4.
NOTE:
Bits in TMSK2 correspond bit for bit with flag bits in TFLG2. Bits in TMSK2 enable the corresponding interrupt sources.
Technical Data 200 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Real-Time Interrupt (RTI)
9.6.2 Timer Interrupt Flag Register 2 Bits of this register indicate the occurrence of timer system events. Coupled with the four high-order bits of TMSK2, the bits of TFLG2 allow the timer subsystem to operate in either a polled or interrupt driven system. Each bit of TFLG2 corresponds to a bit in TMSK2 in the same position.
Address: $1025 Bit 7 Read: TOF Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RTIF PAOVF PAIF 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-22. Timer Interrupt Flag 2 Register (TFLG2) Clear flags by writing a 1 to the corresponding bit position(s). TOF -- Timer Overflow Interrupt Flag Set when TCNT changes from $FFFF to $0000 RTIF -- Real-Time Interrupt Flag The RTIF status bit is automatically set to 1 at the end of every RTI period. To clear RTIF, write a byte to TFLG2 with bit 6 set. PAOVF -- Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt Flag Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. PAIF -- Pulse Accumulator Input Edge Interrupt Flag Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. Bits [3:0] -- Unimplemented Always read 0
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 201
Timing System
9.6.3 Pulse Accumulator Control Register Bits RTR[1:0] of this register select the rate for the RTI system. The remaining bits control the pulse accumulator and IC4/OC5 functions.
Address: $1026 Bit 7 Read: DDRA7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAEN PAMOD PEDGE DDRA3 I4/O5 RTR1 RTR0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-23. Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) DDRA7 -- Data Direction for Port A Bit 7 Refer to Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports. PAEN -- Pulse Accumulator System Enable Bit Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. PAMOD -- Pulse Accumulator Mode Bit Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. PEDGE -- Pulse Accumulator Edge Control Bit Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. DDRA3 -- Data Direction for Port A Bit 3 Refer to Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports. I4/O5 -- Input Capture 4/Output Compare Bit Refer to 9.8 Pulse Accumulator. RTR[1:0] -- RTI Interrupt Rate Select Bits These two bits determine the rate at which the RTI system requests interrupts. The RTI system is driven by an E divided by 213 rate clock that is compensated so it is independent of the timer prescaler. These two control bits select an additional division factor. Refer to Table 9-5.
Technical Data 202 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Computer Operating Properly (COP) Watchdog Function
9.7 Computer Operating Properly (COP) Watchdog Function
The clocking chain for the COP function, tapped off of the main timer divider chain, is only superficially related to the main timer system. The CR[1:0] bits in the OPTION register and the NOCOP bit in the CONFIG register determine the status of the COP function. One additional register, COPRST, is used to arm and clear the COP watchdog reset system. Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts for a more detailed discussion of the COP function.
9.8 Pulse Accumulator
The M68HC11 Family of MCUs has an 8-bit counter that can be configured to operate either as a simple event counter or for gated time accumulation, depending on the state of the PAMOD bit in the PACTL register. Refer to the pulse accumulator block diagram, Figure 9-24. In the event counting mode, the 8-bit counter is clocked to increasing values by an external pin. The maximum clocking rate for the external event counting mode is the E clock divided by two. In gated time accumulation mode, a free-running E-clock divide-by-64 signal drives the 8-bit counter, but only while the external PAI pin is activated. Refer to Table 9-6. The pulse accumulator counter can be read or written at any time.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 203
Timing System
PAOVI PAOVF 1 INTERRUPT REQUESTS 2
PAII PAIF PAOVF PAI EDGE PAEN DISABLE FLAG SETTING OVERFLOW MCU PIN PA7/ PAI/ OC1 INPUT BUFFER AND EDGE DETECTOR OUTPUT BUFFER FROM MAIN TIMER OC1 FROM DDRA7 2:1 MUX DATA BUS PAEN CLOCK INTERNAL DATA BUS PAOVI E / 64 CLOCK FROM MAIN TIMER
TMSK2 INT ENABLES
TFLG2 INTERRUPT STATUS
ENABLE
PAMOD
PACTL CONTROL
Figure 9-24. Pulse Accumulator
PEDGE
PAEN
Table 9-6. Pulse Accumulator Timing
Crystal Frequency 4.0 MHz 8.0 MHz 12.0 MHz E Clock 1 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz Cycle Time 1000 ns 500 ns 333 ns E / 64 64 s 32 s 21.33 s PACNT Overflow 16.384 ms 8.192 ms 5.461 ms
Pulse accumulator control bits are also located within two timer registers, TMSK2 and TFLG2, as described in the following paragraphs.
Technical Data 204 Timing System
PAIF PACNT 8-BIT COUNTER
PAII
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Pulse Accumulator
9.8.1 Pulse Accumulator Control Register Four of this register's bits control an 8-bit pulse accumulator system. Another bit enables either the OC5 function or the IC4 function, while two other bits select the rate for the real-time interrupt system.
Address: $1026 Bit 7 Read: DDRA7 Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAEN PAMOD PEDGE DDRA3 I4/O5 RTR1 RTR0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-25. Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL) DDRA7 -- Data Direction for Port A Bit 7 Refer to Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports. PAEN -- Pulse Accumulator System Enable Bit 0 = Pulse accumulator disabled 1 = Pulse accumulator enabled PAMOD -- Pulse Accumulator Mode Bit 0 = Event counter 1 = Gated time accumulation PEDGE -- Pulse Accumulator Edge Control Bit This bit has different meanings depending on the state of the PAMOD bit, as shown in Table 9-7. Table 9-7. Pulse Accumulator Edge Control
PAMOD 0 0 1 1 PEDGE 0 1 0 1 Action on Clock PAI falling edge increments the counter. PAI rising edge increments the counter. A 0 on PAI inhibits counting. A 1 on PAI inhibits counting.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 205
Timing System
DDRA3 -- Data Direction for Port A Bit 3 Refer to Section 6. Parallel Input/Output (I/O) Ports. I4/O5 -- Input Capture 4/Output Compare 5 Bit 0 = Output compare 5 function enable (no IC4) 1 = Input capture 4 function enable (no OC5) RTR[1:0] -- RTI Interrupt Rate Select Bits Refer to 9.6 Real-Time Interrupt (RTI).
9.8.2 Pulse Accumulator Count Register This 8-bit read/write register contains the count of external input events at the PAI input or the accumulated count. The PACNT is readable even if PAI is not active in gated time accumulation mode. The counter is not affected by reset and can be read or written at any time. Counting is synchronized to the internal PH2 clock so that incrementing and reading occur during opposite half cycles.
Address: $1027 Bit 7 Read: Bit 7 Write: Reset: Indeterminate after reset Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 9-26. Pulse Accumulator Count Register (PACNT)
Technical Data 206 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Timing System Pulse Accumulator
9.8.3 Pulse Accumulator Status and Interrupt Bits The pulse accumulator control bits, PAOVI and PAII, PAOVF and PAIF, are located within timer registers TMSK2 and TFLG2.
Address: $1024 Bit 7 Read: TOI Write: Reset: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RTII PAOVI PAII PR1 PR0 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-27. Timer Interrupt Mask 2 Register (TMSK2)
Address:
$1025 Bit 7 6 RTIF 0 5 PAOVF 0 4 PAIF 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 Bit 0
Read: TOF Write: Reset: 0
= Unimplemented
Figure 9-28. Timer Interrupt Flag 2 Register (TFLG2) PAOVI and PAOVF -- Pulse Accumulator Interrupt Enable and Overflow Flag The PAOVF status bit is set each time the pulse accumulator count rolls over from $FF to $00. To clear this status bit, write a 1 in the corresponding data bit position (bit 5) of the TFLG2 register. The PAOVI control bit allows configuring the pulse accumulator overflow for polled or interrupt-driven operation and does not affect the state of PAOVF. When PAOVI is 0, pulse accumulator overflow interrupts are inhibited, and the system operates in a polled mode, which requires that PAOVF be polled by user software to determine when an overflow has occurred. When the PAOVI control bit is set, a hardware
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Timing System
Technical Data 207
Timing System
interrupt request is generated each time PAOVF is set. Before leaving the interrupt service routine, software must clear PAOVF by writing to the TFLG2 register. PAII and PAIF -- Pulse Accumulator Input Edge Interrupt Enable Bit and Flag The PAIF status bit is automatically set each time a selected edge is detected at the PA7/PAI/OC1 pin. To clear this status bit, write to the TFLG2 register with a 1 in the corresponding data bit position (bit 4). The PAII control bit allows configuring the pulse accumulator input edge detect for polled or interrupt-driven operation but does not affect setting or clearing the PAIF bit. When PAII is 0, pulse accumulator input interrupts are inhibited, and the system operates in a polled mode. In this mode, the PAIF bit must be polled by user software to determine when an edge has occurred. When the PAII control bit is set, a hardware interrupt request is generated each time PAIF is set. Before leaving the interrupt service routine, software must clear PAIF by writing to the TFLG2 register.
Technical Data 208 Timing System
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 10. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
10.1 Contents
10.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10.3 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 10.3.1 Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 10.3.2 Analog Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 10.3.3 Digital Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 10.3.4 Result Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 10.3.5 A/D Converter Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 10.3.6 Conversion Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 A/D Converter Power-Up and Clock Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Conversion Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Channel Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Single-Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Multiple-Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Operation in Stop and Wait Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
10.10 A/D Control/Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 10.11 A/D Converter Result Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
10.2 Introduction
The analog-to-digital (A/D) system, a successive approximation converter, uses an all-capacitive charge redistribution technique to convert analog signals to digital values.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Technical Data 209
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter 10.3 Overview
The A/D system is an 8-channel, 8-bit, multiplexed-input converter. The converter does not require external sample and hold circuits because of the type of charge redistribution technique used. A/D converter timing can be synchronized to the system E clock or to an internal resistor capacitor (RC) oscillator. The A/D converter system consists of four functional blocks: multiplexer, analog converter, digital control, and result storage. Refer to Figure 10-1.
10.3.1 Multiplexer The multiplexer selects one of 16 inputs for conversion. Input selection is controlled by the value of bits CD:CA in the ADCTL register. The eight port E pins are fixed-direction analog inputs to the multiplexer, and additional internal analog signal lines are routed to it. Port E pins also can be used as digital inputs. Digital reads of port E pins are not recommended during the sample portion of an A/D conversion cycle, when the gate signal to the N-channel input gate is on. Because no P-channel devices are directly connected to either input pins or reference voltage pins, voltages above VDD do not cause a latchup problem, although current should be limited according to maximum ratings. Refer to Figure 10-2, which is a functional diagram of an input pin.
Technical Data 210 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter Overview
PE0 AN0 PE1 AN1 PE2 AN2 PE3 AN3 PE4 AN4 PE5 AN5 PE6 AN6 ANALOG MUX 8-BIT CAPACITIVE DAC WITH SAMPLE AND HOLD
VRH
VRL
SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION REGISTER AND CONTROL RESULT
INTERNAL DATA BUS
SCAN
MULT CD
CCF
CC
PE7 AN7
ADCTL A/D CONTROL
RESULT REGISTER INTERFACE
ADR1 A/D RESULT 1
ADR2 A/D RESULT 2
ADR3 A/D RESULT 3
CB
ADR4 A/D RESULT 4
Figure 10-1. A/D Converter Block Diagram
DIFFUSION/POLY COUPLER + ~20 V - ~0.7 V + ~12V - ~0.7V
DUMMY N-CHANNEL OUTPUT DEVICE
ANALOG INPUT PIN
CA
4 k 400 nA JUNCTION LEAKAGE
*
~ 20 pF DAC CAPACITANCE
< 2 pF
INPUT PROTECTION DEVICE
VRL
* THIS ANALOG SWITCH IS CLOSED ONLY DURING THE 12-CYCLE SAMPLE TIME.
Figure 10-2. Electrical Model of an A/D Input Pin (Sample Mode)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Technical Data 211
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
10.3.2 Analog Converter Conversion of an analog input selected by the multiplexer occurs in this block. It contains a digital-to-analog capacitor (DAC) array, a comparator, and a successive approximation register (SAR). Each conversion is a sequence of eight comparison operations, beginning with the most significant bit (MSB). Each comparison determines the value of a bit in the successive approximation register. The DAC array performs two functions. It acts as a sample and hold circuit during the entire conversion sequence and provides comparison voltage to the comparator during each successive comparison. The result of each successive comparison is stored in the SAR. When a conversion sequence is complete, the contents of the SAR are transferred to the appropriate result register. A charge pump provides switching voltage to the gates of analog switches in the multiplexer. Charge pump output must stabilize between 7 and 8 volts within up to 100 s before the converter can be used. The charge pump is enabled by the ADPU bit in the OPTION register.
10.3.3 Digital Control All A/D converter operations are controlled by bits in register ADCTL. In addition to selecting the analog input to be converted, ADCTL bits indicate conversion status and control whether single or continuous conversions are performed. Finally, the ADCTL bits determine whether conversions are performed on single or multiple channels.
10.3.4 Result Registers Four 8-bit registers ADR[4:1] store conversion results. Each of these registers can be accessed by the processor in the CPU. The conversion complete flag (CCF) indicates when valid data is present in the result registers. The result registers are written during a portion of the system clock cycle when reads do not occur, so there is no conflict.
Technical Data 212 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter Overview
10.3.5 A/D Converter Clocks The CSEL bit in the OPTION register selects whether the A/D converter uses the system E clock or an internal RC oscillator for synchronization. When E-clock frequency is below 750 kHz, charge leakage in the capacitor array can cause errors, and the internal oscillator should be used. When the RC clock is used, additional errors can occur because the comparator is sensitive to the additional system clock noise.
10.3.6 Conversion Sequence A/D converter operations are performed in sequences of four conversions each. A conversion sequence can repeat continuously or stop after one iteration. The conversion complete flag (CCF) is set after the fourth conversion in a sequence to show the availability of data in the result registers. Figure 10-3 shows the timing of a typical sequence. Synchronization is referenced to the system E clock.
E CLOCK MSB 4 CYCLES BIT 6 2 CYC BIT 5 2 CYC BIT 4 2 CYC BIT 3 2 CYC BIT 2 2 CYC BIT 1 2 CYC LSB 2 CYC 2 CYC END
12 E CYCLES WRITE TO ADCTL
SAMPLE ANALOG INPUT
SUCCESSIVE APPROXIMATION SEQUENCE
0
CONVERT FIRST CHANNEL, UPDATE ADR1
32
CONVERT SECOND CHANNEL, UPDATE ADR2
64
CONVERT THIRD CHANNEL, UPDATE ADR3
96
CONVERT FOURTH CHANNEL, UPDATE ADR4
128 -- E CYCLES
Figure 10-3. A/D Conversion Sequence
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Technical Data 213
REPEAT SEQUENCE, SCAN = 1
SET CC FLAG
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter 10.4 A/D Converter Power-Up and Clock Select
Bit 7 of the OPTION register controls A/D converter power-up. Clearing ADPU removes power from and disables the A/D converter system. Setting ADPU enables the A/D converter system. Stabilization of the analog bias voltages requires a delay of as much as 100 s after turning on the A/D converter. When the A/D converter system is operating with the MCU E clock, all switching and comparator operations are inherently synchronized to the main MCU clocks. This allows the comparator output to be sampled at relatively quiet times during MCU clock cycles. Since the internal RC oscillator is asynchronous to the MCU clock, there is more error attributable to internal system clock noise. A/D converter accuracy is reduced slightly while the internal RC oscillator is being used (CSEL = 1).
Address: $1039 Bit 7 Read: ADPU Write: Reset: 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 CSEL 6 5 IRQE(1) 4 DLY(1) 3 CME 2 1 CR1(1) Bit 0 CR0(1)
1. Can be written only once in first 64 cycles out of reset in normal modes or at any time in special modes = Unimplemented
Figure 10-4. System Configuration Options Register (OPTION) ADPU -- A/D Power-Up Bit 0 = A/D powered down 1 = A/D powered up CSEL -- Clock Select Bit 0 = A/D and EEPROM use system E clock. 1 = A/D and EEPROM use internal RC clock. IRQE -- Configure IRQ for Edge-Sensitive Only Operation Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts.
Technical Data 214 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter Conversion Process
DLY -- Enable Oscillator Startup Delay Bit 0 = The oscillator startup delay coming out of stop is bypassed and the MCU resumes processing within about four bus cycles. 1 = A delay of approximately 4000 E-clock cycles is imposed as the MCU is started up from the stop power-saving mode. This delay allows the crystal oscillator to stabilize. CME -- Clock Monitor Enable Bit Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts. Bit 2 -- Not implemented Always reads 0 CR[1:0] -- COP Timer Rate Select Bits Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts and Section 9. Timing System.
10.5 Conversion Process
The A/D conversion sequence begins one E-clock cycle after a write to the A/D control/status register, ADCTL. The bits in ADCTL select the channel and the mode of conversion. An input voltage equal to VRL converts to $00 and an input voltage equal to VRH converts to $FF (full scale), with no overflow indication. For ratiometric conversions of this type, the source of each analog input should use VRH as the supply voltage and be referenced to VRL.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Technical Data 215
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter 10.6 Channel Assignments
The multiplexer allows the A/D converter to select one of 16 analog signals. Eight of these channels correspond to port E input lines to the MCU, four of the channels are internal reference points or test functions, and four channels are reserved. Refer to Table 10-1. Table 10-1. Converter Channel Assignments
Channel Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - 12 13 14 15 16
1. Used for factory testing
Channel Signal AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Reserved VRH(1) VRL(1) (VRH)/2(1) Reserved(1)
Result in ADRx if MULT = 1 ADR1 ADR2 ADR3 ADR4 ADR1 ADR2 ADR3 ADR4 -- ADR1 ADR2 ADR3 ADR4
10.7 Single-Channel Operation
The two types of single-channel operation are: 1. When SCAN = 0, the single selected channel is converted four consecutive times. The first result is stored in A/D result register 1 (ADR1), and the fourth result is stored in ADR4. After the fourth conversion is complete, all conversion activity is halted until a new conversion command is written to the ADCTL register. 2. When SCAN = 1, conversions continue to be performed on the selected channel with the fifth conversion being stored in register ADR1 (overwriting the first conversion result), the sixth conversion overwriting ADR2, and so on.
Technical Data 216 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter Multiple-Channel Operation
10.8 Multiple-Channel Operation
The two types of multiple-channel operation are: 1. When SCAN = 0, a selected group of four channels is converted one time each. The first result is stored in A/D result register 1 (ADR1), and the fourth result is stored in ADR4. After the fourth conversion is complete, all conversion activity is halted until a new conversion command is written to the ADCTL register. 2. When SCAN = 1, conversions continue to be performed on the selected group of channels with the fifth conversion being stored in register ADR1 (replacing the earlier conversion result for the first channel in the group), the sixth conversion overwriting ADR2, and so on.
10.9 Operation in Stop and Wait Modes
If a conversion sequence is in progress when either the stop or wait mode is entered, the conversion of the current channel is suspended. When the MCU resumes normal operation, that channel is resampled and the conversion sequence is resumed. As the MCU exits wait mode, the A/D circuits are stable and valid results can be obtained on the first conversion. However, in stop mode, all analog bias currents are disabled and it is necessary to allow a stabilization period when leaving stop mode. If stop mode is exited with a delay (DLY = 1), there is enough time for these circuits to stabilize before the first conversion. If stop mode is exited with no delay (DLY bit in OPTION register = 0), allow 10 ms for the A/D circuitry to stabilize to avoid invalid results.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Technical Data 217
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter 10.10 A/D Control/Status Register
All bits in this register can be read or written, except bit 7, which is a read-only status indicator, and bit 6, which always reads as 0. Write to ADCTL to initiate a conversion. To quit a conversion in progress, write to this register and a new conversion sequence begins immediately.
Address: $1030 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: 0 0 = Unimplemented Indeterminate after reset CCF SCAN MULT CD CC CB CA 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
Figure 10-5. A/D Control/Status Register (ADCTL) CCF -- Conversion Complete Flag A read-only status indicator, this bit is set when all four A/D result registers contain valid conversion results. Each time the ADCTL register is overwritten, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 and a conversion sequence is started. In the continuous mode, CCF is set at the end of the first conversion sequence. Bit 6 -- Unimplemented Always reads 0 SCAN -- Continuous Scan Control Bit When this control bit is clear, the four requested conversions are performed once to fill the four result registers. When this control bit is set, conversions are performed continuously with the result registers updated as data becomes available. MULT -- Multiple Channel/Single Channel Control Bit When this bit is clear, the A/D converter system is configured to perform four consecutive conversions on the single channel specified by the four channel select bits CD:CA (bits [3:0] of the ADCTL register). When this bit is set, the A/D system is configured to perform
Technical Data 218 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter A/D Control/Status Register
a conversion on each of four channels where each result register corresponds to one channel.
NOTE:
When the multiple-channel continuous scan mode is used, extra care is needed in the design of circuitry driving the A/D inputs. The charge on the capacitive DAC array before the sample time is related to the voltage on the previously converted channel. A charge share situation exists between the internal DAC capacitance and the external circuit capacitance. Although the amount of charge involved is small, the rate at which it is repeated is every 64 s for an E clock of 2 MHz. The RC charging rate of the external circuit must be balanced against this charge sharing effect to avoid errors in accuracy. Refer to M68HC11 Reference Manual, Motorola document order number M68HC11RM/AD, for further information. CD:CA -- Channel Selects D:A Bits Refer to Table 10-2. When a multiple channel mode is selected (MULT = 1), the two least significant channel select bits (CB and CA) have no meaning and the CD and CC bits specify which group of four channels is to be converted. Table 10-2. A/D Converter Channel Selection
Channel Select Control Bits CD:CC:CB:CA 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 10XX 1100 1101 1110 1111 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Reserved VRH
(1)
Channel Signal
Result in ADRx if MULT = 1 ADR1 ADR2 ADR3 ADR4 ADR1 ADR2 ADR3 ADR4 -- ADR1 ADR2 ADR3 ADR4
VRL(1) (VRH)/2(1) Reserved(1)
1. Used for factory testing
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Technical Data 219
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter 10.11 A/D Converter Result Registers
These read-only registers hold an 8-bit conversion result. Writes to these registers have no effect. Data in the A/D converter result registers is valid when the CCF flag in the ADCTL register is set, indicating a conversion sequence is complete. If conversion results are needed sooner, refer to Figure 10-3, which shows the A/D conversion sequence diagram.
Register name: Analog-to-Digital Converter Result Register 1 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 7 6 Bit 6 5 Bit 5 4 Bit 4
Address: $1031 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
Indeterminate after reset Address: $1032 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
Register name: Analog-to-Digital Converter Result Register 2 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 7 6 Bit 6 5 Bit 5 4 Bit 4
Indeterminate after reset Address: $1033 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
Register name: Analog-to-Digital Converter Result Register 3 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: Bit 7 6 Bit 6 5 Bit 5 4 Bit 4
Indeterminate after reset Address: $1034 3 Bit 3 2 Bit 2 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0
Register name: Analog-to-Digital Converter Result Register 4 Bit 7 Read: Write: Reset: = Unimplemented Bit 7 6 Bit 6 5 Bit 5 4 Bit 4
Indeterminate after reset
Figure 10-6. Analog-to-Digital Converter Result Registers (ADR1-ADR4)
Technical Data 220 Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 11. Electrical Characteristics
11.1 Contents
11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Maximum Ratings for Standard and Extended Voltage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Functional Operating Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 DC Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 MC68L11E9/E20 DC Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 226 MC68L11E9/E20 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation. . . 227
11.10 Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 11.11 MC68L11E9/E20 Control Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 11.12 Peripheral Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 11.13 MC68L11E9/E20 Peripheral Port Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 11.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 11.15 MC68L11E9/E20 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 11.16 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 11.17 MC68L11E9/E20 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics. . . . 244 11.18 Serial Peripheral Interface Timing Characteristics . . . . . . . . .246 11.19 MC68L11E9/E20 Serial Peirpheral Interface Characteristics . 247 11.20 EEPROM Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 11.21 MC68L11E9/E20 EEPROM Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 11.22 EPROM Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 221
Electrical Characteristics 11.2 Introduction
This section contains electrical specifications for the M68HC11 E-series devices.
11.3 Maximum Ratings for Standard and Extended Voltage Devices
Maximum ratings are the extreme limits to which the MCU can be exposed without permanently damaging it.
NOTE:
This device is not guaranteed to operate properly at the maximum ratings. Refer to 11.6 DC Electrical Characteristics, 11.7 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation, 11.8 MC68L11E9/E20 DC Electrical Characteristics, and 11.9 MC68L11E9/E20 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation for guaranteed operating conditions.
Rating Supply voltage Input voltage Current drain per pin(1) excluding VDD, VSS, AVDD, VRH, VRL, and XIRQ/VPPE Storage temperature Symbol VDD VIn ID TSTG Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to +7.0 25 -55 to +150 Unit V V mA C
1. One pin at a time, observing maximum power dissipation limits
NOTE:
This device contains circuitry to protect the inputs against damage due to high static voltages or electric fields; however, it is advised that normal precautions be taken to avoid application of any voltage higher than maximum-rated voltages to this high-impedance circuit. For proper operation, it is recommended that VIn and VOut be constrained to the range VSS (VIn or VOut) VDD. Reliability of operation is enhanced if unused inputs are connected to an appropriate logic voltage level (for example, either VSS or VDD).
Technical Data 222 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics Functional Operating Range
11.4 Functional Operating Range
Rating Operating temperature range MC68HC(7)11Ex MC68HC(7)11ExC MC68HC(7)11ExV MC68HC(7)11ExM MC68HC811E2 MC68HC811E2C MC68HC811E2V MC68HC811E2M MC68L11Ex Operating voltage range Symbol Value TL to TH 0 to +70 -40 to +85 -40 to +105 -40 to +125 0 to +70 -40 to +85 -40 to +105 -40 to +125 -20 to +70 5.0 10% Unit
TA
C
VDD
V
11.5 Thermal Characteristics
Characteristic Average junction temperature Ambient temperature Package thermal resistance (junction-to-ambient) 48-pin plastic DIP (MC68HC811E2 only) 56-pin plastic SDIP 52-pin plastic leaded chip carrier 52-pin plastic thin quad flat pack (TQFP) 64-pin quad flat pack Total power dissipation(1) Device internal power dissipation I/O pin power dissipation(2) A constant(3) Symbol TJ TA Value TA + (PD x JA) User-determined 50 50 50 85 85 PINT + PI/O K / TJ + 273C IDD x VDD User-determined PD x (TA + 273C) + JA x PD2 Unit C C
JA
C/W
PD PINT PI/O K
W W W W/C
1. This is an approximate value, neglecting PI/O. 2. For most applications, PI/O P INT and can be neglected. 3. K is a constant pertaining to the device. Solve for K with a known TA and a measured PD (at equilibrium). Use this value of K to solve for P D and TJ iteratively for any value of TA.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 223
Electrical Characteristics 11.6 DC Electrical Characteristics
Characteristics(1) Output voltage(2) ILoad = 10.0 A All outputs except XTAL All outputs except XTAL, RESET, and MODA Output high voltage(2) ILoad = -0.8 mA, VDD = 4.5 V All outputs except XTAL, RESET, and MODA Output low voltage ILoad = 1.6 mA All outputs except XTAL Input high voltage All inputs except RESET RESET Input low voltage, all inputs I/O ports, 3-state leakage VIn = VIH or VIL PA7, PA3, PC[7:0], PD[5:0], AS/STRA, MODA/LIR, RESET Input leakage current(3) VIn = VDD or VSS PA[2:0], IRQ, XIRQ MODB/VSTBY (XIRQ on EPROM-based devices) RAM standby voltage, power down RAM standby current, power down Input capacitance PA[2:0], PE[7:0], IRQ, XIRQ, EXTAL PA7, PA3, PC[7:0], PD[5:0], AS/STRA, MODA/LIR, RESET Output load capacitance All outputs except PD[4:1] PD[4:1] Symbol Min Max Unit
VOL, VOH
-- VDD -0.1
0.1 --
V
VOH
VDD -0.8
--
V
VOL
--
0.4
V
VIH VIL
0.7 x VDD 0.8 x VDD VSS -0.3
VDD + 0.3 VDD + 0.3 0.2 x VDD
V V
IOZ
--
10
A
IIn
-- -- 4.0 -- -- -- -- --
1 10 VDD 10 8 12 90 100
A
VSB ISB C In
V A pF
CL
pF
1. V DD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, V SS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted 2. V OH specification for RESET and MODA is not applicable because they are open-drain pins. VOH specification not applicable to ports C and D in wired-OR mode. 3. Refer to 11.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics and 11.15 MC68L11E9/E20 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics for leakage current for port E.
Technical Data 224 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics Supply Currents and Power Dissipation
11.7 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation
Characteristics(1) Run maximum total supply current(2) Single-chip mode Expanded multiplexed mode Wait maximum total supply current(2) (all peripheral functions shut down) Single-chip mode Expanded multiplexed mode Stop maximum total supply current(2) Single-chip mode, no clocks Symbol Min Max Unit
2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz
IDD
-- -- -- --
15 27 27 35
mA
2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz
WIDD
-- -- -- --
6 15 10 20
mA
-40C to +85C > +85C to +105C > +105C to +125C 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz
SIDD
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
25 50 100 85 150 150 195
A
Maximum power dissipation Single-chip mode Expanded multiplexed mode
PD
mW
1. V DD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, V SS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted 2. EXTAL is driven with a square wave, and tcyc = 500 ns for 2 MHz rating tcyc = 333 ns for 3 MHz rating VIL 0.2 V VIH VDD - 0.2 V no dc loads
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 225
Electrical Characteristics 11.8 MC68L11E9/E20 DC Electrical Characteristics
Characteristics(1) Output voltage(2) ILoad = 10.0 A All outputs except XTAL All outputs except XTAL, RESET, and MODA Output high voltage(2) ILoad = -0.5 mA, VDD = 3.0 V ILoad = -0.8 mA, VDD = 4.5 V All outputs except XTAL, RESET, and MODA Output low voltage ILoad = 1.6 mA, VDD = 5.0 V ILoad = 1.0 mA, VDD = 3.0 V All outputs except XTAL Input high voltage All inputs except RESET RESET Input low voltage, all inputs I/O ports, 3-state leakage VIn = VIH or VIL PA7, PA3, PC[7:0], PD[5:0], AS/STRA, MODA/LIR, RESET Input leakage current(3) VIn = VDD or VSS PA[2:0], IRQ, XIRQ MODB/VSTBY (XIRQ on EPROM-based devices) RAM standby voltage, power down RAM standby current, power down Input capacitance PA[2:0], PE[7:0], IRQ, XIRQ, EXTAL PA7, PA3, PC[7:0], PD[5:0], AS/STRA, MODA/LIR, RESET Output load capacitance All outputs except PD[4:1] PD[4:1] Symbol Min Max Unit
V OL, VOH
-- VDD -0.1
0.1 --
V
VOH
VDD -0.8
--
V
VOL
--
0.4
V
VIH VIL
0.7 x VDD 0.8 x VDD VSS -0.3
VDD + 0.3 VDD + 0.3 0.2 x VDD
V
V
IOZ
--
10
A
IIn
-- -- 2.0 -- -- -- -- --
1 10 VDD 10 8 12 90 100
A
VSB ISB l
V A pF
CL
pF
1. V DD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted 2. V OH specification for RESET and MODA is not applicable because they are open-drain pins. VOH specification not applicable to ports C and D in wired-OR mode. 3. Refer to 11.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics and 11.15 MC68L11E9/E20 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics for leakage current for port E.
Technical Data 226 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation
11.9 MC68L11E9/E20 Supply Currents and Power Dissipation
Characteristic(1) Run maximum total supply current(2) Single-chip mode Expanded multiplexed mode Symbol 1 MHz 2 MHz Unit
VDD VDD VDD VDD
= 5.5 V = 3.0 V = 5.5 V = 5.5 V
IDD
8 4 14 7
15 8 27 14
mA
Wait maximum total supply current(2) (all peripheral functions shut down) Single-chip mode Expanded multiplexed mode
VDD VDD VDD VDD
= 5.5 V = 3.0 V = 5.5 V = 3.0 V
WIDD
3 1.5 5 2.5
6 3 10 5
mA
Stop maximum total supply current(2) Single-chip mode, no clocks
VDD = 5.5 V VDD = 3.0 V 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz
SIDD
50 25
50 25
A
Maximum power dissipation Single-chip mode Expanded multiplexed mode
PD
44 12 77 21
85 24 150 42
mW
1. V DD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, unless otherwise noted 2. EXTAL is driven with a square wave, and tcyc = 500 ns for 2 MHz rating tcyc = 333 ns for 3 MHz rating VIL 0.2 V VIH VDD - 0.2 V no dc loads
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 227
Electrical Characteristics
CLOCKS, STROBES
~ VDD
0.4 VOLTS
~ V SS
0.4 VOLTS NOM
VDD - 0.8 VOLTS
NOM 70% of V DD
INPUTS 20% of V DD NOMINAL TIMING
~ VDD
OUTPUTS
VDD - 0.8 Volts 0.4 Volts
~ VSS
DC TESTING
CLOCKS, STROBES
~ VDD
20% of VDD
70% of VDD
~ VSS
20% of V DD SPEC SPEC 70% of VDD 20% of V DD (NOTE 2) VDD - 0.8 VOLTS 0.4 VOLTS
INPUTS SPEC TIMING
~ VDD
OUTPUTS
70% of V DD 20% of V DD
~ VSS
AC TESTING
Notes: 1. Full test loads are applied during all dc electrical tests and ac timing measurements. 2. During ac timing measurements, inputs are driven to 0.4 volts and VDD - 0.8 volts while timing measurements are taken at 20% and 70% of VDD points.
Figure 11-1. Test Methods
Technical Data 228 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics Control Timing
11.10 Control Timing
Characteristic(1) (2) Frequency of operation E-clock period Crystal frequency External oscillator frequency Processor control setup time tPCSU = 1/4 tcyc + 50 ns Reset input pulse width To guarantee external reset vector Minimum input time (can be pre-empted by internal reset) Mode programming setup time Mode programming hold time Interrupt pulse width, IRQ edge-sensitive mode PWIRQ = tcyc + 20 ns Wait recovery startup time Timer pulse width input capture pulse accumulator input PWTIM = tcyc + 20 ns 1.0 MHz Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max fo tcyc fXTAL 4 fo tPCSU dc 1000 -- dc 300 1.0 -- 4.0 4.0 -- dc 500 -- dc 175 2.0 -- 8.0 8.0 -- dc 333 -- dc 133 3.0 -- 12.0 12.0 -- MHz ns MHz MHz ns 2.0 MHz 3.0 MHz Unit
PWRSTL
8 1 2 10 1020 -- 1020
-- -- -- -- -- 4 --
8 1 2 10 520 -- 520
-- -- -- -- -- 4 --
8 1 2 10 353 -- 353
-- -- -- -- -- 4 --
tcyc
tMPS tMPH PWIRQ tWRS PWTIM
tcyc ns ns tcyc ns
1. V DD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, all timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted 2. RESET is recognized during the first clock cycle it is held low. Internal circuitry then drives the pin low for four clock cycles, releases the pin, and samples the pin level two cycles later to determine the source of the interrupt. Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts for further detail.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 229
Electrical Characteristics 11.11 MC68L11E9/E20 Control Timing
Characteristic(1) (2) Frequency of operation E-clock period Crystal frequency External oscillator frequency Processor control setup time tPCSU = 1/4 tcyc + 75 ns Reset input pulse width To guarantee external reset vector Minimum input time (can be pre-empted by internal reset) Mode programming setup time Mode programming hold time Interrupt pulse width, IRQ edge-sensitive mode PWIRQ = tcyc + 20 ns Wait recovery startup time Timer pulse width input capture pulse accumulator input PWTIM = tcyc + 20 ns 1.0 MHz Symbol Min fo tcyc fXTAL 4 fo tPCSU dc 1000 -- dc 325 Max 1.0 -- 4.0 4.0 -- Min dc 500 -- dc 200 Max 2.0 -- 8.0 8.0 -- MHz ns MHz MHz ns 2.0 MHz Unit
PW RSTL tMPS tMPH PW IRQ tWRS PWTIM
8 1 2 10 1020 -- 1020
-- -- -- -- -- 4 --
8 1 2 10 520 -- 520
-- -- -- -- -- 4 --
tcyc tcyc ns ns tcyc ns
1. V DD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to T H, all timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted 2. RESET is recognized during the first clock cycle it is held low. Internal circuitry then drives the pin low for four clock cycles, releases the pin, and samples the pin level two cycles later to determine the source of the interrupt. Refer to Section 5. Resets and Interrupts for further detail.
PA[2:0]
(1)
PA[2:0] PA7
(2)
(1) (3)
PWTIM PA7(2) (3)
Notes: 1. Rising edge sensitive input 2. Falling edge sensitive input 3. Maximum pulse accumulator clocking rate is E-clock frequency divided by 2.
Figure 11-2. Timer Inputs
Technical Data 230 Electrical Characteristics MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4
VDD EXTAL 4064 tCYC E tPCSU PWRSTL RESET tMPS MODA, MODB NEW PC NEW PC tMPH ADDRESS FFFE FFFE FFFE FFFE FFFF FFFE FFFE FFFE FFFE FFFE FFFF
MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics 231
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Control Timing
Figure 11-3. POR External Reset Timing Diagram
Technical Data
Electrical Characteristics
232 Electrical Characteristics MOTOROLA
Technical Data
INTERNAL CLOCKS IRQ1 PWIRQ IRQ or XIRQ tSTOPDELAY3 E
STOP ADDR + 1
ADDRESS4
STOP ADDR
STOP ADDR + 1
OPCODE Resume program with instruction which follows the STOP instruction.
ADDRESS5
STOP ADDR
STOP ADDR + 1
STOP ADDR + 1
STOP ADDR + 2
SP...SP-7
SP - 8
SP - 8
FFF2 (FFF4)
FFF3 (FFF5)
NEW PC
Notes: 1. Edge Sensitive IRQ pin (IRQE bit = 1) 2. Level sensitive IRQ pin (IRQE bit = 0) 3. tSTOPDELAY = 4064 tCYC if DLY bit = 1 or 4 tCYC if DLY = 0. 4. XIRQ with X bit in CCR = 1. 5. IRQ or (XIRQ with X bit in CCR = 0).
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4
Figure 11-4. STOP Recovery Timing Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4
E tPCSU IRQ, XIRQ, OR INTERNAL INTERRUPTS tWRS ADDRESS
WAIT ADDR WAIT ADDR + 1 SP PCL SP - 1 SP - 2...SP - 8 SP - 8 SP - 8...SP - 8 SP - 8 SP - 8 SP - 8 VECTOR ADDR VECTOR ADDR + 1 NEW PC PCH, YL, YH, XL, XH, A, B, CCR
MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics 233
STACK REGISTERS R/W
Note: RESET also causes recovery from WAIT.
Figure 11-5. WAIT Recovery from Interrupt Timing Diagram
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Control Timing
Technical Data
Electrical Characteristics
234 Electrical Characteristics MOTOROLA
Technical Data
E tPCSU IRQ 1 PWIRQ IRQ OR INTERNAL INTERRUPT ADDRESS
NEXT OPCODE NEXT OP + 1 SP SP - 1 SP - 2 SP - 3 SP - 4 SP - 5 SP - 6 SP - 7 SP - 8 SP - 8 VECTOR ADDR VECTOR ADDR + 1 NEW PC
2 , XIRQ,
DATA
OP CODE
--
PCL
PCH
IYL
IYH
IXL
IXH
B
A
CCR
--
VECT MSB
VECT LSB
OP CODE
R/W
Notes: 1. Edge sensitive IRQ pin (IRQE bit = 1) 2. Level sensitive IRQ pin (IRQE bit = 0)
Figure 11-6. Interrupt Timing Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4
Electrical Characteristics Peripheral Port Timing
11.12 Peripheral Port Timing
Characteristic(1) (2) Frequency of operation E-clock frequency E-clock period Peripheral data setup time MCU read of ports A, C, D, and E Peripheral data hold time MCU read of ports A, C, D, and E Delay time, peripheral data write tPWD = 1/4 tcyc + 100 ns MCU writes to port A MCU writes to ports B, C, and D Port C input data setup time Port C input data hold time Delay time, E fall to STRB tDEB = 1/4 tcyc + 100 ns Setup time, STRA asserted to E fall(3) Delay time, STRA asserted to port C data output valid Hold time, STRA negated to port C data 3-state hold time 1.0 MHz Symbol Min fo tcyc tPDSU tPDH dc 1000 100 50 Max 1.0 -- -- -- Min dc 500 100 50 Max 2.0 -- -- -- Min dc 333 100 50 Max 3.0 -- -- -- MHz ns ns ns 2.0 MHz 3.0 MHz Unit
tPWD
-- -- 60 100 -- 0 -- 10 --
200 350 -- -- 350 -- 100 -- 150
-- -- 60 100 -- 0 -- 10 --
200 225 -- -- 225 -- 100 -- 150
-- -- 60 100 -- 0 -- 10 --
200 183 -- -- 183 -- 100 -- 150
ns
tIS tIH tDEB tAES tPCD tPCH tPCZ
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
1. VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, VSS = 0 Vdc, T A = TL to TH, all timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted 2. Ports C and D timing is valid for active drive. (CWOM and DWOM bits are not set in PIOC and SPCR registers, respectively.) 3. If this setup time is met, STRB acknowledges in the next cycle. If it is not met, the response may be delayed one more cycle.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 235
Electrical Characteristics 11.13 MC68L11E9/E20 Peripheral Port Timing
Characteristic(1) (2) Frequency of operation E-clock frequency E-clock period Peripheral data setup time MCU read of ports A, C, D, and E Peripheral data hold time MCU read of ports A, C, D, and E Delay time, peripheral data write tPWD = 1/4 tcyc + 150 ns MCU writes to port A MCU writes to ports B, C, and D Port C input data setup time Port C input data hold time Delay time, E fall to STRB tDEB = 1/4 tcyc + 150 ns Setup time, STRA asserted to E fall(3) Delay time, STRA asserted to port C data output valid Hold time, STRA negated to port C data 3-state hold time 1.0 MHz Symbol Min fo tcyc tPDSU tPDH dc 1000 100 50 Max 1.0 -- -- -- Min dc 500 100 50 Max 2.0 -- -- -- MHz ns ns ns 2.0 MHz Unit
tPWD
-- -- 60 100 -- 0 -- 10 --
250 400 -- -- 400 -- 100 -- 150
-- -- 60 100 -- 0 -- 10 --
250 275 -- -- 275 -- 100 -- 150
ns
tIS tIH tDEB tAES tPCD tPCH tPCZ
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
1. V DD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to T H, all timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted 2. Ports C and D timing is valid for active drive. (CWOM and DWOM bits are not set in PIOC and SPCR registers, respectively.) 3. If this setup time is met, STRB acknowledges in the next cycle. If it is not met, the response may be delayed one more cycle.
Technical Data 236 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Peripheral Port Timing
Figure 11-7. Port Read Timing Diagram
Figure 11-8. Port Write Timing Diagram
Figure 11-9. Simple Input Strobe Timing Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 237
Electrical Characteristics
H8V WRITE TO PORT B MCU AXSD U@AUPAQPSU A7
@
E
WQX9 t
PWD
QPSU A7
PORT B
PREVIOUS PORTA96U 6 QS@WD PV TAQPSU DATA
I@XA96 U6 AW6G D9
NEW DATA VALID
W9@7 tDEB
TU S7APV U
STRB (OUT)
Figure 11-10. Simple Output Strobe Timing Diagram
READ PORTCL(1) S@69AQPSU8G
@
E "READY" AS@69A tWDEB 9@7
W9@7 DEB
t
TUS7APVU
STRB (0UT)
W6@T AES
t
STRA (IN) TUS6ADI tWIS DT PORT C (IN) QPSUA8ADI Notes: A6srArhqvtAQDP8AvuATU6AArA 1. After reading PIOC with STAF set !AAvtrAuAvvtArqtrATUS6A@B6A2A AhqAuvtuArATUS7ADIW7A2A 2. Figure shows rising edge STRA (EGA = 1) and high true STRB (INVB = 1).
IPU@T)
WDC IH
t
Q PSUA8ADIQ VUACI9T CFAUDH
Figure 11-11. Port C Input Handshake Timing Diagram
XSDU@AQPSU8G WRITE PORTCL(1)
E @
W QX9
tPWD
QPSUA8APVU PORT C (OUT)
QS@WDPVTAQPSUA96U6 PREVIOUS PORT DATA
I@XA96U6AW6GD9 NEW DATA VALID
W9@7 DEB
t
STRB (IN)
TUS7APVU
"READY" AS@69A tWAES 6@T
W9@7 DEB
t
STRA (IN) TUS6ADI
IPU@T) Notes: 1. A6srArhqvtAQDP8AvuATU6AArA After reading PIOC with STAF set !AAvtrAuAvvtArqtrATUS6A@B6A2A AhqAuvtuArATUS7ADIW7A2A 2. Figure shows rising edge STRA (EGA = 1) and high true STRB (INVB = 1).
Q PS U A8 APV UQ VU ACI9 T CFAU DH
Figure 11-12. Port C Output Handshake Timing Diagram
Technical Data 238 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Peripheral Port Timing
READ PORTCL(1) S@69AQPSU8G E @
WQX9
QPSUA8APVUA PORT C (OUT) 99SA2A 1 DDR =
tPWD
W9@7 DEB
t
AS@69A
"READY"
tWDEB 9@7
STRB (OUT) TUS7APVU tW6@T AES
TUS6ADI STRA (IN)
W Q89
tPCD
tWPCH Q8C
I@XA96U6AW6GD9 NEW DATA VALID
QPSUA8APVUA PORT C (OUT) 99SA2A DDR = 0
PG9A96U6 OLD DATA
hATUS6A68UDW@A7@APS@AQPSU8GAXSDU@
a) STRA ACTIVE BEFORE PORTCL WRITE
W Q8a PCZ
t
TUS6ADI STRA (IN)
WQ89
tPCD
WQ8C
tPCH
QPSUA8APVUA PORT C (OUT) 99SA2A DDR = 0
NEW DATA VALID I@XA96U6AW6GD9
iATUS6A68UDW@A6AU@SAQPSU8GAXSDU@ b) STRA ACTIVE AFTER PORTCL WRITE
tWPCZ Q8a
IPU@T)
Notes: A6srArhqvtAQDP8AvuATU6AArA 1. After reading PIOC with STAF set !AAvtrAuAvvtArqtrATUS6A@B6A2A AhqAuvtuArATUS7ADIW7A2A 2. Figure shows rising edge STRA (EGA = 1) and high true STRB (INVB = 1).
Figure 11-13. 3-State Variation of Output Handshake Timing Diagram (STRA Enables Output Buffer)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 239
Electrical Characteristics 11.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics
Characteristic(1) Resolution Parameter(2) Min -- -- -- -- -- -- Absolute 8 -- -- -- -- -- 2.0 MHz 3.0 MHz Unit Max Max -- -- Bits 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 1 1 1/2 1/2 LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB
Number of bits resolved by A/D converter Maximum deviation from the ideal A/D Non-linearity transfer characteristics Difference between the output of an ideal and Zero error an actual for 0 input voltage Difference between the output of an ideal and Full scale error an actual A/D for full-scale input voltage Total unadjusted Maximum sum of non-linearity, zero error, and error full-scale error Quantization Uncertainty because of converter resolution error Difference between the actual input voltage Absolute and the full-scale weighted equivalent of the accuracy binary output code, all error sources included Conversion Analog input voltage range range Maximum analog reference voltage(3) Minimum analog reference voltage(2) Minimum difference between VRH and VRL(2) Total time to perform a single A/D conversion: E clock Internal RC oscillator Conversion result never decreases with an increase in input voltage; has no missing codes Conversion result when VIn = VRL Conversion result when VIn = VRH Analog input acquisition sampling time: E clock Internal RC oscillator Input capacitance during sample PE[7:0] Input leakage on A/D pins PE[7:0] VRL, VRH
--
--
1
2
LSB
VRL VRL VSS -0.1 3 -- -- -- 00 -- -- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- 32 -- Guaranteed -- -- 12 -- 20 typical -- --
VRH
VRH
V V V V tcyc s -- Hex Hex tcyc s pF nA A
VRH VRL VR Conversion time Monotonicity Zero input reading Full scale reading Sample acquisition time Sample/hold capacitance Input leakage
VDD +0.1 VDD +0.1 VRH -- -- tcyc +32 -- -- FF -- 12 -- 400 1.0 VRH -- -- tcyc +32 -- -- FF -- 12 -- 400 1.0
1. V DD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, 750 kHz E 3.0 MHz, unless otherwise noted 2. Source impedances greater than 10 k affect accuracy adversely because of input leakage. 3. Performance verified down to 2.5 V VR, but accuracy is tested and guaranteed at VR = 5 V 10%.
Technical Data 240 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics
11.15 MC68L11E9/E20 Analog-to-Digital Converter Characteristics
Characteristic(1) Resolution Non-linearity Zero error Full scale error Total unadjusted error Parameter(2) Number of bits resolved by A/D converter Maximum deviation from the ideal A/D transfer characteristics Difference between the output of an ideal and an actual for 0 input voltage Difference between the output of an ideal and an actual A/D for full-scale input voltage Maximum sum of non-linearity, zero error, and full-scale error Min -- -- -- -- -- -- Absolute 8 -- -- -- -- -- Max -- 1 1 1 1/2 1/2 2 Unit Bits LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB
Quantization error Uncertainty because of converter resolution Difference between the actual input voltage and the full-scale weighted equivalent of the Absolute accuracy binary output code, all error sources included Conversion range VRH VRL VR Analog input voltage range Maximum analog reference voltage Minimum analog reference voltage Minimum difference between VRH and VRL Total time to perform a single analog-to-digital conversion: E clock Internal RC oscillator Conversion result never decreases with an increase in input voltage and has no missing codes
--
--
LSB
VRL VRL VSS -0.1 3.0
-- -- -- --
VRH VDD + 0.1 VRH --
V V V V
Conversion time
-- -- -- 00 -- -- -- --
32 -- Guaranteed -- -- 12 -- 20 typical
-- tcyc + 32 -- -- FF -- 12 --
tcyc s -- Hex Hex tcyc s pF
Monotonicity
Zero input reading Conversion result when VIn = VRL Full scale reading Sample acquisition time Sample/hold capacitance Input leakage Conversion result when VIn = VRH Analog input acquisition sampling time: E clock Internal RC oscillator Input capacitance during sample PE[7:0] Input leakage on A/D pins PE[7:0] VRL, VRH
-- --
-- --
400 1.0
nA A
1. VDD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, 750 kHz E 2.0 MHz, unless otherwise noted 2. Source impedances greater than 10 k affect accuracy adversely because of input leakage.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 241
Electrical Characteristics 11.16 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics
Num Characteristic(1) Frequency of operation (E-clock frequency) 1 2 Cycle time Pulse width, E low(2) PWEL = 1/2 tcyc -23 ns Pulse width, E high(2) PWEH = 1/2 tcyc -28 ns E and AS rise time E and AS fall time Address hold time(2) (3)a tAH = 1/8 tcyc -29.5 ns Non-multiplexed address valid time to E rise tAV = PWEL -(tASD + 80 ns)(2) (3)a Read data setup time Read data hold time Max = tMAD Write data delay time tDDW = 1/8 tcyc + 65.5 ns(2) (3)a Write data hold time tDHW = 1/8 tcyc -29.5 ns(2) (3)a Multiplexed address valid time to E rise tAVM = PW EL -(tASD + 90 ns)(2) (3)a Multiplexed address valid time to AS fall tASL = PWASH -70 ns(2) Multiplexed address hold time tAHL = 1/8 tcyc -29.5 ns(2) (3)b 1.0 MHz Symbol Min fo tcyc PWEL dc 1000 477 Max 1.0 -- -- Min dc 500 227 Max 2.0 -- -- Min dc 333 146 Max 3.0 -- -- MHz ns ns 2.0 MHz 3.0 MHz Unit
3 4a 4b 9
PWEH tr tf tAH
472 -- -- 95.5
-- 20 20 --
222 -- -- 33
-- 20 20 --
141 -- -- 26
-- 20 15 --
ns ns ns ns
12 17 18
tAV tDSR tDHR tDDW
281.5 30 0
-- -- 145.5
94 30 0
-- -- 83
54 30 0
-- -- 51
ns ns ns
19
--
190.5
--
128
71
ns
21
tDHW
95.5
--
33
--
26
--
ns
22
tAVM
271.5
--
84
--
54
--
ns
24
tASL
151
--
26
--
13
--
ns
25
tAHL
95.5
--
33
--
31
--
ns
Continued
Technical Data 242 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics
Num
Characteristic(1) Delay time, E to AS rise tASD = 1/8 tcyc -9.5 ns(2) (3)a Pulse width, AS high PWASH = 1/4 tcyc -29 ns(2) Delay time, AS to E rise tASED = 1/8 tcyc -9.5 ns(2) (3)b MPU address access time(3)a tACCA = tcyc -(PWEL-tAVM) -tDSR-tf MPU access time tACCE = PW EH -tDSR Multiplexed address delay (Previous cycle MPU read) tMAD = tASD + 30 ns(2) (3)a
1.0 MHz Symbol Min tASD 115.5 Max --
2.0 MHz Min 53 Max --
3.0 MHz Unit Min 31 Max -- ns
26
27
PWASH
221
--
96
--
63
--
ns
28
tASED
115.5
--
53
--
31
--
ns
29
tACCA tACCE
744.5
--
307
--
196
--
ns
35
--
442
--
192
111
ns
36
tMAD
145.5
--
83
--
51
--
ns
1. V DD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, all timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted 2. Formula only for dc to 2 MHz 3. Input clocks with duty cycles other than 50% affect bus performance. Timing parameters affected by input clock duty cycle are identified by (a) and (b). To recalculate the approximate bus timing values, substitute the following expressions in place of 1/8 tcyc in the above formulas, where applicable: (a) (1-dc) x 1/4 tcyc (b) dc x 1/4 tcyc Where: dc is the decimal value of duty cycle percentage (high time)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 243
Electrical Characteristics 11.17 MC68L11E9/E20 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics
Num Characteristic(1) Frequency of operation (E-clock frequency) 1 2 3 4a 4b 9 12 17 18 19 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 35 36 Cycle time Pulse width, E low, PWEL = 1/2 tcyc -25 ns Pulse width, E high, PWEH = 1/2 tcyc -30 ns E and AS rise time E and AS fall time Address hold time(2) (2)a, tAH = 1/8 tcyc -30 ns Non-multiplexed address valid time to E rise tAV = PW EL -(tASD + 80 ns)(2)a Read data setup time Read data hold time , max = tMAD Write data delay time, tDDW = 1/8 tcyc + 70 ns(2)a Write data hold time, tDHW = 1/8 tcyc -30 ns(2)a Multiplexed address valid time to E rise tAVM = PWEL -(tASD + 90 ns)(2)a Multiplexed address valid time to AS fall tASL = PWASH -70 ns Multiplexed address hold time, tAHL = 1/8 tcyc -30 ns(2)b Delay time, E to AS rise, tASD = 1/8 tcyc -5 ns(2)a Pulse width, AS high, PWASH = 1/4 tcyc -30 ns Delay time, AS to E rise, tASED = 1/8 tcyc -5 MPU address access time(3)a tACCA = tcyc -(PWEL-tAVM) -tDSR-tf MPU access time, tACCE = PWEH -tDSR Multiplexed address delay (Previous cycle MPU read) tMAD = tASD + 30 ns(2)a ns(2)b Symbol fo tcyc PWEL PW EH tr tf tAH tAV tDSR tDHR tDDW tDHW tAVM tASL tAHL tASD PWASH tASED tACCA tACCE tMAD 1.0 MHz Min dc 1000 475 470 -- -- 95 275 30 0 -- 95 268 150 95 120 220 120 735 -- 150 Max 1.0 -- -- -- 25 25 -- -- -- 150 195 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 440 -- 2.0 MHz Min dc 500 225 220 -- -- 33 88 30 0 -- 33 78 25 33 58 95 58 298 -- 88 Max 2.0 -- -- -- 25 25 -- -- -- 88 133 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 190 -- Unit MHz ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
1. V DD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to T H, all timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted 2. Input clocks with duty cycles other than 50% affect bus performance. Timing parameters affected by input clock duty cycle are identified by (a) and (b). To recalculate the approximate bus timing values, substitute the following expressions in place of 1/8 tcyc in the above formulas, where applicable: (a) (1-dc) x 1/4 tcyc (b) dc x 1/4 tcyc Where: dc is the decimal value of duty cycle percentage (high time).
Technical Data 244 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Expansion Bus Timing Characteristics
1
!
2
"
3
#7
4B
@
E
#6
4A
12 !
SXA699S@TTA R/W, ADDRESS IPIHVY NON-MULTIPLEXED
(
9
!! "%
22
!(
"$
35
17 & 18 '
96U6
36
699S@TT ADDRESS
29 DATA
S@69
READ
699S@TT96U6A HVGUDQG@Y@9
ADDRESS/DATA MULTIPLEXED
XSDU@
19 ( WRITE
699S@TT ADDRESS
!
21
96U6
DATA
!$
25
#7
#6
4A
!#
24
4B
6T AS
!%
26
!&
27
!'
28
IPU@)AHrhrrAvAuAhrA!EAhqA&EAsAW Note: Measurement points shown are 20% and 70% of V DD. 99
H VYA7VTAUDH
Figure 11-14. Multiplexed Expansion Bus Timing Diagram
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 245
Electrical Characteristics 11.18 Serial Peripheral Interface Timing Characteristics
Num Characteristic(1) Frequency of operation E clock E-clock period Operating frequency Master Slave 1 Cycle time Master Slave Enable lead time(2) Slave Enable lag time(2) Slave Clock (SCK) high time Master Slave Clock (SCK) low time Master Slave Data setup time (inputs) Master Slave Data hold time (inputs) Master Slave Slave access time CPHA = 0 CPHA = 1 Disable time (hold time to high-impedance state) Slave Data valid(3) (after enable edge) Data hold time (outputs) (after enable edge) Symbol fo tcyc fop(m) fop(s) tcyc(m) tcyc(s) tlead(s) tlag(s) E9 Min dc 333 fo/32 dc 2 1 1 1 Max 3.0 -- fo/2 fo 32 -- -- -- Min dc 333 fo/128 dc 2 1 1 1 E20 Max 3.0 -- fo/2 fo 128 -- -- -- Unit MHz ns MHz
tcyc
2 3
tcyc tcyc
4
tcyc -25 tw(SCKH)m tw(SCKH)s 1/2 tcyc -25 tw(SCKL)m tw(SCKL)s tsu(m) tsu(s) th(m) th(s) ta tcyc -25 1/2 tcyc -25 30 30 30 30 0 0 -- -- 0
16 tcyc -- 16 tcyc -- -- -- -- -- 40 40 50 50 --
tcyc -25 1/2 tcyc -25 tcyc -25 1/2 tcyc -25 30 30 30 30 0 0 -- -- 0
64 tcyc -- 64 tcyc -- -- -- -- -- 40 40 50 50 --
ns
5
ns
6
ns
7
ns
8
ns
9 10 11
tdis tv tho
ns ns ns
1. VDD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, all timing is shown with respect to 20% V DD and 70% VDD, unless otherwise noted 2. Time to data active from high-impedance state 3. Assumes 200 pF load on SCK, MOSI, and MISO pins
Technical Data 246 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Serial Peirpheral Interface Characteristics
11.19 MC68L11E9/E20 Serial Peirpheral Interface Characteristics
Num Characteristic(1) Frequency of operation E clock E-clock period Operating frequency Master Slave 1 Cycle time Master Slave Enable lead time(2) Slave Enable lag time(2) Slave Clock (SCK) high time Master Slave Clock (SCK) low time Master Slave Data setup time (inputs) Master Slave Data hold time (inputs) Master Slave Slave access time CPHA = 0 CPHA = 1 Disable time (hold time to high-impedance state) Slave Data valid(3) (after enable edge) Data hold time (outputs) (after enable edge) Symbol fo tcyc fop(m) fop(s) tcyc(m) tcyc(s) tlead(s) tlag(s) E9 Min dc 500 fo/32 dc 2 1 1 1 Max 2.0 -- fo/2 fo 32 -- -- -- Min dc 500 fo/128 dc 2 1 1 1 E20 Max 2.0 -- fo/2 fo 128 -- -- -- Unit MHz ns MHz
tcyc
2 3
tcyc tcyc
4
tcyc -30 tw(SCKH)m tw(SCKH)s 1/2 tcyc -30 tw(SCKL)m tw(SCKL)s tsu(m) tsu(s) th(m) th(s) ta tcyc -30 1/2 tcyc -30 40 40 40 40 0 0 -- -- 0
16 tcyc -- 16 tcyc -- -- -- -- -- 50 50 60 60 --
tcyc -30 1/2 tcyc -30 tcyc -30 1/2 tcyc -30 40 40 40 40 0 0 -- -- 0
64 tcyc -- 64 tcyc -- -- -- -- -- 50 50 60 60 --
ns
5
ns
6
ns
7
ns
8
ns
9 10 11
tdis tv tho
ns ns ns
1. VDD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH, all timing is shown with respect to 20% VDD and 70% V DD, unless otherwise noted 2. Time to data active from high-impedance state 3. Assumes 100 pF load on SCK, MOSI, and MISO pins
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 247
Electrical Characteristics
SS INPUT
SS IS HELD HIGH ON MASTER.
1 SCK CPOL = 0 INPUT SCK CPOL = 1 OUTPUT 5 SEE NOTE 4 5 SEE NOTE 4 6 MISO INPUT MSB IN 7 BIT 6 . . . 1 11 MOSI OUTPUT MASTER MSB OUT BIT 6 . . . 1 10 MASTER LSB OUT LSB IN 11 (REF)
Note: This first clock edge is generated internally but is not seen at the SCK pin.
A) SPI Master Timing (CPHA = 0)
SS INPUT
SS IS HELD HIGH ON MASTER. 1
SCK CPOL = 0 INPUT SCK CPOL = 1 OUTPUT
5 SEE NOTE 4 5 SEE NOTE 4 6 7 LSB IN 10 BIT 6 . . . 1 MASTER LSB OUT 11 (REF)
MISO INPUT
MSB IN 10 (REF)
BIT 6 . . . 1 11
MOSI OUTPUT
MASTER MSB OUT
Note: This first clock edge is generated internally but is not seen at the SCK pin.
B) SPI Master Timing (CPHA = 1)
Figure 11-15. SPI Timing Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
Technical Data 248 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics MC68L11E9/E20 Serial Peirpheral Interface Characteristics
SS INPUT 1 SCK CPOL = 0 INPUT 2 SCK CPOL = 1 INPUT 8 MISO OUTPUT 5 4 5 3
4 SEE NOTE 11 LSB IN
9
SLAVE 6
MSB OUT 7
BIT 6 . . . 1 10
SLAVE LSB OUT 11
MOSI INPUT
MSB IN
BIT 6 . . . 1
Note: Not defined but normally MSB of character just received
A) SPI Slave Timing (CPHA = 0)
SS INPUT 1 SCK CPOL = 0 INPUT 2 SCK CPOL = 1 INPUT 8 MISO OUTPUT SEE NOTE 10 4 BIT 6 . . . 1 10 6 MOSI INPUT MSB IN 7 BIT 6 . . . 1 LSB IN 11 5 4 5 3
9 SLAVE LSB OUT
SLAVE
MSB OUT
Note: Not defined but normally LSB of character previously transmitted
B) SPI Slave Timing (CPHA = 1)
Figure 11-15. SPI Timing Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 249
Electrical Characteristics 11.20 EEPROM Characteristics
Characteristic(1) Programming time(2) < 1.0 MHz, RCO enabled 1.0 to 2.0 MHz, RCO disabled 2.0 MHz (or anytime RCO enabled) Erase time(2) Byte, row, and bulk Write/erase endurance Data retention Temperature Range -40 to 85C 10 20 10 10 10,000 10 -40 to 105C -40 to 125C Unit
15 20 Must use RCO Must use RCO 15 20 10 10,000 10 10 10,000 10
ms
ms Cycles Years
1. V DD = 5.0 Vdc 10%, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH 2. The RC oscillator (RCO) must be enabled (by setting the CSEL bit in the OPTION register) for EEPROM programming and erasure when the E-clock frequency is below 1.0 MHz.
11.21 MC68L11E9/E20 EEPROM Characteristics
Characteristic(1) Programming time(2) 3 V, E 2.0 MHz, RCO enabled 5 V, E 2.0 MHz, RCO enabled Erase time(2) (byte, row, and bulk) 3 V, E 2.0 MHz, RCO enabled 5 V, E 2.0 MHz, RCO enabled Write/erase endurance Data retention Temperature Range -20 to 70C 25 10 25 10 10,000 10 Unit
ms
ms Cycles Years
1. VDD = 3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc, VSS = 0 Vdc, TA = TL to TH 2. The RC oscillator (RCO) must be enabled (by setting the CSEL bit in the OPTION register) for EEPROM programming and erasure.
Technical Data 250 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Electrical Characteristics EPROM Characteristics
11.22 EPROM Characteristics
Characteristics(1) Programming voltage Programming current(2) Programming time Symbol VPPE IPPE tEPROG Min 11.75 -- 2 Typ 12.25 3 2 Max 12.75 10 4 Unit V mA ms
1. V DD = 5.0 Vdc 10% 2. Typically, a 1-k series resistor is sufficient to limit the programming current for the MC68HC711E9. A 100- series resistor is sufficient to limit the programming current for the MC68HC711E20.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 251
Electrical Characteristics
Technical Data 252 Electrical Characteristics
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 12. Mechanical Data
12.1 Contents
12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 52-Pin Plastic-Leaded Chip Carrier (Case 778) . . . . . . . . . . . 254 52-Pin Windowed Ceramic-Leaded Chip Carrier (Case 778B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 64-Pin Quad Flat Pack (Case 840C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 52-Pin Thin Quad Flat Pack (Case 848D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 56-Pin Dual in-Line Package (Case #859) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 48-Pin Plastic DIP (Case 767) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12.2 Introduction
The M68HC11E series microcontrollers are available in: * * * * * * 52-pin plastic-leaded chip carrier (PLCC) 52-pin windowed ceramic-leaded chip carrier (CLCC) 64-pin quad flat pack (QFP) 52-pin thin quad flat pack (TQFP) 56-pin shrink dual in-line package with .070-inch lead spacing (SDIP) 48-pin plastic DIP (.100-inch lead spacing), MC68HC811E2 only
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Mechanical Data
Technical Data 253
Mechanical Data 12.3 52-Pin Plastic-Leaded Chip Carrier (Case 778)
B -N- Y BRK D Z -L- -M-
0.007 (0.18) U
M
T L-M
M
S
N
S S
0.007 (0.18)
T L-M
N
S
W D
52 1
X V VIEW D-D 0.007 (0.18) 0.007 (0.18)
M
G1 0.010 (0.25)
S
T L-M
S
N
S
A Z R
T L-M T L-M
S
N N
S
M
S
S
E C G G1 0.010 (0.25)
S
J VIEW S T L-M N
0.004 (0.100) -T- SEATING
PLANE
S
S
H K1
0.007 (0.18)
M
T L-M
S
N
S
NOTES: 1. DATUMS -L-, -M-, AND -N- DETERMINED WHERE TOP OF LEAD SHOULDER EXITS PLASTIC BODY AT MOLD PARTING LINE. 2. DIMENSION G1, TRUE POSITION TO BE MEASURED AT DATUM -T-, SEATING PLANE. 3. DIMENSIONS R AND U DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. ALLOWABLE MOLD FLASH IS 0.010 (0.250) PER SIDE. 4. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 5. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: INCH. 6. THE PACKAGE TOP MAY BE SMALLER THAN THE PACKAGE BOTTOM BY UP TO 0.012 (0.300). DIMENSIONS R AND U ARE DETERMINED AT THE OUTERMOST EXTREMES OF THE PLASTIC BODY EXCLUSIVE OF MOLD FLASH, TIE BAR BURRS, GATE BURRS AND INTERLEAD FLASH, BUT INCLUDING ANY MISMATCH BETWEEN THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF THE PLASTIC BODY. 7. DIMENSION H DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR PROTRUSION OR INTRUSION. THE DAMBAR PROTRUSION(S) SHALL NOT CAUSE THE H DIMENSION TO BE GREATER THAN 0.037 (0.940). THE DAMBAR INTRUSION(S) SHALL NOT CAUSE THE H DIMENSION TO BE SMALLER THAN 0.025 (0.635). INCHES MIN MAX 0.785 0.795 0.785 0.795 0.165 0.180 0.090 0.110 0.013 0.019 0.050 BSC 0.026 0.032 0.020 --- 0.025 --- 0.750 0.756 0.750 0.756 0.042 0.048 0.042 0.048 0.042 0.056 --- 0.020 2_ 10 _ 0.710 0.730 0.040 --- MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 19.94 20.19 19.94 20.19 4.20 4.57 2.29 2.79 0.33 0.48 1.27 BSC 0.66 0.81 0.51 --- 0.64 --- 19.05 19.20 19.05 19.20 1.07 1.21 1.07 1.21 1.07 1.42 --- 0.50 2_ 10 _ 18.04 18.54 1.02 ---
K VIEW S
F
0.007 (0.18)
M
T L-M
S
N
S
DIM A B C E F G H J K R U V W X Y Z G1 K1
Technical Data 254 Mechanical Data
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Mechanical Data 52-Pin Windowed Ceramic-Leaded Chip Carrier (Case 778B)
12.4 52-Pin Windowed Ceramic-Leaded Chip Carrier (Case 778B)
-AR 0.51 (0.020)
M NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: INCH. 3. DIMENSION R AND N DO NOT INCLUDE GLASS PROTRUSION. GLASS PROTRUSION TO BE 0.25 (0.010) MAXIMUM. 4. ALL DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES INCLUDE LEAD TRIM OFFSET AND LEAD FINISH.
TA
S
B
S
N
-B-
0.51 (0.020) F
M
TA
S
B
S
DIM A B C D F G H J K N R S
INCHES MIN MAX 0.785 0.795 0.785 0.795 0.165 0.200 0.017 0.021 0.026 0.032 0.050 BSC 0.090 0.130 0.006 0.010 0.035 0.045 0.735 0.756 0.735 0.756 0.690 0.730
MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 19.94 20.19 19.94 20.19 4.20 5.08 0.44 0.53 0.67 0.81 1.27 BSC 2.29 3.30 0.16 0.25 0.89 1.14 18.67 19.20 18.67 19.20 17.53 18.54
K H
C J
0.15 (0.006) G D S
52 PL
-T-
SEATING PLANE M
0.18 (0.007)
TA
S
B
S
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Mechanical Data
Technical Data 255
Mechanical Data 12.5 64-Pin Quad Flat Pack (Case 840C)
L
48 49 33 32 S S
B
B
-A-, -B-, -D-
D
-A-
S
-B-
H A-B
C A-B
S
D
P DETAIL A F J
BASE METAL
0.05 (0.002) D
M
L
B
0.20 (0.008)
64 1 16
17
0.20 (0.008) -D- A 0.20 (0.008)
M
H A-B
S
D
S
0.05 (0.002) A-B S 0.20 (0.008)
M
C A-B
S
D
S
CE
-H-
DATUM PLANE
H
G DETAIL C U M T
0.10 (0.004) -C- SEATING PLANE
NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: MILLIMETER. 3. DATUM PLANE -H- IS LOCATED AT BOTTOM OF LEAD AND IS COINCIDENT WITH THE LEAD WHERE THE LEAD EXITS THE PLASTIC BODY AT THE BOTTOM OF THE PARTING LINE. 4. DATUMS A-B AND -D- TO BE DETERMINED AT DATUM PLANE -H-. 5. DIMENSIONS S AND V TO BE DETERMINED AT SEATING PLANE -C-. 6. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE PROTRUSION IS 0.25 (0.010) PER SIDE. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO INCLUDE MOLD MISMATCH AND ARE DETERMINED AT DATUM PLANE -H-. 7. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR PROTRUSION. DAMBAR PROTRUSION SHALL NOT CAUSE THE D DIMENSION TO EXCEED 0.53 (0.021). DAMBAR CANNOT BE LOCATED ON THE LOWER RADIUS OR THE FOOT. 8. DIMENSION K IS TO BE MEASURED FROM THE THEORETICAL INTERSECTION OF LEAD FOOT AND LEG CENTERLINES. DIM A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V X MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 13.90 14.10 13.90 14.10 2.07 2.46 0.30 0.45 2.00 2.40 0.30 --- 0.80 BSC 0.067 0.250 0.130 0.230 0.50 0.66 12.00 REF 5_ 10_ 0.130 0.170 0.40 BSC 2_ 8_ 0.13 0.30 16.20 16.60 0.20 REF 0_ --- 16.20 16.60 1.10 1.30 INCHES MIN MAX 0.547 0.555 0.547 0.555 0.081 0.097 0.012 0.018 0.079 0.094 0.012 --- 0.031 BSC 0.003 0.010 0.005 0.090 0.020 0.026 0.472 REF 5_ 10_ 0.005 0.007 0.016 BSC 2_ 8_ 0.005 0.012 0.638 0.654 0.008 REF 0 _ --- 0.638 0.654 0.043 0.051
R
Q
SEATING PLANE
K X M DETAIL C
Technical Data 256 Mechanical Data
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
CCCC CCCC EEEE EEEE CCCC
D
M
DETAIL A
0.20 (0.008)
M
V
N
C A-B
S
D
S
SECTION B-B
Mechanical Data 52-Pin Thin Quad Flat Pack (Case 848D)
12.6 52-Pin Thin Quad Flat Pack (Case 848D)
4X
4X TIPS
0.20 (0.008) H L-M N
0.20 (0.008) T L-M N -X- X=L, M, N
52 1
40 39
C L AB G
3X VIEW
Y -M- B V AB VIEW Y F
BASE METAL
-L-
B1
13 14 26 27
V1
PLATING
J
A1 S1 A S
-N-
0.13 (0.005)
SECTION AB-AB
ROTATED 90_ CLOCKWISE
C -H- -T-
SEATING PLANE
4X
2 0.10 (0.004) T
4X
3 VIEW AA
0.05 (0.002)
S
NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: MILLIMETER. 3. DATUM PLANE -H- IS LOCATED AT BOTTOM OF LEAD AND IS COINCIDENT WITH THE LEAD WHERE THE LEAD EXITS THE PLASTIC BODY AT THE BOTTOM OF THE PARTING LINE. 4. DATUMS -L-, -M- AND -N- TO BE DETERMINED AT DATUM PLANE -H-. 5. DIMENSIONS S AND V TO BE DETERMINED AT SEATING PLANE -T-. 6. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD PROTRUSION. ALLOWABLE PROTRUSION IS 0.25 (0.010) PER SIDE. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO INCLUDE MOLD MISMATCH AND ARE DETERMINED AT DATUM PLANE -H-. 7. DIMENSION D DOES NOT INCLUDE DAMBAR PROTRUSION. DAMBAR PROTRUSION SHALL NOT CAUSE THE LEAD WIDTH TO EXCEED 0.46 (0.018). MINIMUM SPACE BETWEEN PROTRUSION AND ADJACENT LEAD OR PROTRUSION 0.07 (0.003). MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 10.00 BSC 5.00 BSC 10.00 BSC 5.00 BSC --- 1.70 0.05 0.20 1.30 1.50 0.20 0.40 0.45 0.75 0.22 0.35 0.65 BSC 0.07 0.20 0.50 REF 0.08 0.20 12.00 BSC 6.00 BSC 0.09 0.16 12.00 BSC 6.00 BSC 0.20 REF 1.00 REF 0_ 7_ --- 0_ 12 _ REF 5_ 13 _ INCHES MIN MAX 0.394 BSC 0.197 BSC 0.394 BSC 0.197 BSC --- 0.067 0.002 0.008 0.051 0.059 0.008 0.016 0.018 0.030 0.009 0.014 0.026 BSC 0.003 0.008 0.020 REF 0.003 0.008 0.472 BSC 0.236 BSC 0.004 0.006 0.472 BSC 0.236 BSC 0.008 REF 0.039 REF 0_ 7_ 0_ --- 12 _ REF 5_ 13 _
W 1 C2
2XR
R1
0.25 (0.010)
GAGE PLANE
K C1 E Z VIEW AA
DIM A A1 B B1 C C1 C2 D E F G J K R1 S S1 U V V1 W Z 1 2 3
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Mechanical Data
CCCC EEEE CCCC EEEE
M
U
D T L-M
S
N
S
Technical Data 257
Mechanical Data 12.7 56-Pin Dual in-Line Package (Case #859)
-A-
NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: INCH. 3. DIMENSION L TO CENTER OF LEAD WHEN FORMED PARALLEL. 4. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. MAXIMUM MOLD FLASH 0.25 (0.010) INCHES MIN MAX 2.035 2.065 0.540 0.560 0.155 0.200 0.014 0.022 0.035 BSC 0.032 0.046 0.070 BSC 0.300 BSC 0.008 0.015 0.115 0.135 0.600 BSC 0_ 15 _ 0.020 0.040 MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 51.69 52.45 13.72 14.22 3.94 5.08 0.36 0.56 0.89 BSC 0.81 1.17 1.778 BSC 7.62 BSC 0.20 0.38 2.92 3.43 15.24 BSC 0_ 15 _ 0.51 1.02
56
29
-B-
1 28
L C H
-T-
SEATING PLANE
K F D 56 PL 0.25 (0.010) E
M
G
N J
56 PL M
M
DIM A B C D E F G H J K L M N
TA
S
0.25 (0.010)
TB
S
Technical Data 258 Mechanical Data
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Mechanical Data 48-Pin Plastic DIP (Case 767)
12.8 48-Pin Plastic DIP (Case 767)
NOTE:
The MC68HC811E2 is the only member of the E series that is offered in a 48-pin plastic dual in-line package.
NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: INCH. 3. DIMENSION L TO CENTER OF LEAD WHEN FORMED PARALLEL. 4. DIMENSIONS A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. MAXIMUM MOLD FLASH 0.25 (0.010).
-A48 25
-B1 24
TIP TAPER
DETAIL X
C
L
-TSEATING PLANE
K DETAIL X F D 32 PL 0.51 (0.020) G
M
N J
48 PL M
M 48 PL
DIM A B C D F G H J K L M N
INCHES MIN MAX 2.415 2.445 0.540 0.560 0.155 0.200 0.014 0.022 0.040 0.060 0.100 BSC 0.070 BSC 0.008 0.015 0.115 0.150 0.600 BSC 0x 15x 0.020 0.040
MILLIMETERS MIN MAX 61.34 62.10 13.72 14.22 3.94 5.08 0.36 0.55 1.02 1.52 2.54 BSC 1.79 BSC 0.20 0.38 2.92 3.81 15.24 BSC 0x 15x 0.51 1.01
TA
S
0.25 (0.010)
TB
S
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Mechanical Data
Technical Data 259
Mechanical Data
Technical Data 260 Mechanical Data
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Section 13. Ordering Information
13.1 Contents
13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Standard Device Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Custom ROM Device Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Extended Voltage Device Ordering Information (3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
13.2 Introduction
This section provides ordering information for the E-series devices. Information is grouped by: * * * Standard devices Custom ROM devices Extended voltage devices
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Ordering Information
Technical Data 261
Ordering Information 13.3 Standard Device Ordering Information
Description CONFIG Temperature Frequency MC Order Number
52-pin plastic leaded chip carrier (PLCC) 2 MHz BUFFALO ROM $0F -40C to +85C 3 MHz 2 MHz -40C to +85C 3 MHz No ROM $0D -40C to +105C -40C to +125C -40C to +85C 3 MHz No ROM, no EEPROM $0C -40C to +105C -40C to +125C -40C to +85C 3 MHz OTPROM $0F -40C to +105C -40C to +125C OTPROM, enhanced security feature $0F -40C to +85C 0C to +70C -40C to +85C 20 Kbytes OTPROM $0F -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 0C to +70C -40C to +85C No ROM, 2 Kbytes EEPROM $FF -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC811E2VFN2 MC68HC811E2MFN2 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC711E20CFN3 MC68HC711E20VFN2 MC68HC711E20MFN2 MC68HC811E2FN2 MC68HC811E2CFN2 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC711E9VFN2 MC68HC711E9MFN2 MC68S711E9CFN2 MC68HC711E20FN3 MC68HC711E20CFN2 MC68HC711E9CFN3 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E0VFN2 MC68HC11E0MFN2 MC68HC711E9CFN2 MC68HC11E0CFN3 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E1VFN2 MC68HC11E1MFN2 MC68HC11E0CFN2 MC68HC11E1CFN3 MC68HC11E9BCFN3 MC68HC11E1CFN2 MC68HC11E9BCFN2
Technical Data 262 Ordering Information
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Ordering Information Standard Device Ordering Information
Description 64-pin quad flat pack (QFP)
CONFIG
Temperature
Frequency
MC Order Number
2 MHz BUFFALO ROM $0F -40C to +85C 3 MHz 2 MHz -40C to +85C No ROM $0D -40C to +105C -40C to +85C No ROM, no EEPROM $0C -40C to +105C 0C to +70C -40C to +85C 20 Kbytes OTPROM $0F -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 52-pin thin quad flat pack (TQFP) 2 MHz BUFFALO ROM $0F -40C to +85C 3 MHz 52-pin windowed ceramic leaded chip carrier (CLCC) 2 MHz -40C to +85C 3 MHz EPROM $0F -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 0C o +70C -40C to +85C 20 Kbytes EPROM $0F -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz
MC68HC11E9BCFU2 MC68HC11E9BCFU3 MC68HC11E1CFU2 MC68HC11E1CFU3 MC68HC11E1VFU2 MC68HC11E0CFU2 MC68HC11E0VFU2 MC68HC711E20FU3 MC68HC711E20CFU2 MC68HC711E20CFU3 MC68HC711E20VFU2 MC68HC711E20MFU2
MC68HC11E9BCPB2 MC68HC11E9BCPB3
MC68HC711E9CFS2 MC68HC711E9CFS3 MC68HC711E9VFS2 MC68HC711E9VFS2 MC68HC711E20FS3 MC68HC711E20CFS2 MC68HC711E20CFS3 MC68HC711E20VFS2 MC68HC711E20MFS2
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Ordering Information
Technical Data 263
Ordering Information
Description
CONFIG
Temperature
Frequency
MC Order Number
48-pin dual in-line package (DIP) -- MC68HC811E2 only 0C to +70C -40C to +85C No ROM, 2 Kbytes EEPROM $FF -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 56-pin dual in-line package with 0.70-inch lead spacing (SDIP) 2 MHz BUFFALO ROM $0F -40C to +85C 3 MHz 2 MHz -40C to +85C 3 MHz No ROM $0D -40C to +105C -40C to +125C -40C to +85C 3 MHz No ROM, no EEPROM $0C -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E0VB2 MC68HC11E0MB2 MC68HC11E0CB3 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E1VB2 MC68HC11E1MB2 MC68HC11E0CB2 MC68HC11E1CB3 MC68HC11E9BCB3 MC68HC11E1CB2 MC68HC11E9BCB2 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC811E2VP2 MC68HC811E2MP2 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC811E2P2 MC68HC811E2CP2
Technical Data 264 Ordering Information
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Ordering Information Custom ROM Device Ordering Information
13.4 Custom ROM Device Ordering Information
Description Temperature Frequency MC Order Number
52-pin plastic leaded chip carrier (PLCC) 0C to +70C -40C to +85C Custom ROM -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 0C to +70C -40C to +85C 20 Kbytes custom ROM -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 64-pin quad flat pack (QFP) 0C to +70C -40C to +85C Custom ROM -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 64-pin quad flat pack (continued) 0C to +70C -40C to +85C 20 Kbytes Custom ROM -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E20CFU3 MC68HC11E20VFU2 MC68HC11E20MFU2 3 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E20FU3 MC68HC11E20CFU2 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9CFU3 MC68HC11E9VFU2 MC68HC11E9MFU2 3 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9FU3 MC68HC11E9CFU2 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E20CFN3 MC68HC11E20VFN2 MC68HC11E20MFN2 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9CFN3 MC68HC11E9VFN2 MC68HC11E9MFN2 MC68HC11E20FN3 MC68HC11E20CFN2 3 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9FN3 MC68HC11E9CFN2
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Ordering Information
Technical Data 265
Ordering Information
Description
Temperature
Frequency
MC Order Number
52-pin thin quad flat pack (10 mm x 10 mm) 0C to +70C -40C to +85C Custom ROM -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 56-pin dual in-line package with 0.70-inch lead spacing (SDIP) 0C to +70C -40C to +85C Custom ROM -40C to +105C -40C to +125C 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9CB3 MC68HC11E9VB2 MC68HC11E9MB2 3 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9B3 MC68HC11E9CB2 3 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9CPB3 MC68HC11E9VPB2 MC68HC11E9MPB2 3 MHz 2 MHz MC68HC11E9PB3 MC68HC11E9CPB2
Technical Data 266 Ordering Information
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Ordering Information Extended Voltage Device Ordering Information (3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc)
13.5 Extended Voltage Device Ordering Information (3.0 Vdc to 5.5 Vdc)
Description Temperature Frequency MC Order Number
52-pin plastic leaded chip carrier (PLCC) Custom ROM No ROM No ROM, no EEPROM 64-pin quad flat pack (QFP) Custom ROM No ROM No ROM, no EEPROM 52-pin thin quad flat pack (10 mm x 10 mm) Custom ROM No ROM No ROM, no EEPROM 56-pin dual in-line package with 0.70-inch lead spacing (SDIP) Custom ROM No ROM No ROM, no EEPROM -20C to +70C 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68L11E9B2 MC68L11E1B2 MC68L11E0B2 -20C to +70C 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68L11E9PB2 MC68L11E1PB2 MC68L11E0PB2 -20C to +70C 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68L11E9FU2 MC68L11E20FU2 MC68L11E1FU2 MC68L11E0FU2 -20C to +70C 2 MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz MC68L11E9FN2 MC68L11E20FN2 MC68L11E1FN2 MC68L11E0FN2
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Ordering Information
Technical Data 267
Ordering Information
Technical Data 268 Ordering Information
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Appendix A. Development Support
A.1 Contents
A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Motorola M68HC11 E-Series Development Tools . . . . . . . . .270 EVS -- Evaluation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Motorola Modular Development System (MMDS11) . . . . . . . 271 SPGMR11 -- Serial Programmer for M68HC11 MCUs . . . . .273
A.2 Introduction
This section provides information on the development support offered for the E-series devices.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Development Support
Technical Data 269
Development Support A.3 Motorola M68HC11 E-Series Development Tools
Device Package 52 FN MC68HC11E9 MC68HC711E9 52 PB 56 B 64 FU MC68HC11E20 MC68HC711E20 MC68HC811E2 52 FN 64 FU 48 P 52 FN Emulation Module(1) (2) M68EM11E20 M68EM11E20 M68EM11E20 M68EM11E20 M68EM11E20 M68EM11E20 M68EM11E20 M68EM11E20 Flex Cable(1) (2) M68CBL11C M68CBL11C M68CBL11B M68CBL11C M68CBL11C M68CBL11C M68CBL11B M68CBL11C MMDS11 Target Head(1) (2) M68TC11E20FN52 M68TC11E20PB52 M68TC11E20B56 M68TC11E20FU64 M68TC11E20FN52 M68TC11E20FU64 M68TB11E20P48 M68TC11E20FN52 SPGMR Programming Adapter(3) M68PA11E20FN52 M68PA11E20PB52 M68PA11E20B56 M68PA11E20FU64 M68PA11E20FN52 M68PA11E20FU64 M68PA11A8P48 M68PA11E20FN52
1. Each MMDS11 system consists of a system console (M68MMDS11), an emulation module, a flex cable, and a target head. 2. A complete EVS consists of a platform board (M68HC11PFB), an emulation module, a flex cable, and a target head. 3. Each SPGMR system consists of a universal serial programmer (M68SPGMR11) and a programming adapter. It can be used alone or in conjunction with the MMDS11.
A.4 EVS -- Evaluation System
The EVS is an economical tool for designing, debugging, and evaluating target systems based on the M68HC11. EVS features include: * * * * Monitor/debugger firmware One-line assembler/disassembler Host computer download capability Dual memory maps: - 64-Kbyte monitor map that includes 16 Kbytes of monitor EPROM - M68HC11 E-series user map that includes 64 Kbytes of emulation RAM * * * MCU extension input/output (I/O) port for single-chip, expanded, and special-test operation modes RS-232C terminal and host I/O ports Logic analyzer connector
Technical Data 270 Development Support
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Development Support Motorola Modular Development System (MMDS11)
A.5 Motorola Modular Development System (MMDS11)
The M68MMDS11 Motorola modular development system (MMDS11) is an emulator system for developing embedded systems based on an M68HC11 microcontroller unit (MCU). The MMDS11 provides a bus state analyzer (BSA) and real-time memory windows. The unit's integrated development environment includes an editor, an assembler, user interface, and source-level debug. These features significantly reduce the time necessary to develop and debug an embedded MCU system. The unit's compact size requires a minimum of desk space. The MMDS11 is one component of Motorola's modular approach to MCU-based product development. This modular approach allows easy configuration of the MMDS11 to fit a wide range of requirements. It also reduces development system cost by allowing the user to purchase only the modular components necessary to support the particular MCU derivative. MMDS11 features include: * * Real-time, non-intrusive, in-circuit emulation at the MCU's operating frequency Real-time bus state analyzer - 8 K x 64 real-time trace buffer - Display of real-time trace data as raw data, disassembled instructions, raw data and disassembled instructions, or assembly-language source code - Four hardware triggers for commencing trace and to provide breakpoints - Nine triggering modes - As many as 8190 pre- or post-trigger points for trace data - 16 general-purpose logic clips, four of which can be used to trigger the bus state analyzer sequencer - 16-bit time tag or an optional 24-bit time tag that reduces the logic clips traced from 16 to eight * Four data breakpoints (hardware breakpoints)
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Development Support
Technical Data 271
Development Support
* Hardware instruction breakpoints over either the 64-Kbyte M68HC11 memory map or over a 1-Mbyte bank switched memory map 32 real-time variables, nine of which can be displayed in the variables window. These variables may be read or written while the MCU is running 32 bytes of real-time memory can be displayed in the memory window. This memory may be read or written while the MCU is running 64 Kbytes of fast emulation memory (SRAM) Current-limited target input/output connections Six software-selectable oscillator clock sources: five internally generated frequencies and an external frequency via a bus analyzer logic clip Command and response logging to MS-DOS(R) disk files to save session history SCRIPT command for automatic execution of a sequence of MMDS11 commands Assembly or C-language source-level debugging with global variable viewing Host/emulator communications speeds as high as 57,600 baud for quick program loading Extensive on-line MCU information via the CHIPINFO command. View memory map, vectors, register, and pinout information pertaining to the device being emulated Host software supports: - An editor - An assembler and user interface - Source-level debug - Bus state analysis - IBM(R) mouse
(R) (R)
*
*
* * *
* * * * *
*
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Technical Data 272 Development Support
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Development Support SPGMR11 -- Serial Programmer for M68HC11 MCUs
A.6 SPGMR11 -- Serial Programmer for M68HC11 MCUs
The SPGMR11 is a modular EPROM/EEPROM programming tool for all M68HC11 devices. The programmer features interchangeable adapters that allow programming of various M68HC11 package types. Programmer features include: * * Programs M68HC11 Family devices that contain an EPROM or EEPROM array. Can be operated as a stand-alone programmer connected to a host computer or connected between a host computer and the M68HC11 modular development system (MMDS11) station module Uses plug-in programming adapters to accommodate a variety of MCU devices and packages On-board programming voltage circuit eliminates the need for an external 12-volt supply. Includes programming software and a user's manual Includes a +5-volt power cable and a DB9 to DB25 connector adapter
* * * *
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA Development Support
Technical Data 273
Development Support
Technical Data 274 Development Support
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA
Technical Data -- M68HC11E Family
Appendix B. EVBU Schematic
Refer to Figure B-1 for a schematic diagram of the M68HC11EVBU Universal Evaluation Board. This diagram is included for reference only.
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4 MOTOROLA EVBU Schematic
Technical Data 275
EVBU Schematic
NOTE 1
276 EVBU Schematic MOTOROLA
Technical Data
VCC 1 3 J2 2 R4 47 K VCC GND
MCU [2 . . . 52] VCC 1 U3 25 C7 1 F C8 0.1 F MCU 34 MCU 33 MCU 32 MCU 31 MCU 30 MCU 29 MCU 28 MCU 27 MCU 20 MCU 21 MCU 22 MCU 23 MCU 24 MCU 25 MCU 43 MCU 45 MCU 47 MCU 49 MCU 44 MCU 46 MCU 48 MCU 50 MCU52 (VRH) C9 0.1 F MCU 52 MCU 51 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 43 45 47 49 44 46 48 50 52 51 1 VDD PA0/IC3 PA1/IC2 PA2/IC1 PA3/OC5 PA4/OC4 PA5/OC3 PA6/OC2 PA7/OC1 PD0/RXD PD1/TXD PD2/MISO PD3/MOSI PD4/SCK PD5/SS PE0 PE1 PE2 PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PE7 VRH VRL VSS PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PC0/AD0 PC1/AD1 PC2/AD2 PC3/AD3 PC4/AD4 PC5/AD5 PC6/AD6 PC7/AD7 E STRB/R/W STRA/AS RESET IRQ XIRQ MODA/LIR MODB/VSTBY 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 5 6 4 17 19 18 3 2 MCU42 MCU41 MCU40 MCU39 MCU38 MCU37 MCU36 MCU35 MCU9 MCU10 MCU11 MCU12 MCU13 MCU14 MCU15 MCU16 MCU5 MCU6 MCU4 MCU17 MCU19 MCU18 MCU3 MCU2 MCU18 (XIRQ) RN1D 47 K 5 1 J7 2 MCU31 (PA3/OC5) VCC 1 RN1C 47 K 4 3 VCC 1 RN1B 47 K VCC R1 47 K
VCC
MCU19 (IRQ)
MCU43
(PE0)
MCU3 MCU2 MCU8 MCU7
(MODA/LIR) (MODB/VSTBY) J6 2 J5 2 1 1 J4 1 NOTE 1 1 2 2 J3
R3 1K
7 EXTAL 8 XTAL MC68HC11E9FN
R2 10 M X1 8 MHz C6 27 pF NOTE 2 C5 27 pF C12 + C10 + 20 18 1 3 15 16 13 14 11 12 19
MASTER RESET
VCC 2 U2
VCC 1 RN1A 47 K 2 MCU17 (RESET) MCU21 (PD1/TXD) MCU20 (PD0/RXD) SW1 NOTE 1 2 J8 1 2 NOTE 1 J9 1
VCC 1 RN1E 47 K 6
INPUT 1 RESET 3 GND MC34064P
VCC VCC NC
CONNECTOR DB25 13 25 12 24 11 USER'S TERMINAL OR PC 23 10 22 9 VCC 21 DCD 8 C14 DTR 20 10 F 7 20 V + U4 19 VDD 17 DSR 6 C1+ C13 18 C1- VSS 4 5 + C2+ 17 C2- CTS 6 4 TX1 DI1 16 J15 RX1 5 DD1 8 2 1 TXD 3 DI2 TX2 15 RX2 7 DD2 RXD 2 TX3 10 DI3 NOTE 1 14 RX3 9 DD3 1 2
VCC GND
P2
MC68HC11E Family -- Rev. 4
Notes: 1. Default cut traces installed from factory on bottom of the board. 2. X1 is shipped as a ceramic resonator with built-in capacitors. Holes are provided for a crystal and two capacitors.
C11 MC145407 0.1 F
Figure B-1. EVBU Schematic Diagram
Order this document by AN1060/D Rev. 1.0
Motorola Semiconductor Application Note
AN1060
M68HC11 Bootstrap Mode
By Jim Sibigtroth, Mike Rhoades, and John Langan Austin, Texas
Introduction
The M68HC11 Family of MCUs (microcontroller units) has a bootstrap mode that allows a user-defined program to be loaded into the internal random-access memory (RAM) by way of the serial communications interface (SCI); the M68HC11 then executes this loaded program. The loaded program can do anything a normal user program can do as well as anything a factory test program can do because protected control bits are accessible in bootstrap mode. Although the bootstrap mode is a single-chip mode of operation, expanded mode resources are accessible because the mode control bits can be changed while operating in the bootstrap mode. This application note explains the operation and application of the M68HC11 bootstrap mode. Although basic concepts associated with this mode are quite simple, the more subtle implications of these functions require careful consideration. Useful applications of this mode are overlooked due to an incomplete understanding of bootstrap mode. Also, common problems associated with bootstrap mode could be avoided by a more complete understanding of its operation and implications.
(c) Motorola, Inc., 1999
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0
Application Note
Topics discussed in this application note include: * * * * * * * * * * * Basic operation of the M68HC11 bootstrap mode General discussion of bootstrap mode uses Detailed explanation of on-chip bootstrap logic Detailed explanation of bootstrap firmware Bootstrap firmware vs. EEPROM security Incorporating the bootstrap mode into a system Driving bootstrap mode from another M68HC11 Driving bootstrap mode from a personal computer Common bootstrap mode problems Variations for specific versions of M68HC11 Commented listings for selected M68HC11 bootstrap ROMs
Basic Bootstrap Mode
This section describes only basic functions of the bootstrap mode. Other functions of the bootstrap mode are described in detail in the remainder of this application note. When an M68HC11 is reset in bootstrap mode, the reset vector is fetched from a small internal read-only memory (ROM) called the bootstrap ROM or boot ROM. The firmware program in this boot ROM then controls the bootloading process, in this manner: * First, the on-chip SCI (serial communications interface) is initialized. The first character received ($FF) determines which of two possible baud rates should be used for the remaining characters in the download operation. Next, a binary program is received by the SCI system and is stored in RAM. Finally, a jump instruction is executed to pass control from the bootloader firmware to the user's loaded program.
* *
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 278 MOTOROLA
Application Note
Bootstrap mode is useful both at the component level and after the MCU has been embedded into a finished user system. At the component level, Motorola uses bootstrap mode to control a monitored burn-in program for the on-chip electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). Units to be tested are loaded into special circuit boards that each hold many MCUS. These boards are then placed in burn-in ovens. Driver boards outside the ovens download an EEPROM exercise and diagnostic program to all MCUs in parallel. The MCUs under test independently exercise their internal EEPROM and monitor programming and erase operations. This technique could be utilized by an end user to load program information into the EPROM or EEPROM of an M68HC11 before it is installed into an end product. As in the burn-in setup, many M68HC11s can be gang programmed in parallel. This technique can also be used to program the EPROM of finished products after final assembly. Motorola also uses bootstrap mode for programming target devices on the M68HC11 evaluation modules (EVM). Because bootstrap mode is a privileged mode like special test, the EEPROM-based configuration register (CONFIG) can be programmed using bootstrap mode on the EVM. The greatest benefits from bootstrap mode are realized by designing the finished system so that bootstrap mode can be used after final assembly. The finished system need not be a single-chip mode application for the bootstrap mode to be useful because the expansion bus can be enabled after resetting the MCU in bootstrap mode. Allowing this capability requires almost no hardware or design cost and the addition of this capability is invisible in the end product until it is needed. The ability to control the embedded processor through downloaded programs is achieved without the disassembly and chip-swapping usually associated with such control. This mode provides an easy way to load non-volatile memories such as EEPROM with calibration tables or to program the application firmware into a one-time programmable (OTP) MCU after final assembly. Another powerful use of bootstrap mode in a finished assembly is for final test. Short programs can be downloaded to check parts of the
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 279
Application Note
system, including components and circuitry external to the embedded MCU. If any problems appear during product development, diagnostic programs can be downloaded to find the problems, and corrected routines can be downloaded and checked before incorporating them into the main application program. Bootstrap mode can also be used to interactively calibrate critical analog sensors. Since this calibration is done in the final assembled system, it can compensate for any errors in discrete interface circuitry and cabling between the sensor and the analog inputs to the MCU. Note that this calibration routine is a downloaded program that does not take up space in the normal application program.
Bootstrap Mode Logic
In the M68HC11 MCUs, very little logic is dedicated to the bootstrap mode. Consequently, this mode adds almost no extra cost to the MCU system. The biggest piece of circuitry for bootstrap mode is the small boot ROM. This ROM is 192 bytes in the original MC68HC11A8, but some of the newest members of the M68HC11 Family, such as the MC68HC711K4, have as much as 448 bytes to accommodate added features. Normally, this boot ROM is present in the memory map only when the MCU is reset in bootstrap mode to prevent interference with the user's normal memory space. The enable for this ROM is controlled by the read boot ROM (RBOOT) control bit in the highest priority interrupt (HPRIO) register. The RBOOT bit can be written by software whenever the MCU is in special test or special bootstrap modes; when the MCU is in normal modes, RBOOT reverts to 0 and becomes a readonly bit. All other logic in the MCU would be present whether or not there was a bootstrap mode. Figure 1 shows the composite memory map of the MC68HC711E9 in its four basic modes of operation, including bootstrap mode. The active mode is determined by the mode A (MDA) and special mode (SMOD) control bits in the HPRIO control register. These control bits are in turn controlled by the state of the mode A (MODA) and mode B (MODB) pins during reset. Table 1 shows the relationship between the state of these
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 280 MOTOROLA
Application Note
pins during reset, the selected mode, and the state of the MDA, SMOD, and RBOOT control bits. Refer to the composite memory map and information in Table 1 for the following discussion. The MDA control bit is determined by the state of the MODA pin as the MCU leaves reset. MDA selects between single-chip and expanded operating modes. When MDA is 0, a single-chip mode is selected, either normal single-chip mode or special bootstrap mode. When MDA is 1, an expanded mode is selected, either normal expanded mode or special test mode. The SMOD control bit is determined by the inverted state of the MODB pin as the MCU leaves reset. SMOD controls whether a normal mode or a special mode is selected. When SMOD is 0, one of the two normal modes is selected, either normal single-chip mode or normal expanded mode. When SMOD is 1, one of the two special modes is selected, either special bootstrap mode or special test mode. When either special mode is in effect (SMOD = 1), certain privileges are in effect, for instance, the ability to write to the mode control bits and fetching the reset and interrupt vectors from $BFxx rather than $FFxx. Table 1. Mode Selection Summary
Input Pins Mode Selected MODB 1 0 0 0 MODA 0 0 0 1 Normal single chip Normal expanded Special bootstrap Special test RBOOT 0 0 1 0 SMOD 0 0 1 1 MDA 0 1 0 1 Control Bits in HPRIO
The alternate vector locations are achieved by simply driving address bit A14 low during all vector fetches if SMOD = 1. For special test mode, the alternate vector locations assure that the reset vector can be fetched from external memory space so the test system can control MCU operation. In special bootstrap mode, the small boot ROM is enabled in the memory map by RBOOT = 1 so the reset vector will be fetched from this ROM and the bootloader firmware will control MCU operation.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 281
Application Note
RBOOT is reset to 1 in bootstrap mode to enable the small boot ROM. In the other three modes, RBOOT is reset to 0 to keep the boot ROM out of the memory map. While in special test mode, SMOD = 1, which allows the RBOOT control bit to be written to 1 by software to enable the boot ROM for testing purposes.
Boot ROM Firmware
The main program in the boot ROM is the bootloader, which is automatically executed as a result of resetting the MCU in bootstrap mode. Some newer versions of the M68HC11 Family have additional utility programs that can be called from a downloaded program. One utility is available to program EPROM or OTP versions of the M68HC11. A second utility allows the contents of memory locations to be uploaded to a host computer. In the MC68HC711K4 boot ROM, a section of code is used by Motorola for stress testing the on-chip EEPROM. These test and utility programs are similar to self-test ROM programs in other MCUs except that the boot ROM does not use valuable space in the normal memory map. Bootstrap firmware is also involved in an optional EEPROM security function on some versions of the M68HC11. This EEPROM security feature prevents a software pirate from seeing what is in the on-chip EEPROM. The secured state is invoked by programming the no security (NOSEC) EEPROM bit in the CONFIG register. Once this NOSEC bit is programmed to 0, the MCU will ignore the mode A pin and always come out of reset in normal single-chip mode or special bootstrap mode, depending on the state of the mode B pin. Normal single-chip mode is the usual way a secured part would be used. Special bootstrap mode is used to disengage the security function (only after the contents of EEPROM and RAM have been erased). Refer to the M68HC11 Reference Manual, Motorola document order number M68HC11RM/AD, for additional information on the security mode and complete listings of the boot ROMs that support the EEPROM security functions.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 282 MOTOROLA
Application Note
Automatic Selection of Baud Rate
The bootloader program in the MC68HC711E9 accommodates either of two baud rates. * The higher of these baud rates (7812 baud at a 2-MHz E-clock rate) is used in systems that operate from a binary frequency crystal such as 223 Hz (8.389 MHz). At this crystal frequency, the baud rate is 8192 baud, which was used extensively in automotive applications. The second baud rate available to the M68HC11 bootloader is 1200 baud at a 2-MHz E-clock rate. Some of the newest versions of the M68HC11, including the MC68HC11F1 and MC68HC117K4, accommodate other baud rates using the same differentiation technique explained here. Refer to the reference numbers in square brackets in Figure 2 during the following explanation.
*
NOTE:
Software can change some aspects of the memory map after reset. Figure 2 shows how the bootloader program differentiates between the default baud rate (7812 baud at a 2-MHz E-clock rate) and the alternate baud rate (1200 baud at a 2-MHz E-clock rate). The host computer sends an initial $FF character, which is used by the bootloader to determine the baud rate that will be used for the downloading operation. The top half of Figure 2 shows normal reception of $FF. Receive data samples at [1] detect the falling edge of the start bit and then verify the start bit by taking a sample at the center of the start bit time. Samples are then taken at the middle of each bit time [2] to reconstruct the value of the received character (all 1s in this case). A sample is then taken at the middle of the stop bit time as a framing check (a 1 is expected) [3]. Unless another character immediately follows this $FF character, the receive data line will idle in the high state as shown at [4]. The bottom half of Figure 2 shows how the receiver will incorrectly receive the $FF character that is sent from the host at 1200 baud. Because the receiver is set to 7812 baud, the receive data samples are taken at the same times as in the upper half of Figure 2. The start bit at 1200 baud [5] is 6.5 times as long as the start bit at 7812 baud [6].
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 283
Application Note
$0000 $01FF EXTERNAL $1000 $103F EXTERNAL 64-BYTE REGISTER BLOCK 512-BYTE RAM
(MAY BE REMAPPED TO ANY 4K BOUNDARY)
(MAY BE REMAPPED TO ANY 4K BOUNDARY)
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
$B600 $B7FF
512-BYTE EEPROM
(MAY BE DISABLED BY AN EEPROM BIT)
$BFC0 $BF00 $BFC0 $BFFF $D000 12K USER EPROM (or OTP) EXTERNAL EXTERNAL BOOT ROM SPECIAL MODE VECTORS $BFFF (MAY BE DISABLED BY AN EEPROM BIT) $FFC0 NORMAL MODE VECTORS SINGLE CHIP MODA = 0 MODB = 1 EXPANDED MULTIPLEXED MODA = 1 MODB = 1 SPECIAL BOOTSTRAP MODA = 0 MODB = 0 SPECIAL TEST MODA = 1 MODB = 0 $FFFF
$FFC0 $FFFF
NOTE: Software can change some aspects of the memory map after reset.
Figure 1. MC68HC711E9 Composite Memory Map
[4] BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 STOP Tx DATA LINE IDLES HIGH
$FF CHARACTER @ 7812 BAUD Rx DATA SAMPLES
[6] START
S [1]
0
1
1
1
1
[2] 1 $FF
1
1
1
1
[3]
$FF CHARACTER @ 1200 BAUD Rx DATA SAMPLES ( FOR 7812 BAUD )
START
[5]
BIT 0
BIT 1
S
0 [7]
0
0
[8]
0
0
0 $C0 or $E0 [10]
? [9]
1
1
1
[11]
[12]
Figure 2. Automatic Detection of Baud Rate
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 284 MOTOROLA
Application Note
Samples taken at [7] detect the failing edge of the start bit and verify it is a logic 0. Samples taken at the middle of what the receiver interprets as the first five bit times [8] detect logic 0s. The sample taken at the middle of what the receiver interprets as bit 5 [9] may detect either a 0 or a 1 because the receive data has a rising transition at about this time. The samples for bits 6 and 7 detect 1s, causing the receiver to think the received character was $C0 or $E0 [10] at 7812 baud instead of the $FF which was sent at 1200 baud. The stop bit sample detects a 1 as expected [11], but this detection is actually in the middle of bit 0 of the 1200 baud $FF character. The SCI receiver is not confused by the rest of the 1200 baud $FF character because the receive data line is high [12] just as it would be for the idle condition. If a character other than $FF is sent as the first character, an SCI receive error could result.
Main Bootloader Program
Figure 3 is a flowchart of the main bootloader program in the MC68HC711E9. This bootloader demonstrates the most important features of the bootloaders used on all M68HC11 Family members. For complete listings of other M68HC11 versions, refer to Listing 3. MC68HC711E9 Bootloader ROM at the end of this application note, and to Appendix B of the M68HC11 Reference Manual, Motorola document order number M68HC11RM/AD. The reset vector in the boot ROM points to the start [1] of this program. The initialization block [2] establishes starting conditions and sets up the SCI and port D. The stack pointer is set because there are push and pull instructions in the bootloader program. The X index register is pointed at the start of the register block ($1000) so indexed addressing can be used. Indexed addressing takes one less byte of ROM space than extended instructions, and bit manipulation instructions are not available in extended addressing forms. The port D wire-OR mode (DWOM) bit in the serial peripheral interface control register (SPCR) is set to configure port D for wired-OR operation to minimize potential conflicts with external systems that use the PD1/TxD pin as an input. The baud rate for the SCI is initially set to 7812 baud at a 2-MHz E-clock rate but can automatically switch to 1200 baud based on the first character received.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 285
Application Note
The SCI receiver and transmitter are enabled. The receiver is required by the bootloading process, and the transmitter is used to transmit data back to the host computer for optional verification. The last item in the initialization is to set an intercharacter delay constant used to terminate the download when the host computer stops sending data to the MC68HC711E9. This delay constant is stored in the timer output compare 1 (TOC1) register, but the on-chip timer is not used in the bootloader program. This example illustrates the extreme measures used in the bootloader firmware to minimize memory usage. However, such measures are not usually considered good programming technique because they are misleading to someone trying to understand the program or use it as an example. After initialization, a break character is transmitted [3] by the SCI. By connecting the TxD pin to the RxD pin (with a pullup because of port D wired-OR mode), this break will be received as a $00 character and cause an immediate jump [4] to the start of the on-chip EEPROM ($B600 in the MC68HC711E9). This feature is useful to pass control to a program in EEPROM essentially from reset. Refer to Common Bootstrap Mode Problems before using this feature. If the first character is received as $FF, the baud rate is assumed to be the default rate (7812 baud at a 2-MHz E-clock rate). If $FF was sent at 1200 baud by the host, the SCI will receive the character as $E0 or $C0 because of the baud rate mismatch, and the bootloader will switch to 1200 baud [5] for the rest of the download operation. When the baud rate is switched to 1200 baud, the delay constant used to monitor the intercharacter delay also must be changed to reflect the new character time. At [6], the Y index register is initialized to $0000 to point to the start of on-chip RAM. The index register Y is used to keep track of where the next received data byte will be stored in RAM. The main loop for loading begins at [7]. The number of data bytes in the downloaded program can be any number between 0 and 512 bytes (the size of on-chip RAM). This procedure is called "variable-length download" and is accomplished by ending the download sequence when an idle time of at least four character times occurs after the last character to be downloaded. In
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 286 MOTOROLA
Application Note
M68HC11 Family members which have 256 bytes of RAM, the download length is fixed at exactly 256 bytes plus the leading $FF character. The intercharacter delay counter is started [8] by loading the delay constant from TOC1 into the X index register. The 19-E-cycle wait loop is executed repeatedly until either a character is received [9] or the allowed intercharacter delay time expires [10]. For 7812 baud, the delay constant is 10,241 E cycles (539 x 19 E cycles per loop). Four character times at 7812 baud is 10,240 E cycles (baud prescale of 4 x baud divider of 4 x 16 internal SCI clocks/bit time x 10 bit times/character x 4 character times). The delay from reset to the initial $FF character is not critical since the delay counter is not started until after the first character ($FF) is received. To terminate the bootloading sequence and jump to the start of RAM without downloading any data to the on-chip RAM, simply send $FF and nothing else. This feature is similar to the jump to EEPROM at [4] except the $FF causes a jump to the start of RAM. This procedure requires that the RAM has been loaded with a valid program since it would make no sense to jump to a location in uninitialized memory. After receiving a character, the downloaded byte is stored in RAM [11]. The data is transmitted back to the host [12] as an indication that the download is progressing normally. At [13], the RAM pointer is incremented to the next RAM address. If the RAM pointer has not passed the end of RAM, the main download loop (from [7] to [14]) is repeated. When all data has been downloaded, the bootloader goes to [16] because of an intercharacter delay timeout [10] or because the entire 512-byte RAM has been filled [15]. At [16], the X and Y index registers are set up for calling the PROGRAM utility routine, which saves the user from having to do this in a downloaded program. The PROGRAM utility is fully explained in EPROM Programming Utility. The final step of the bootloader program is to jump to the start of RAM [17], which starts the user's downloaded program.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 287
Application Note
[1]
START
FROM RESET IN BOOT MODE
[2] INITIALIZATION: SP = TOP OF RAM ($01FF) X = START OF REGS ($1000) SPCR = $20 (SET DWOM BIT) BAUD = $A2 (/ 4; / 4) (7812.5 BAUD @ 2 MHz) SCCR2 = $C0 (Tx & Rx ON) TOC1 = DELAY CONSTANT (539 = 4 SCI CHARACTER TIMES)
SEND BREAK NO
[3]
RECEIVED FIRST CHAR YET ? YES FIRST CHAR = $00 ? NO NOTZERO NO [5] YES
[4] JUMP TO START OF EEPROM ($B600) NOTE THAT A BREAK CHARACTER IS ALSO RECEIVED AS $00
YES
FIRST CHAR = $FF ?
SWITCH TO SLOWER SCI RATE... BAUD = $33 (/13; / 8) (1200 BAUD @ 2 MHz) CHANGE DELAY CONSTANT... TOC1 = 3504 (4 SCI CHARACTER TIMES) BAUDOK POINT TO START OF RAM ( Y = $0000 ) [7] WAIT [8] [9] LOOP = 19 CYCLES [6]
INITIALIZE TIMEOUT COUNT WTLOOP RECEIVE DATA READY ? NO DECREMENT TIMEOUT COUNT NO TIMED OUT YET ? [10] YES YES
STORE RECEIVED DATA TO RAM ( ,Y ) TRANSMIT (ECHO) FOR VERIFY POINT AT NEXT RAM LOCATION PAST END OF RAM ? YES STAR [15] NO
[11] [12] [13] [14]
SET UP FOR PROGRAM UTILITY: X = PROGRAMMING TIME CONSTANT Y = START OF EPROM
[16]
JUMP TO START OF RAM ($0000)
[17]
Figure 3. MC68HC711E9 Bootloader Flowchart
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 288 MOTOROLA
Application Note
UPLOAD Utility
The UPLOAD utility subroutine transfers data from the MCU to a host computer system over the SCI serial data link.
NOTE:
Only EPROM versions of the M68HC11 include this utility. Verification of EPROM contents is one example of how the UPLOAD utility could be used. Before calling this program, the Y index register is loaded (by user firmware) with the address of the first data byte to be uploaded. If a baud rate other than the current SCI baud rate is to be used for the upload process, the user's firmware must also write to the baud register. The UPLOAD program sends successive bytes of data out the SCI transmitter until a reset is issued (the upload loop is infinite). For a complete commented listing example of the UPLOAD utility, refer to Listing 3. MC68HC711E9 Bootloader ROM.
EPROM Programming Utility
The EPROM programming utility is one way of programming data into the internal EPROM of the MC68HC711E9 MCU. An external 12-V programming power supply is required to program on-chip EPROM. The simplest way to use this utility program is to bootload a 3-byte program consisting of a single jump instruction to the start of the PROGRAM utility program ($BF00). The bootloader program sets the X and Y index registers to default values before jumping to the downloaded program (see [16] at the bottom of Figure 3). When the host computer sees the $FF character, data to be programmed into the EPROM is sent, starting with the character for location $D000. After the last byte to be programmed is sent to the MC68HC711E9 and the corresponding verification data is returned to the host, the programming operation is terminated by resetting the MCU. The number of bytes to be programmed, the first address to be programmed, and the programming time can be controlled by the user if values other than the default values are desired.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 289
Application Note
To understand the detailed operation of the EPROM programming utility, refer to Figure 4 during the following discussion. Figure 4 is composed of three interrelated parts. The upper-left portion shows the flowchart of the PROGRAM utility running in the boot ROM of the MCU. The upperright portion shows the flowchart for the user-supplied driver program running in the host computer. The lower portion of Figure 4 is a timing sequence showing the relationship of operations between the MCU and the host computer. Reference numbers in the flowcharts in the upper half of Figure 4 have matching numbers in the lower half to help the reader relate the three parts of the figure. The shaded area [1] refers to the software and hardware latency in the MCU leading to the transmission of a character (in this case, the $FF). The shaded area [2] refers to a similar latency in the host computer (in this case, leading to the transmission of the first data character to the MCU). The overall operation begins when the MCU sends the first character ($FF) to the host computer, indicating that it is ready for the first data character. The host computer sends the first data byte [3] and enters its main loop. The second data character is sent [4], and the host then waits [5] for the first verify byte to come back from the MCU. After the MCU sends $FF [8], it enters the WAIT1 loop [9] and waits for the first data character from the host. When this character is received [10], the MCU programs it into the address pointed to by the Y index register. When the programming time delay is over, the MCU reads the programmed data, transmits it to the host for verification [11], and returns to the top of the WAIT1 loop to wait for the next data character [12]. Because the host previously sent the second data character, it is already waiting in the SCI receiver of the MCU. Steps [13], [14], and [15] correspond to the second pass through the WAIT1 loop. Back in the host, the first verify character is received, and the third data character is sent [6]. The host then waits for the second verify character [7] to come back from the MCU. The sequence continues as long as the host continues to send data to the MCU. Since the WAIT1 loop in the PROGRAM utility is an indefinite loop, reset is used to end the process in the MCU after the host has finished sending data to be programmed.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 290 MOTOROLA
Application Note
PROGRAM Utility in MCU
INITIALIZE... X = PROGRAM TIME Y = FIRST ADDRESS
Driver Program in HOST
HOST NORMALLY WAITS FOR $FF FROM MCU BEFORE SENDING DATA FOR EPROM PROGRAMMING
START [8]
$BF00 - PROGRAM
START SEND FIRST DATA BYTE DATA_LOOP NO MORE DATA TO SEND ? YES SEND NEXT DATA [4] [6] [3]
INDICATES READY SEND $FF TO HOST [9] WAIT1
NO
ANY DATA RECEIVED ? YES PROGRAM BYTE [10] [13] [5] [7] READ PROGRAMMED DATA AND SEND TO VERIFY NO [11] [14]
VERIFY DATA RECEIVED ? YES NO INDICATE ERROR
POINT TO NEXT LOCATION TO BE PROGRAMMED [12] [15]
VERIFY DATA CORRECT ? YES YES MORE TO VERIFY ? NO
PROGRAM CONTINUES AS LONG AS DATA IS RECEIVED
DONE
VERIFY DATA TO HOST (SAME AS MCU Tx DATA) [1]
$FF [3]
[4] D1 [2] [10] P1 [9]
V1 [5] [6] D2 [13] P2 [11] [12] V1 [7]
V2
V3
V4 HOST SENDING DATA FOR MCU EPROM
MCU RECEIVE DATA (FROM HOST)
D3
D4
D5
EPROM PROGRAMMING [8] MCU TRANSMIT DATA (VERIFY) $FF
[14]
P3 [15] V2
P4
MC68HC711E9 EXECUTING "PROGRAM" LOOP V4
V3
Figure 4. Host and MCU Activity during EPROM PROGRAM Utility
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 291
Application Note Allowing for Bootstrap Mode
Since bootstrap mode requires few connections to the MCU, it is easy to design systems that accommodate bootstrap mode. Bootstrap mode is useful for diagnosing or repairing systems that have failed due to changes in the CONFIG register or failures of the expansion address/data buses, (rendering programs in external memory useless). Bootstrap mode can also be used to load information into the EPROM or EEPROM of an M68HC11 after final assembly of a module. Bootstrap mode is also useful for performing system checks and calibration routines. The following paragraphs explain system requirements for use of bootstrap mode in a product.
Mode Select Pins
It must be possible to force the MODA and MODB pins to logic 0, which implies that these two pins should be pulled up to VDD through resistors rather than being tied directly to VDD. If mode pins are connected directly to VDD, it is not possible to force a mode other than the one the MCU is hard wired for. It is also good practice to use pulldown resistors to VSS rather than connecting mode pins directly to VSS because it is sometimes a useful debug aid to attempt reset in modes other than the one the system was primarily designed for. Physically, this requirement sometimes calls for the addition of a test point or a wire connected to one or both mode pins. Mode selection only uses the mode pins while RESET is active.
RESET
It must be possible to initiate a reset while the mode select pins are held low. In systems where there is no provision for manual reset, it is usually possible to generate a reset by turning power off and back on.
RxD Pin
It must be possible to drive the PD0/RxD pin with serial data from a host computer (or another MCU). In many systems, this pin is already used for SCI communications; thus no changes are required. In systems where the PD0/RxD pin is normally used as a generalpurpose output, a serial signal from the host can be connected to the pin
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0
292
MOTOROLA
Application Note
without resulting in output driver conflicts. It may be important to consider what the existing logic will do with the SCI serial data instead of the signals that would have been produced by the PD0 pin. In systems where the PD0 pin is used normally as a general-purpose input, the driver circuit that drives the PD0 pin must be designed so that the serial data can override this driver, or the driver must be disconnected during the bootstrap download. A simple series resistor between the driver and the PD0 pin solves this problem as shown in Figure 5. The serial data from the host computer can then be connected to the PD0/RxD pin, and the series resistor will prevent direct conflict between the host driver and the normal PD0 driver.
FROM HOST SYSTEM RS232 LEVEL SHIFTER EXISTING CONTROL SIGNAL EXISTING DRIVER CONNECTED ONLY DURING BOOTLOADING MC68HC11
SERIES RESISTOR
RxD/PD0 (BEING USED AS INPUT)
Figure 5. Preventing Driver Conflict TxD Pin The bootloader program uses the PD1/TxD pin to send verification data back to the host computer. To minimize the possibility of conflicts with circuitry connected to this pin, port D is configured for wire-OR mode by the bootloader program during initialization. Since the wire-OR configuration prevents the pin from driving active high levels, a pullup resistor to VDD is needed if the TxD signal is used. In systems where the PD1/TxD pin is normally used as a generalpurpose output, there are no output driver conflicts. It may be important to consider what the existing logic will do with the SCI serial data instead of the signals that would have been produced by the PD1 pin. In systems where the PD1 pin is normally used as a general-purpose input, the driver circuit that drives the PD1 pin must be designed so that the PD1/TxD pin driver in the MCU can override this driver. A simple series resistor between the driver and the PD1 pin can solve this problem. The TxD pin can then be configured as an output, and the
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 293
Application Note
series resistor will prevent direct conflict between the internal TxD driver and the external driver connected to PD1 through the series resistor.
Other
The bootloader firmware sets the DWOM control bit, which configures all port D pins for wire-OR operation. During the bootloading process, all port D pins except the PD1/TxD pin are configured as high-impedance inputs. Any port D pin that normally is used as an output should have a pullup resistor so it does not float during the bootloading process.
Driving Boot Mode from Another M68HC11
A second M68HC11 system can easily act as the host to drive bootstrap loading of an M68HC11 MCU. This method is used to examine and program non-volatile memories in target M68HC11s in Motorola EVMs. The following hardware and software example will demonstrate this and other bootstrap mode features. The schematic in Figure 6 shows the circuitry for a simple EPROM duplicator for the MC68HC711E9. The circuitry is built in the wire-wrap area of an M68HC11EVBU evaluation board to simplify construction. The schematic shows only the important portions of the EVBU circuitry to avoid confusion. To see the complete EVBU schematic, refer to the M68HC11EVBU Universal Evaluation Board User's Manual, Motorola document order number M68HC11EVBU/D. The default configuration of the EVBU must be changed to make the appropriate connections to the circuitry in the wire-wrap area and to configure the master MCU for bootstrap mode. A fabricated jumper must be installed at J6 to connect the XTAL output of the master MCU to the wire-wrap connector P5, which has been wired to the EXTAL input of the target MCU. Cut traces that short across J8 and J9 must be cut on the solder side of the printed circuit board to disconnect the normal SCI connections to the RS232 level translator (U4) of the EVBU. The J8 and J9 connections can be restored easily at a later time by installing fabricated jumpers on the component side of the board. A fabricated
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 294 MOTOROLA
Application Note
jumper must be installed across J3 to configure the master MCU for bootstrap mode. One MC68HC711E9 is first programmed by other means with a desired 12-Kbyte program in its EPROM and a small duplicator program in its EEPROM. Alternately, the ROM program in an MC68HC11E9 can be copied into the EPROM of a target MC68HC711E9 by programming only the duplicator program into the EEPROM of the master MC68HC11E9. The master MCU is installed in the EVBU at socket U3. A blank MC68HC711E9 to be programmed is placed in the socket in the wirewrap area of the EVBU (U6). With the VPP power switch off, power is applied to the EVBU system. As power is applied to the EVBU, the master MCU (U3) comes out of reset in bootstrap mode. Target MCU (U6) is held in reset by the PB7 output of master MCU (U3). The PB7 output of U3 is forced to 0 when U3 is reset. The master MCU will later release the reset signal to the target MCU under software control. The RxD and TxD pins of the target MCU (U6) are high-impedance inputs while U6 is in reset so they will not affect the TxD and RxD signals of the master MCU (U3) while U3 is coming out of reset. Since the target MCU is being held in reset with MODA and MODB at 0, it is configured for the PROG EPROM emulation mode, and PB7 is the output enable signal for the EPROM data I/O (input/output) pins. Pullup resistor R7 causes the port D pins, including RxD and TxD, to remain in the high-impedance state so they do not interfere with the RxD and TxD pins of the master MCU as it comes out of reset. As U3 leaves reset, its mode pins select bootstrap mode so the bootloader firmware begins executing. A break is sent out the TxD pin of U3. Pullup resistor R10 and resistor R9 cause the break character to be seen at the RxD pin of U3. The bootloader performs a jump to the start of EEPROM in the master MCU (U3) and starts executing the duplicator program. This sequence demonstrates how to use bootstrap mode to pass control to the start of EEPROM after reset. The complete listing for the duplicator program in the EEPROM of the master MCU is provided in Listing 1. MCU-to-MCU Duplicator Program.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 295
Application Note
COM
+12.25V
M68HC11EVBU PREWIRED AREA WIRE-WRAP AREA
R11 + 100 C18 20 F ON V PP OFF S2
P4
P5
PE7 MASTER MCU U3
50
50
50
R14 15K R15 10K
MC68HC711E9 18 PB7 35 35 35 R8 3.3K V DD PB1 PB0 41 42 41 42 41 R12 1K 42 R13 1K J6 XTAL MODB 8 2 J3 TxD 21 21 21 [1] RxD 20 20 20 [2] J8 J9 8 8 V DD V DD 35 R10 15K R9 10K 21 3 2 TxD MODA MODB R7 10K 20 PB7 7 EXTAL D5 RED D6 GREEN 26 C17 0.1 F 1 VDD VSS TARGET MCU U6 17 XIRQ/V PPE RESET
RxD
TO/FROM RS232 LEVEL TRANSLATOR U4
Figure 6. MCU-to-MCU EPROM Duplicator Schematic
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 296 MOTOROLA
Application Note
The duplicator program in EEPROM clears the DWOM control bit to change port D (thus, TxD) of U3 to normal driven outputs. This configuration will prevent interference due to R9 when TxD from the target MCU (U6) becomes active. Series resistor R9 demonstrates how TxD of U3 can drive RxD of U3[1] and later TxD of U6 can drive RxD of U3 without a destructive conflict between the TxD output buffers. As the target MCU (U6) leaves reset, its mode pins select bootstrap mode so the bootloader firmware begins executing. A break is sent out the TxD pin of U6. At this time, the TxD pin of U3 is at a driven high so R9 acts as a pullup resistor for TxD of the target MCU (U6). The break character sent from U6 is received by U3 so the duplicator program that is running in the EEPROM of the master MCU knows that the target MCU is ready to accept a bootloaded program. The master MCU sends a leading $FF character to set the baud rate in the target MCU. Next, the master MCU passes a 3-instruction program to the target MCU and pauses so the bootstrap program in the target MCU will stop the loading process and jump to the start of the downloaded program. This sequence demonstrates the variable-length download feature of the MC68HC711E9 bootloader. The short program downloaded to the target MCU clears the DWOM bit to change its TxD pin to a normal driven CMOS output and jumps to the EPROM programming utility in the bootstrap ROM of the target MCU. Note that the small downloaded program did not have to set up the SCI or initialize any parameters for the EPROM programming process. The bootstrap software that ran prior to the loaded program left the SCI turned on and configured in a way that was compatible with the SCI in the master MCU (the duplicator program in the master MCU also did not have to set up the SCI for the same reason). The programming time and starting address for EPROM programming in the target MCU were also set to default values by the bootloader software before jumping to the start of the downloaded program. Before the EPROM in the target MCU can be programmed, the VPP power supply must be available at the XIRQ/VPPE pin of the target MCU. The duplicator program running in the master MCU monitors this voltage (for presence or absence, not level) at PE7 through resistor divider
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 297
Application Note
R14-Rl5. The PE7 input was chosen because the internal circuitry for port E pins can tolerate voltages slightly higher than VDD; therefore, resistors R14 and R15 are less critical. No data to be programmed is passed to the target MCU until the master MCU senses that VPP has been stable for about 200 ms. When VPP is ready, the master MCU turns on the red LED (light-emitting diode) and begins passing data to the target MCU. EPROM Programming Utility explains the activity as data is sent from the master MCU to the target MCU and programmed into the EPROM of the target. The master MCU in the EVBU corresponds to the HOST in the programming utility description and the "PROGRAM utility in MCU" is running in the bootstrap ROM of the target MCU. Each byte of data sent to the target is programmed and then the programmed location is read and sent back to the master for verification. If any byte fails, the red and green LEDs are turned off, and the programming operation is aborted. If the entire 12 Kbytes are programmed and verified successfully, the red LED is turned off, and the green LED is turned on to indicate success. The programming of all 12 Kbytes takes about 30 seconds. After a programming operation, the VPP switch (S2) should be turned off before the EVBU power is turned off.
V DD RN1D 47K TO MCU TO MCU XIRQ/V XIRQ/VPPE PPE PIN PIN
50
CUT TRACE AS SHOWN
P4-18 J7 FROM OC5 PIN OF MCU REMOVE J7 JUMPER J14 TO MC68HC68T1 BE SURE NO JUMPER IS ON J14 P5-18
1 48 46 44 38 28 34 35 33 27 19 47 45 41 2 15
7 9 8 10 1
3 1
+
42
13
20 21 1
25
Figure 7. Isolating EVBU XIRQ Pin
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 298 MOTOROLA
Application Note
Listing 1. MCU-to-MCU Duplicator Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ************************************************** * 68HC711E9 Duplicator Program for AN1060 ************************************************** ***** * Equates - All reg addrs except INIT are 2-digit * for direct addressing ***** INIT EQU $103D RAM, Reg mapping SPCR EQU $28 DWOM in bit-5 PORTB EQU $04 Red LED = bit-1, Grn = bit-0 * Reset of prog socket = bit-7 RESET EQU %10000000 RED EQU %00000010 GREEN EQU %00000001 PORTE EQU $0A Vpp Sense in bit-7, 1=ON SCSR EQU $2E SCI status register * TDRE, TC, RDRF, IDLE; OR, NF, FE, TDRE EQU %10000000 RDRF EQU %00100000 SCDR EQU $2F SCI data register PROGRAM EQU $BF00 EPROM prog utility in boot ROM EPSTRT EQU $D000 Starting address of EPROM ORG $B600 Start of EEPROM
103D 0028 0004 0080 0002 0001 000A 002E 0080 0020 002F BF00 D000 B600
************************************************** * B600 7F103D BEGIN CLR INIT Moves Registers to $0000-3F B603 8604 LDAA #$04 Pattern for DWOM off, no SPI B605 9728 STAA SPCR Turns off DWOM in EVBU MCU B607 8680 LDAA #RESET B609 9704 STAA PORTB Release reset to target MCU B60B 132E20FC WT4BRK BRCLR SCSR RDRF WT4BRK Loop till char received B60F 86FF LDAA #$FF Leading char for bootload ... B611 972F STAA SCDR to target MCU B613 CEB675 LDX #BLPROG Point at program for target B616 8D53 BLLOOP BSR SEND1 Bootload to target B618 8CB67D CPX #ENDBPR Past end ? B61B 26F9 BNE BLLOOP Continue till all sent ***** * Delay for about 4 char times to allow boot related * SCI communications to finish before clearing * Rx related flags B61D CE06A7 LDX #1703 # of 6 cyc loops B620 09 DLYLP DEX [3] B621 26FD BNE DLYLP [3] Total loop time = 6 cyc B623 962E LDAA SCSR Read status (RDRF will be set) B625 962F LDAA SCDR Read SCI data reg to clear RDRF
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 299
Application Note
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 ***** * Now wait for character from target to indicate it's ready for * data to be programmed into EPROM B627 132E20FC WT4FF BRCLR SCSR RDRF WT4FF Wait for RDRF B62B 962F LDAA SCDR Clear RDRF, don't need data B62D CED000 LDX #EPSTRT Point at start of EPROM * Handle turn-on of Vpp B630 18CE523D WT4VPP LDY #21053 Delay counter (about 200ms) B634 150402 BCLR PORTB RED Turn off RED LED B637 960A DLYLP2 LDAA PORTE [3] Wait for Vpp to be ON B639 2AF5 BPL WT4VPP [3] Vpp sense is on port E MSB B63B 140402 BSET PORTB RED [6] Turn on RED LED B63E 1809 DEY [4] B640 26F5 BNE DLYLP2 [3] Total loop time = 19 cyc * Vpp has been stable for 200ms B642 B646 B648 B64B B64D B64F B653 B655 B658 B65A B65D B65F B65F B661 B663 B663 B666 B666 B669 B66B 18CED000 8D23 8C0000 DATALP 2702 8D1C 132E20FC VERF 962F 18A100 2705 150403 2007 1808 26E5 140401 150482 20FE DUNPRG VERFOK LDY BSR CPX BEQ BSR BRCLR LDAA CMPA BEQ BCLR BRA INY BNE BSET BCLR BRA #EPSTRT X=Tx pointer, Y=verify pointer SEND1 Send first data to target #0 X points at $0000 after last VERF Skip send if no more SEND1 Send another data char SCSR RDRF VERF Wait for Rx ready SCDR Get char and clr RDRF 0,Y Does char verify ? VERFOK Skip error if OK PORTB (RED+GREEN) Turn off LEDs DUNPRG Done (programming failed) Advance verify pointer Continue till all done Grn LED ON
DATALP PORTB GREEN
PORTB (RESET+RED) Red OFF, apply reset * Done so just hang
************************************************** * Subroutine to get & send an SCI char. Also * advances pointer (X). ************************************************** B66B A600 SEND1 LDAA 0,X Get a character B66D 132E80FC TRDYLP BRCLR SCSR TDRE TRDYLP Wait for TDRE B671 972F STAA SCDR Send character B673 08 INX Advance pointer B674 39 RTS ** Return **
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 300 MOTOROLA
Application Note
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104
B675 8604 B677 B71028
B67A 7EBF00 B67D
************************************************** * Program to be bootloaded to target '711E9 ************************************************** BLPROG LDAA #$04 Pattern for DWOM off, no SPI STAA $1028 Turns off DWOM in target MCU * NOTE: Can't use direct addressing in target MCU because * regs are located at $1000. JMP PROGRAM Jumps to EPROM prog routine ENDBPR EQU *
Symbol Table: Symbol Name BEGIN BLLOOP BLPROG DATALP DLYLP DLYLP2 DUNPRG ENDBPR EPSTRT GREEN INIT PORTB PORTE PROGRAM RDRF RED RESET SCDR SCSR SEND1 SPCR TDRE TRDYLP VERF VERFOK WT4BRK WT4FF WT4VPP
Value B600 B616 B675 B648 B620 B637 B666 B67D D000 0001 103D 0004 000A BF00 0020 0002 0080 002F 002E B66B 0028 0080 B66D B64F B65F B60B B627 B630
Def.# *00029 *00038 *00099 *00068 *00046 *00059 *00083 *00104 *00023 *00015 *00009 *00011 *00016 *00022 *00020 *00014 *00013 *00021 *00017 *00090 *00010 *00019 *00091 *00071 *00078 *00034 *00053 *00057
Line Number Cross Reference
00040 00037 00079 00047 00063 00076 00039 00055 00075 00029 00033 00059 00103 00034 00058 00032 00036 00034 00038 00031 00091 00091 00069 00074 00034 00053 00060
00066 00081 00058 00061 00075 00081 00083
00053 00061 00083 00049 00048 00067
00071 00075 00083 00054 00072 00092 00053 00071 00091 00070
00071
Errors: Labels: Last Program Address: Last Storage Address: Program Bytes: Storage Bytes:
None 28 $B67C $0000 $007D $0000
125 0
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 301
Application Note Driving Boot Mode from a Personal Computer
In this example, a personal computer is used as the host to drive the bootloader of an MC68HC711E9. An M68HC11 EVBU is used for the target MC68HC711E9. A large program is transferred from the personal computer into the EPROM of the target MC68HC711E9.
Hardware
Figure 7 shows a small modification to the EVBU to accommodate the 12-volt (nominal) EPROM programming voltage. The XIRQ pin is connected to a pullup resistor, two jumpers, and the 60-pin connectors, P4 and P5. The object of the modification is to isolate the XIRQ pin and then connect it to the programming power supply. Carefully cut the trace on the solder side of the EVBU as indicated in Figure 7. This disconnects the pullup resistor RN1 D from XIRQ but leaves P4-18, P5-18, and jumpers J7 and J14 connected so the EVBU can still be used for other purposes after programming is done. Remove any fabricated jumpers from J7 and J14. The EVBU normally has a jumper at J7 to support the trace function Figure 8 shows a small circuit that is added to the wire-wrap area of the EVBU. The 3-terminal jumper allows the XIRQ line to be connected to either the programming power supply or to a substitute pullup resistor for XIRQ. The 100-ohm resistor is a current limiter to protect the 12-volt input of the MCU. The resistor and LED connected to P5 pin 9 (port C bit 0) is an optional indicator that lights when programming is complete.
Software
BASIC was chosen as the programming language due to its readability and availability in parallel versions on both the IBM PC and the Macintosh. The program demonstrates several programming techniques for use with an M68HC11 and is not necessarily intended to be a finished, commercial program. For example, there is little error checking, and the user interface is elementary. A complete listing of the BASIC program is included in Listing 2. BASIC Program for Personal Computer with moderate comments. The following paragraphs include

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines. Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computers, Inc.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 302 MOTOROLA
Application Note
a more detailed discussion of the program as it pertains to communicating with and programming the target MC68HC711E9. Lines 25-45 initialize and define the variables and array used in the program. Changes to this section would allow for other programs to be downloaded.
VDD
47K NORMAL EVBU OPERATION 100 +12.25 V + PROGRAMMING POWER COMMON 20 F PROGRAM EPROM JUMPER
TO P5-18 (XIRQ/V ) PPE
PC0 P5-9 1K LED
Figure 8. PC-to-MCU Programming Circuit Lines 50-95 read in the small bootloader from DATA statements at the end of the listing. The source code for this bootloader is presented in the DATA statements. The bootloaded code makes port C bit 0 low, initializes the X and Y registers for use by the EPROM programming utility routine contained in the boot ROM, and then jumps to that routine. The hexadecimal values read in from the DATA statements are converted to binary values by a subroutine. The binary values are then saved as one string (BOOTCODE$). The next long section of code (lines 97-1250) reads in the S records from an external disk file (in this case, BUF34.S19), converts them to integer, and saves them in an array. The techniques used in this section show how to convert ASCII S records to binary form that can be sent (bootloaded) to an M68HC11.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 303
Application Note
This S-record translator only looks for the S1 records that contain the actual object code. All other S-record types are ignored. When an S1 record is found (lines 1000-1024), the next two characters form the hex byte giving the number of hex bytes to follow. This byte is converted to integer by the same subroutine that converted the bootloaded code from the DATA statements. This BYTECOUNT is adjusted by subtracting 3, which accounts for the address and checksum bytes and leaves just the number of object-code bytes in the record. Starting at line 1100, the 2-byte (4-character) starting address is converted to decimal. This address is the starting address for the object code bytes to follow. An index into the CODE% array is formed by subtracting the base address initialized at the start of the program from the starting address for this S record. A FOR-NEXT loop starting at line 1130 converts the object code bytes to decimal and saves them in the CODE% array. When all the object code bytes have been converted from the current S record, the program loops back to find the next S1 record. A problem arose with the BASIC programming technique used. The draft versions of this program tried saving the object code bytes directly as binary in a string array. This caused "Out of Memory" or "Out of String Space" errors on both a 2-Mbyte Macintosh and a 640-Kbyte PC. The solution was to make the array an integer array and perform the integerto-binary conversion on each byte as it is sent to the target part. The one compromise made to accommodate both Macintosh and PC versions of BASIC is in lines 1500 and 1505. Use line 1500 and comment out line 1505 if the program is to be run on a Macintosh, and, conversely, use line 1505 and comment out line 1500 if a PC is used. After the COM port is opened, the code to be bootloaded is modified by adding the $FF to the start of the string. $FF synchronizes the bootloader in the MC68HC711E9 to 1200 baud. The entire string is simply sent to the COM port by PRINTing the string. This is possible since the string is actually queued in BASIC's COM buffer, and the operating system takes care of sending the bytes out one at a time. The M68HC11 echoes the
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 304 MOTOROLA
Application Note
data received for verification. No automatic verification is provided, though the data is printed to the screen for manual verification. Once the MCU has received this bootloaded code, the bootloader automatically jumps to it. The small bootloaded program in turn includes a jump to the EPROM programming routine in the boot ROM. Refer to the previous explanation of the EPROM Programming Utility for the following discussion. The host system sends the first byte to be programmed through the COM port to the SCI of the MCU. The SCI port on the MCU buffers one byte while receiving another byte, increasing the throughput of the EPROM programming operation by sending the second byte while the first is being programmed. When the first byte has been programmed, the MCU reads the EPROM location and sends the result back to the host system. The host then compares what was actually programmed to what was originally sent. A message indicating which byte is being verified is displayed in the lower half of the screen. If there is an error, it is displayed at the top of the screen. As soon as the first byte is verified, the third byte is sent. In the meantime, the MCU has already started programming the second byte. This process of verifying and queueing a byte continues until the host finishes sending data. If the programming is completely successful, no error messages will have been displayed at the top of the screen. Subroutines follow the end of the program to handle some of the repetitive tasks. These routines are short, and the commenting in the source code should be sufficient explanation.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 305
Application Note
Modifications This example programmed version 3.4 of the BUFFALO monitor into the EPROM of an MC68HC711E9; the changes to the BASIC program to download some other program are minor. The necessary changes are: 1. In line 30, the length of the program to be downloaded must be assigned to the variable CODESIZE%.
2. Also in line 30, the starting address of the program is assigned to the variable ADRSTART. 3. In line 9570, the start address of the program is stored in the third and fourth items in that DATA statement in hexadecimal. 4. If any changes are made to the number of bytes in the boot code in the DATA statements in lines 9500-9580, then the new count must be set in the variable "BOOTCOUNT" in line 25.
Operation
Configure the EVBU for boot mode operation by putting a jumper at J3. Ensure that the trace command jumper at J7 is not installed because this would connect the 12-V programming voltage to the OC5 output of the MCU. Connect the EVBU to its dc power supply. When it is time to program the MCU EPROM, turn on the 12-volt programming power supply to the new circuitry in the wire-wrap area. Connect the EVBU serial port to the appropriate serial port on the host system. For the Macintosh, this is the modem port with a modem cable. For the MS-DOS computer, it is connected to COM1 with a straight through or modem cable. Power up the host system and start the BASIC program. If the program has not been compiled, this is accomplished from within the appropriate BASIC compiler or interpreter. Power up the EVBU. Answer the prompt for filename with either a [RETURN] to accept the default shown or by typing in a new filename and pressing [RETURN].
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 306 MOTOROLA
Application Note
The program will inform the user that it is working on converting the file from S records to binary. This process will take from 30 seconds to a few minutes, depending on the computer. A prompt reading, "Comm port open?" will appear at the end of the file conversion. This is the last chance to ensure that everything is properly configured on the EVBU. Pressing [RETURN] will send the bootcode to the target MC68HC711E9. The program then informs the user that the bootload code is being sent to the target, and the results of the echoing of this code are displayed on the screen. Another prompt reading "Programming is ready to begin. Are you?" will appear. Turn on the 12-volt programming power supply and press [RETURN] to start the actual programming of the target EPROM. A count of the byte being verified will be updated continually on the screen as the programming progresses. Any failures will be flagged as they occur. When programming is complete, a message will be displayed as well as a prompt requesting the user to press [RETURN] to quit. Turn off the 12-volt programming power supply before turning off 5 volts to the EVBU.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 307
Application Note Listing 2. BASIC Program for Personal Computer
1 ' *********************************************************************** 2'* 3'* E9BUF.BAS - A PROGRAM TO DEMONSTRATE THE USE OF THE BOOT MODE 4'* ON THE HC11 BY PROGRAMMING AN HC711E9 WITH 5'* BUFFALO 3.4 6'* 7'* REQUIRES THAT THE S-RECORDS FOR BUFFALO (BUF34.S19) 8'* BE AVAILABLE IN THE SAME DIRECTORY OR FOLDER 9'* 10 '* THIS PROGRAM HAS BEEN RUN BOTH ON A MS-DOS COMPUTER 11 '* USING QUICKBASIC 4.5 AND ON A MACINTOSH USING 12 '* QUICKBASIC 1.0. 14 '* 15 '************************************************************************ 25 H$ = "0123456789ABCDEF" 'STRING TO USE FOR HEX CONVERSIONS 30 DEFINT B, I: CODESIZE% = 8192: ADRSTART= 57344! 35 BOOTCOUNT = 25 'NUMBER OF BYTES IN BOOT CODE 40 DIM CODE%(CODESIZE%) 'BUFFALO 3.4 IS 8K BYTES LONG 45 BOOTCODE$ = "" 'INITIALIZE BOOTCODE$ TO NULL 49 REM ***** READ IN AND SAVE THE CODE TO BE BOOT LOADED ***** 50 FOR I = 1 TO BOOTCOUNT '# OF BYTES IN BOOT CODE 55 READ Q$ 60 A$ = MID$(Q$, 1, 1) 65 GOSUB 7000 'CONVERTS HEX DIGIT TO DECIMAL 70 TEMP = 16 * X 'HANG ON TO UPPER DIGIT 75 A$ = MID$(Q$, 2, 1) 80 GOSUB 7000 85 TEMP = TEMP + X 90 BOOTCODE$ = BOOTCODE$ + CHR$(TEMP) 'BUILD BOOT CODE 95 NEXT I 96 REM ***** S-RECORD CONVERSION STARTS HERE ***** 97 FILNAM$="BUF34.S19" 'DEFAULT FILE NAME FOR S-RECORDS 100 CLS 105 PRINT "Filename.ext of S-record file to be downloaded (";FILNAM$;") "; 107 INPUT Q$ 110 IF Q$<>"" THEN FILNAM$=Q$ 120 OPEN FILNAM$ FOR INPUT AS #1 130 PRINT : PRINT "Converting "; FILNAM$; " to binary..." 999 REM ***** SCANS FOR 'S1' RECORDS ***** 1000 GOSUB 6000 'GET 1 CHARACTER FROM INPUT FILE 1010 IF FLAG THEN 1250 'FLAG IS EOF FLAG FROM SUBROUTINE 1020 IF A$ <> "S" THEN 1000 1022 GOSUB 6000 1024 IF A$ <> "1" THEN 1000 1029 REM ***** S1 RECORD FOUND, NEXT 2 HEX DIGITS ARE THE BYTE COUNT ***** 1030 GOSUB 6000 1040 GOSUB 7000 'RETURNS DECIMAL IN X
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 308 MOTOROLA
Application Note
1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1099 1100 1102 1104 1106 1108 1110 1112 1114 1116 1118 1120 1122 1124 1129 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1250 1499 1500 1505 1510 1512 1513 1514 1515 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1564 1565 1570 1590 1595 1597
BYTECOUNT = 16 * X 'ADJUST FOR HIGH NIBBLE GOSUB 6000 GOSUB 7000 BYTECOUNT = BYTECOUNT + X 'ADD LOW NIBBLE BYTECOUNT = BYTECOUNT - 3 'ADJUST FOR ADDRESS + CHECKSUM REM ***** NEXT 4 HEX DIGITS BECOME THE STARTING ADDRESS FOR THE DATA ***** GOSUB 6000 'GET FIRST NIBBLE OF ADDRESS GOSUB 7000 'CONVERT TO DECIMAL ADDRESS= 4096 * X GOSUB 6000 'GET NEXT NIBBLE GOSUB 7000 ADDRESS= ADDRESS+ 256 * X GOSUB 6000 GOSUB 7000 ADDRESS= ADDRESS+ 16 * X GOSUB 6000 GOSUB 7000 ADDRESS= ADDRESS+ X ARRAYCNT = ADDRESS-ADRSTART 'INDEX INTO ARRAY REM ***** CONVERT THE DATA DIGITS TO BINARY AND SAVE IN THE ARRAY ***** FOR I = 1 TO BYTECOUNT GOSUB 6000 GOSUB 7000 Y = 16 * X 'SAVE UPPER NIBBLE OF BYTE GOSUB 6000 GOSUB 7000 Y=Y+X 'ADD LOWER NIBBLE CODE%(ARRAYCNT) = Y 'SAVE BYTE IN ARRAY ARRAYCNT = ARRAYCNT + 1 'INCREMENT ARRAY INDEX NEXT I GOTO 1000 CLOSE 1 REM ***** DUMP BOOTLOAD CODE TO PART ***** 'OPEN "R",#2,"COM1:1200,N,8,1" 'Macintosh COM statement OPEN "COM1:1200,N,8,1,CD0,CS0,DS0,RS" FOR RANDOM AS #2 'DOS COM statement INPUT "Comm port open"; Q$ WHILE LOC(2) >0 'FLUSH INPUT BUFFER GOSUB 8020 WEND PRINT : PRINT "Sending bootload code to target part..." A$ = CHR$(255) + BOOTCODE$ 'ADD HEX FF TO SET BAUD RATE ON TARGET HC11 GOSUB 6500 PRINT FOR I = 1 TO BOOTCOUNT '# OF BYTES IN BOOT CODE BEING ECHOED GOSUB 8000 K=ASC(B$):GOSUB 8500 PRINT "Character #"; I; " received = "; HX$ NEXT I PRINT "Programming is ready to begin.": INPUT "Are you ready"; Q$ CLS WHILE LOC(2) > 0 'FLUSH INPUT BUFFER
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 309
Application Note
1598 1599 1600 1610 1620 1625 1630 1635 1640 1650 1660 1664 1665 1666 1668 1669 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1713 1714 1715 1716 1720 4900 4910 5000 5900 5910 5930 5940 6000 6010 6020 6030 6490 6492 6494 6496 6500 6510 6590 6594 6596 7000 7010 7020 7030 GOSUB 8020 WEND XMT = 0: RCV = 0 'POINTERS TO XMIT AND RECEIVE BYTES A$ = CHR$(CODE%(XMT)) GOSUB 6500 'SEND FIRST BYTE FOR I = 1 TO CODESIZE% - 1 'ZERO BASED ARRAY 0 -> CODESIZE-1 A$ = CHR$(CODE%(I)) 'SEND SECOND BYTE TO GET ONE IN QUEUE GOSUB 6500 'SEND IT GOSUB 8000 'GET BYTE FOR VERIFICATION RCV = I - 1 LOCATE 10,1:PRINT "Verifying byte #"; I; " " IF CHR$(CODE%(RCV)) = B$ THEN 1670 K=CODE%(RCV):GOSUB 8500 LOCATE 1,1:PRINT "Byte #"; I; " ", " - Sent "; HX$; K=ASC(B$):GOSUB 8500 PRINT " Received "; HX$; NEXT I GOSUB 8000 'GET BYTE FOR VERIFICATION RCV = CODESIZE% - 1 LOCATE 10,1:PRINT "Verifying byte #"; CODESIZE%; " " IF CHR$(CODE%(RCV)) = B$ THEN 1720 K=CODE(RCV):GOSUB 8500 LOCATE 1,1:PRINT "Byte #"; CODESIZE%; " ", " - Sent "; HX$; K=ASC(B$):GOSUB 8500 PRINT " Received "; HX$; LOCATE 8, 1: PRINT : PRINT "Done!!!!" CLOSE INPUT "Press [RETURN] to quit...", Q$ END '*********************************************************************** '* SUBROUTINE TO READ IN ONE BYTE FROM A DISK FILE '* RETURNS BYTE IN A$ '*********************************************************************** FLAG = 0 IF EOF(1) THEN FLAG = 1: RETURN A$ = INPUT$(1, #1) RETURN '*********************************************************************** '* SUBROUTINE TO SEND THE STRING IN A$ OUT TO THE DEVICE '* OPENED AS FILE #2. '*********************************************************************** PRINT #2, A$; RETURN '*********************************************************************** '* SUBROUTINE THAT CONVERTS THE HEX DIGIT IN A$ TO AN INTEGER '*********************************************************************** X = INSTR(H$, A$) IF X = 0 THEN FLAG = 1 X=X-1 RETURN
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 310 MOTOROLA
Application Note
7990 7992 7994 7996 7998 7999 8000 8005 8010 8020 8030 8490 8491 8492 8493 8494 8500 8510 8520 8530 9499 9500 9510 9520 9530 9540 9550 9560 9570 9580 9590
'********************************************************************** '* SUBROUTINE TO READ IN ONE BYTE THROUGH THE COMM PORT OPENED '* AS FILE #2. WAITS INDEFINITELY FOR THE BYTE TO BE '* RECEIVED. SUBROUTINE WILL BE ABORTED BY ANY '* KEYBOARD INPUT. RETURNS BYTE IN B$. USES Q$. '********************************************************************** WHILE LOC(2) = 0 'WAIT FOR COMM PORT INPUT Q$ = INKEY$: IF Q$ <> "" THEN 4900 'IF ANY KEY PRESSED, THEN ABORT WEND B$ = INPUT$(1, #2) RETURN '************************************************************************ '* DECIMAL TO HEX CONVERSION '* INPUT: K - INTEGER TO BE CONVERTED '* OUTPUT: HX$ - TWO CHARACTER STRING WITH HEX CONVERSION '************************************************************************ IF K > 255 THEN HX$="Too big":GOTO 8530 HX$=MID$(H$,K\16+1,1) 'UPPER NIBBLE HX$=HX$+MID$(H$,(K MOD 16)+1,1) 'LOWER NIBBLE RETURN '******************** BOOT CODE **************************************** DATA 86, 23 'LDAA #$23 DATA B7, 10, 02 'STAA OPT2 make port C wire or DATA 86, FE 'LDAA #$FE DATA B7, 10, 03 'STAA PORTC light 1 LED on port C bit 0 DATA C6, FF 'LDAB #$FF DATA F7, 10, 07 'STAB DDRC make port C outputs DATA CE, 0F, A0 'LDX #4000 2msec at 2MHz DATA 18, CE, E0, 00 'LDY #$E000 Start of BUFFALO 3.4 DATA 7E, BF, 00 'JMP $BF00 EPROM routine start address '***********************************************************************
Common Bootstrap Mode Problems
It is not unusual for a user to encounter problems with bootstrap mode because it is new to many users. By knowing some of the common difficulties, the user can avoid them or at least recognize and quickly correct them.
Reset Conditions vs. Conditions as Bootloaded Program Starts
It is common to confuse the reset state of systems and control bits with the state of these systems and control bits when a bootloaded program in RAM starts.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 311
Application Note
Between these times, the bootloader program is executed, which changes the states of some systems and control bits: * * * * * * The SCI system is initialized and turned on (Rx and Tx). The SCI system has control of the PD0 and PD1 pins. Port D outputs are configured for wire-OR operation. The stack pointer is initialized to the top of RAM. Time has passed (two or more SCI character times). Timer has advanced from its reset count value.
Users also forget that bootstrap mode is a special mode. Thus, privileged control bits are accessible, and write protection for some registers is not in effect. The bootstrap ROM is in the memory map. The DISR bit in the TEST1 control register is set, which disables resets from the COP and clock monitor systems. Since bootstrap is a special mode, these conditions can be changed by software. The bus can even be switched from single-chip mode to expanded mode to gain access to external memories and peripherals.
Connecting RxD to VSS Does Not Cause the SCI to Receive a Break
To force an immediate jump to the start of EEPROM, the bootstrap firmware looks for the first received character to be $00 (or break). The data reception logic in the SCI looks for a 1-to-0 transition on the RxD pin to synchronize to the beginning of a receive character. If the RxD pin is tied to ground, no 1-to-0 transition occurs. The SCI transmitter sends a break character when the bootloader firmware starts, and this break character can be fed back to the RxD pin to cause the jump to EEPROM. Since TxD is configured as an open-drain output, a pullup resistor is required.
$FF Character Is Required before Loading into RAM
The initial character (usually $FF) that sets the download baud rate is often forgotten.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 312 MOTOROLA
MOTOROLA 313
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0
Table 2. Summary of Boot-ROM-Related Features
BOOT MCU Type Mask Set ROM I.D. Security I.D. Revision (@$BFD2,3) (@$BFD4,5) (@$BFD1) -- -- -- -- $00 $42(B) -- -- -- -- -- -- $41(A) $42(B) $30(0) $42(B) -- -- -- -- ROM I.D. # $0000 $0000 -- ROM I.D. # ROM I.D. # ROM I.D. # ROM I.D. # $0000 $0000 ROM I.D. # $0000 Mask set # Mask set # Mask set # Mask set # $11D3 $71D3 $E2E2 $E25C $E9E9 $E9E9 $E9E9 $E95C $71E9 $F1F1 $044B $744B -- -- -- Yes -- -- -- Yes -- -- -- Yes -- -- -- -- Download Length JMP on BRK or $00(1) $B600 $B600 $B600 $B600 $F000-ROM $F000-EPROM $B600 $B600 $B600 $B600 $B600 $B600 $B600 $FE00 $0D80 $0D80 JMP to RAM (2) $0000 $0000 $0000 $0000 -- -- $0000 $0000 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Default RAM Location $0000-FF $0000-FF $0000-FF $0000-FF $0040-FF $0040-FF $0000-FF $0000-FF $0000-1FF $0000-1FF $0000-1FF $0000-1FF $0000-1FF $0000-3FF $0080-37F $0080-37F PROGRAM(3) and UPLOAD(4) Notes Utility -- -- -- -- -- Yes -- -- -- -- -- -- Yes -- -- Yes
(6), (7) (6), (8) (6), (8) (5) (5) (5) (5) (6) (6) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5)
MCU Part
MC68HC11A0 MC68HC11A1 MC68HC11A8 MC68SEC11A8 MC68HC11D3 MC68HC711D3 MC68HC811E2 MC68SEC811E2 MC68HC11E0 MC68HC11E1 MC68HC11E9 MC68SEC11E9 MC68HC711E9 MC68HC11F1 MC68HC11K4 MC68HC711K4
256 256 256 256 0-192 0-192 256 256 0-512 0-512 0-512 0-512 0-512 0-1024 0-768 0-768
1. By sending $00 or a break as the first SCI character after reset in bootstrap mode, a jump (JMP) is executed to the address in this table rather than doing a download. Unless otherwise noted, this address is the start of EEPROM. Tying RxD to TxD and using a pullup resistor from TxD to VDD will cause the SCI to see a break as the first received character. 2. If $55 is received as the first character after reset in bootstrap mode, a jump (JMP) is executed to the start of on-chip RAM rather than doing a download. This $55 character must be sent at the default baud rate (7812 baud @ E = 2 MHz). For devices with variable-length download, the same effect can be achieved by sending $FF and no other SCI characters. After four SCI character times, the download terminates, and a jump (JMP) to the start of RAM is executed. The jump to RAM feature is only useful if the RAM was previously loaded with a meaningful program. 3. A callable utility subroutine is included in the bootstrap ROM of the indicated versions to program bytes of on-chip EPROM with data received via the SCI. 4. A callable utility subroutine is included in the bootstrap ROM of the indicated versions to upload contents of on-chip memory to a host computer via the SCI. 5. The complete listing for this bootstrap ROM may be found in the M68HC11 Reference Manual, Motorola document order number M68HC11RM/AD. 6. The complete listing for this bootstrap ROM is available in the freeware area of the Motorola Web site. 7. Due to the extra program space needed for EEPROM security on this device, there are no pseudo-vectors for SCI, SPI, PAIF, PAOVF, TOF, OC5F, or OC4F interrupts. 8. This bootloader extends the automatic software detection of baud rates to include 9600 baud at 2-MHz E-clock rate.
Application Note
Application Note
Original M68HC11 Versions Required Exactly 256 Bytes to be Downloaded to RAM Even users that know about the 256 bytes of download data sometimes forget the initial $FF that makes the total number of bytes required for the entire download operation equal to 256 + 1 or 257 bytes.
Variable-Length Download
When on-chip RAM surpassed 256 bytes, the time required to serially load this many characters became more significant. The variable-length download feature allows shorter programs to be loaded without sacrificing compatibility with earlier fixed-length download versions of the bootloader. The end of a download is indicated by an idle RxD line for at least four character times. If a personal computer is being used to send the download data to the MCU, there can be problems keeping characters close enough together to avoid tripping the end-of-download detect mechanism. Using 1200 as the baud rate rather than the faster default rate may help this problem. Assemblers often produce S-record encoded programs which must be converted to binary before bootloading them to the MCU. The process of reading S-record data from a file and translating it to binary can be slow, depending on the personal computer and the programming language used for the translation. One strategy that can be used to overcome this problem is to translate the file into binary and store it into a RAM array before starting the download process. Data can then be read and downloaded without the translation or file-read delays. The end-of-download mechanism goes into effect when the initial $FF is received to set the baud rate. Any amount of time may pass between reset and when the $FF is sent to start the download process.
EPROM/OTP Versions of M68HC11 Have an EPROM Emulation Mode
The conditions that configure the MCU for EPROM emulation mode are essentially the same as those for resetting the MCU in bootstrap mode. While RESET is low and mode select pins are configured for bootstrap mode (low), the MCU is configured for EPROM emulation mode.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 314 MOTOROLA
Application Note
The port pins that are used for EPROM data I/O lines may be inputs or outputs, depending on the pin that is emulating the EPROM output enable pin (OE). To make these data pins appear as high-impedance inputs as they would on a non-EPROM part in reset, connect the PB7/(OE) pin to a pullup resistor.
Bootloading a Program to Perform a ROM Checksum
The bootloader ROM must be turned off before performing the checksum program. To remove the boot ROM from the memory map, clear the RBOOT bit in the HPRIO register. This is normally a writeprotected bit that is 0, but in bootstrap mode it is reset to 1 and can be written. If the boot ROM is not disabled, the checksum routine will read the contents of the boot ROM rather than the user's mask ROM or EPROM at the same addresses.
Inherent Delays Caused by Double Buffering of SCI Data
This problem is troublesome in cases where one MCU is bootloading to another MCU. Because of transmitter double buffering, there may be one character in the serial shifter as a new character is written into the transmit data register. In cases such as downloading in which this 2-character pipeline is kept full, a 2-character time delay occurs between when a character is written to the transmit data register and when that character finishes transmitting. A little more than one more character time delay occurs between the target MCU receiving the character and echoing it back. If the master MCU waits for the echo of each downloaded character before sending the next one, the download process takes about twice as long as it would if transmission is treated as a separate process or if verify data is ignored.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 315
Application Note Boot ROM Variations
Different versions of the M68HC11 have different versions of the bootstrap ROM program. Table 3 summarizes the features of the boot ROMs in 16 members of the M68HC11 Family. The boot ROMs for the MC68HC11F1, the MC68HC711K4, and the MC68HC11K4 allow additional choices of baud rates for bootloader communications. For the three new baud rates, the first character used to determine the baud rate is not $FF as it was in earlier M68HC11s. The intercharacter delay that terminates the variable-length download is also different for these new baud rates. Table 3 shows the synchronization characters, delay times, and baud rates as they relate to E-clock frequency.
Commented Boot ROM Listing
Listing 3. MC68HC711E9 Bootloader ROM contains a complete commented listing of the boot ROM program in the MC68HC711E9 version of the M68HC11. Other versions can be found in Appendix B of the M68HC11 Reference Manual and in the freeware area of the Motorola Web site. Table 3. Bootloader Baud Rates
Sync Character $FF $FF $F0 $FD $FD Timeout Delay 4 characters 4 characters 4.9 characters 17.3 characters 13 characters Baud Rates at E Clock = 2 MHz 2.1 MHz 3 MHz 3.15 MHz 4 MHz 4.2 MHz 7812 1200 9600 5208 3906 8192 1260 10,080 5461 4096 11,718 1800 14,400 7812 5859 12,288 1890 15,120 8192 6144 15,624 2400 19,200 10,416 7812 16,838 2520 20,160 10,922 8192
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 316 MOTOROLA
Application Note
Listing 3. MC68HC711E9 Bootloader ROM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 **************************************************** * BOOTLOADER FIRMWARE FOR 68HC711E9 - 21 Aug 89 **************************************************** * Features of this bootloader are... * * Auto baud select between 7812.5 and 1200 (8 MHz) * 0 - 512 byte variable length download * Jump to EEPROM at $B600 if 1st download byte = $00 * PROGRAM - Utility subroutine to program EPROM * UPLOAD - Utility subroutine to dump memory to host * Mask I.D. at $BFD4 = $71E9 **************************************************** * Revision A * * Fixed bug in PROGRAM routine where the first byte * programmed into the EPROM was not transmitted for * verify. * Also added to PROGRAM routine a skip of bytes * which were already programmed to the value desired. * * This new version allows variable length download * by quitting reception of characters when an idle * of at least four character times occurs * **************************************************** * EQUATES FOR USE WITH INDEX OFFSET = $1000 * PORTD EQU $08 TCNT EQU $0E TOC1 EQU $16 TFLG1 EQU $23 * BIT EQUATES FOR TFLG1 OC1F EQU $80 * SPCR EQU $28 (FOR DWOM BIT) BAUD EQU $2B SCCR2 EQU $2D SCSR EQU $2E SCDAT EQU $2F PPROG EQU $3B * BIT EQUATES FOR PPROG ELAT EQU $20 EPGM EQU $01 *
0008 000E 0016 0023 0080 0028 002B 002D 002E 002F 003B 0020 0001
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 317
Application Note
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 * MEMORY * EEPMSTR EEPMEND * EPRMSTR EPRMEND * RAMSTR RAMEND CONFIGURATION EQUATES EQU EQU EQU EQU EQU EQU $B600 $B7FF $D000 $FFFF $0000 $01FF Start of EEPROM End of EEPROM Start of EPROM End of EPROM
B600 B7FF D000 FFFF 0000 01FF
0DB0 021B 1068
* DELAY CONSTANTS * DELAYS EQU 3504 DELAYF EQU 539 * PROGDEL EQU 4200 *
Delay at slow baud Delay at fast baud 2 ms programming delay At 2.1 MHz
BF00
**************************************************** ORG $BF00 **************************************************** * Next two instructions provide a predictable place * to call PROGRAM and UPLOAD even if the routines * change size in future versions. * PROGRAM JMP PRGROUT EPROM programming utility UPLOAD EQU * Upload utility
BF00 7EBF13 BF03
**************************************************** * UPLOAD - Utility subroutine to send data from * inside the MCU to the host via the SCI interface. * Prior to calling UPLOAD set baud rate, turn on SCI * and set Y=first address to upload. * Bootloader leaves baud set, SCI enabled, and * Y pointing at EPROM start ($D000) so these default * values do not have to be changed typically. * Consecutive locations are sent via SCI in an * infinite loop. Reset stops the upload process. **************************************************** BF03 CE1000 LDX #$1000 Point to internal registers BF06 18A600 UPLOOP LDAA 0,Y Read byte BF09 1F2E80FC BRCLR SCSR,X $80 * Wait for TDRE BF0D A72F STAA SCDAT,X Send it BF0F 1808 INY BF11 20F3 BRA UPLOOP Next...
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 318 MOTOROLA
Application Note
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149
BF13 BF13 3C BF14 CE1000 BF17
**************************************************** * PROGRAM - Utility subroutine to program EPROM. * Prior to calling PROGRAM set baud rate, turn on SCI * set X=2ms prog delay constant, and set Y=first * address to program. SP must point to RAM. * Bootloader leaves baud set, SCI enabled, X=4200 * and Y pointing at EPROM start ($D000) so these * default values don't have to be changed typically. * Delay constant in X should be equivalent to 2 ms * at 2.1 MHz X=4200; at 1 MHz X=2000. * An external voltage source is required for EPROM * programming. * This routine uses 2 bytes of stack space * Routine does not return. Reset to exit. **************************************************** PRGROUT EQU * PSHX Save program delay constant LDX #$1000 Point to internal registers * Send $FF to indicate ready for program data
BF17 1F2E80FC BF1B 86FF BF1D A72F BF1F BF1F BF23 BF25 BF28 BF2A BF2C BF2E BF31 BF33 BF35 BF36 BF37 BF38 BF39 BF3B BF3D BF3F WAIT1 1F2E20FC E62F 18E100 271D 8620 A73B 18E700 8621 A73B 32 33 37 36 E30E ED16 8680 A723
BRCLR LDAA STAA EQU BRCLR LDAB CMPB BEQ LDAA STAA STAB LDAA STAA PULA PULB PSHB PSHA ADDD STD LDAA STAA BRCLR CLR * DONEIT
SCSR,X $80 * #$FF SCDAT,X * SCSR,X $20 * SCDAT,X $0,Y DONEIT #ELAT PPROG,X 0,Y #ELAT+EPGM PPROG,X
Wait for TDRE
Wait for RDRF Get received byte See if already programmed If so, skip prog cycle Put EPROM in prog mode Write the data Turn on prog voltage Pull delay constant into D-reg But also keep delay keep delay on stack Delay const + present TCNT Schedule OC1 (2ms delay) Clear any previous flag
TCNT,X TOC1,X #OC1F TFLG1,X
BF41 1F2380FC BF45 6F3B BF47 BF47 BF4B BF4E BF50 BF52
TFLG1,X OC1F * Wait for delay to expire PPROG,X Turn off prog voltage
1F2E80FC 18A600 A72F 1808 20CB
EQU * BRCLR SCSR,X $80 * Wait for TDRE LDAA $0,Y Read from EPROM and... STAA SCDAT,X Xmit for verify INY Point at next location BRA WAIT1 Back to top for next * Loops indefinitely as long as more data sent.
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 319
Application Note
150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 **************************************************** * Main bootloader starts here **************************************************** * RESET vector points to here BF54 BF54 BF57 BF5A BF5D BF60 BEGIN 8E01FF CE1000 1C2820 CCA20C A72B EQU * LDS #RAMEND Initialize stack pntr LDX #$1000 Point at internal regs BSET SPCR,X $20 Select port D wire-OR mode LDD #$A20C BAUD in A, SCCR2 in B STAA BAUD,X SCPx = /4, SCRx = /4 * Writing 1 to MSB of BAUD resets count chain STAB SCCR2,X Rx and Tx Enabled LDD #DELAYF Delay for fast baud rate STD TOC1,X Set as default delay * Send BREAK to BSET BRSET BCLR signal ready for download SCCR2,X $01 Set send break bit PORTD,X $01 * Wait for RxD pin to go low SCCR2,X $01 Clear send break bit
BF62 E72D BF64 CC021B BF67 ED16
BF69 BF6C BF70 BF73 BF73 BF77 BF79 BF7B BF7E BF7E BF80 BF82 BF85 BF88 BF8A BF8A BF8E BF8E BF90 BF90 BF94 BF95 BF96 BF97 BF99 BF9B BF9B BF9D BFA0 BFA2 BFA4 BFA8
1C2D01 1E0801FC 1D2D01 1F2E20FC A62F
BRCLR SCSR,X $20 * Wait for RDRF LDAA SCDAT,X Read data * Data will be $00 if BREAK OR $00 received 2603 BNE NOTZERO Bypass JMP if not 0 7EB600 JMP EEPMSTR Jump to EEPROM if it was 0 NOTZERO EQU * 81FF CMPA #$FF $FF will be seen as $FF 2708 BEQ BAUDOK If baud was correct * Or else change to /104 (/13 & /8) 1200 @ 2MHZ 1C2B33 BSET BAUD,X $33 Works because $22 -> $33 CC0DB0 LDD #DELAYS And switch to slower... ED16 STD TOC1,X delay constant BAUDOK EQU * 18CE0000 LDY #RAMSTR Point at start of RAM WAIT EC16 WTLOOP 1E2E2007 8F 09 8F 26F7 200F NEWONE A62F 18A700 A72F 1808 188C0200 26E4 EQU LDD EQU BRSET XGDX DEX XGDX BNE BRA EQU LDAA STAA STAA INY CPY BNE * TOC1,X Move delay constant to D * SCSR,X $20 NEWONE Exit loop if RDRF set Swap delay count to X Decrement count Swap back to D WTLOOP Loop if not timed out STAR Quit download on timeout * SCDAT,X $00,Y SCDAT,X #RAMEND+1 WAIT
Get received data Store to next RAM location Transmit it for handshake Point at next RAM location See if past end If not, Get another AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0
320
MOTOROLA
Application Note
203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212
BFAA STAR EQU * BFAA CE1068 LDX #PROGDEL Init X with programming delay BFAD 18CED000 LDY #EPRMSTR Init Y with EPROM start addr BFB1 7E0000 JMP RAMSTR ** EXIT to start of RAM ** BFB4 **************************************************** * Block fill unused bytes with zeros BFB4 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 0000000000 BSZ $BFD1-*
213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251
BFD1 41
BFD2 0000
BFD4 71E9
**************************************************** * Boot ROM revision level in ASCII * (ORG $BFD1) FCC "A" **************************************************** * Mask set I.D. ($0000 FOR EPROM PARTS) * (ORG $BFD2) FDB $0000 **************************************************** * '711E9 I.D. - Can be used to determine MCU type * (ORG $BFD4) FDB $71E9 **************************************************** * VECTORS - point to RAM for pseudo-vector JUMPs
BFD6 BFD8 BFDA BFDC BFDE BFE0 BFE2 BFE4 BFE6 BFE8 BFEA BFEC BFEE BFF0 BFF2 BFF4 BFF6 BFF8 BFFA BFFC BFFE C000
00C4 00C7 00CA 00CD 00D0 00D3 00D6 00D9 00DC 00DF 00E2 00E5 00E8 00EB 00EE 00F1 00F4 00F7 00FA 00FD BF54
FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB END
$100-60 $100-57 $100-54 $100-51 $100-48 $100-45 $100-42 $100-39 $100-36 $100-33 $100-30 $100-27 $100-24 $100-21 $100-18 $100-15 $100-12 $100-9 $100-6 $100-3 BEGIN
SCI SPI PULSE ACCUM INPUT EDGE PULSE ACCUM OVERFLOW TIMER OVERFLOW TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE 5 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE 4 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE 3 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE 2 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE 1 TIMER INPUT CAPTURE 3 TIMER INPUT CAPTURE 2 TIMER INPUT CAPTURE 1 REAL TIME INT IRQ XIRQ SWI ILLEGAL OP-CODE COP FAIL CLOCK MONITOR RESET
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 MOTOROLA 321
Application Note
Symbol Table: Symbol Name BAUD BAUDOK BEGIN DELAYF DELAYS DONEIT EEPMEND EEPMSTR ELAT EPGM EPRMEND EPRMSTR NEWONE NOTZERO OC1F PORTD PPROG PRGROUT PROGDEL PROGRAM RAMEND RAMSTR SCCR2 SCDAT SCSR SPCR STAR TCNT TFLG1 TOC1 UPLOAD UPLOOP WAIT WAIT1 WTLOOP Value 002B BF8A BF54 021B 0DB0 BF47 B7FF B600 0020 0001 FFFF D000 BF9B BF7E 0080 0008 003B BF13 1068 BF00 01FF 0000 002D 002F 002E 0028 BFAA 000E 0023 0016 BF03 BF06 BF8E BF1F BF90 Def.# *00037 *00183 *00155 *00061 *00060 *00142 *00050 *00049 *00043 *00044 *00053 *00052 *00196 *00176 *00034 *00029 *00041 *00110 *00063 *00074 *00056 *00055 *00038 *00040 *00039 *00036 *00204 *00030 *00032 *00031 *00075 *00089 *00186 *00120 *00188 Line Number Cross Reference 00160 00180 00178 00250 00163 00181 00124 00175 00125 00128 00128 00206 00189 00174 00136 00139 00168 00126 00129 00140 00074 00205 00156 00184 00162 00091 00090 00158 00194 00134 00137 00135 00093 00202 00147 00193 00201 00207 00167 00169 00118 00122 00145 00172 00197 00199 00116 00121 00143 00171 00189
00139 00164 00182 00187
Errors: Labels: Last Program Address: Last Storage Address: Program Bytes: Storage Bytes:
None 35 $BFFF $0000 $0100 $0000
256 0
AN1060 -- Rev. 1.0 322 MOTOROLA
Order this document by EB184/D
Motorola Semiconductor Engineering Bulletin
EB184
Enabling the Security Feature on the MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR
By Edgar Saenz Austin, Texas
Introduction
The PCbug11 software, needed along with the M68HC711E9PGMR to program MC68HC711E9 devices, is available from the download section of the Microcontroller Worldwide Web site http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/. Retrieve the file pcbug342.exe (a self-extracting archive) from the MCU11 directory. Some Motorola evaluation board products also are shipped with PCbug11.
NOTE:
For specific information about any of the PCbug11 commands, see the appropriate sections in the PCbug11 User's Manual (part number M68PCBUG11/D2), which is available from the Motorola Literature Distribution Center, as well as the Worldwide Web at http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/. The file is also on the software download system and is called pcbug11.pdf.
(c) Motorola, Inc., 1998
EB184
Engineering Bulletin To Execute the Program
Use this step-by-step procedure to program the MC68HC711E9 device.
Step 1
*
Before applying power to the programming board, connect the M68HC711E9PGMR serial port P2 to one of your PC COM ports with a standard 25-pin RS-232 cable. Do not use a null modem cable or adapter which swaps the transmit and receive signals between the connectors at each end of the cable. Place the MC68HC711E9 part in the PLCC socket on your board. Insert the part upside down with the notched corner pointing toward the red power LED. Make sure both S1 and S2 switches are turned off. Apply +5 volts to +5-V, +12 volts (at most +12.5 volts) to VPP, and ground to GND on your programmer board's power connector, P1. The remaining TXD/PD1 and RXD/PD0 connections are not used in this procedure. They are for gang programming MC68HC711E9 devices, which is discussed in the M68HC711E9PGMR Manual. You cannot gang program with PCbug11. Ensure that the "remove for multi-programming" jumper, J1, below the +5-V power switch has a fabricated jumper installed.
* * * *
*
Step 2
Apply power to the programmer board by moving the +5-V switch to the ON position. From a DOS command line prompt, start PCbug11this way: C:\PCBUG11\ > PCBUG11 -E PORT = 1 with the E9PGMR connected to COM1 or C:\PCBUG11\ > PCBUG11 -E PORT = 2 with the E9PGMR connected to COM2 PCbug11 only supports COM ports 1 and 2. If the proper connections are made and you have a high-quality cable, you should quickly get a
EB184 324 MOTOROLA
Engineering Bulletin
PCbug11 command prompt. If you do receive a Comms fault error, check the cable and board connections. Most PCbug11 communications problems can be traced to poorly made cables or bad board connections.
Step 3
PCbug11 defaults to base 10 for its input parameters. Change this to hexadecimal by typing: CONTROL BASE HEX.
Step 4
Clear the block protect register (BPROT) to allow programming of the MC68HC711E9 EEPROM. At the PCbug11 command prompt, type: MS 1035 00.
Step 5
The CONFIG register defaults to hexadecimal 103F on the MC68HC711E9. PCBUG11 needs adressing parameters to allow programming of a specific block of memory so the following parameter must be given. At the PCbug11 command prompt, type: EEPROM 0. Then type: EEPROM 103F 103F.
Step 6
Erase the CONFIG to allow byte programming. At the PCbug11 command prompt, type: EEPROM ERASE BULK 103F.
Step 7
You are now ready to download the program into the EEPROM and EPROM. At the PCbug11command prompt, type: LOADSC:\MYPROG\MYPROG.S19. For more details on programming the EPROM, read the engineering bulletin Programming MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 and the M68HC11EVB, Motorola document number EB187.
EB184 MOTOROLA 325
Engineering Bulletin
Step 8 You are now ready to enable the security feature on the MCHC711E9. At the PCbug11 command prompt type: MS 103F 05.
Step 9
After the programming operation is complete, verifyng the CONFIG on the MCHC711E9 is not possible because in bootstrap mode the default value is always forced.
Step 10
The part is now in secure mode and whatever code you loaded into EEPROM will be erased if you tried to bring the microcontroller up in either expanded mode or bootstrap mode.
NOTE: NOTE:
It is important to note that the microcontroller will work properly in secure mode only in single chip mode. If the part is placed in bootstrap or expanded, the code in EEPROM and RAM will be erased and the microcontroller cannot be reused. The security software will constantly read the NOSEC bit and lock the part.
EB184 326 MOTOROLA
Order this document by EB188
Motorola Semiconductor Engineering Bulletin
EB188
Enabling the Security Feature on M68HC811E2 Devices with PCbug11 on the M68HC711E9PGMR
By Edgar Saenz Austin, Texas
Introduction
The PCbug11 software, needed along with the M68HC711E9PGMR to program MC68HC811E2 devices, is available from the download section of the Microcontroller Worldwide Web site http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/. Retrieve the file pcbug342.exe (a self-extracting archive) from the MCU11 directory. Some Motorola evaluation board products also are shipped with PCbug11.
NOTE:
For specific information about any of the PCbug11 commands, see the appropriate sections in the PCbug11 User's Manual (part number M68PCBUG11/D2), which is available from the Motorola Literature Distribution Center, as well as the Worldwide Web at http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/. The file is also on the software download system and is called pcbug11.pdf.
(c) Motorola, Inc., 1998
EB188
Engineering Bulletin To Execute the Program
Once you have obtained PCbug11, use this step-by-step procedure.
Step 1
*
Before applying power to the programming board, connect the M68HC711E9PGMR serial port P2 to one of your PC COM ports with a standard 25 pin RS-232 cable. Do not use a null modem cable or adapter which swaps the transmit and receive signals between the connectors at each end of the cable. Place your MC68HC811E2 part in the PLCC socket on your board. Insert the part upside down with the notched corner pointing toward the red power LED. Make sure both S1 and S2 switches are turned off. Apply +5 volts to +5 volts and ground to GND on the programmer board's power connector, P1. Applying voltage to the VPP pin is not necessary.
* * * *
Step 2
Apply power to the programmer board by moving the +5-volt switch to the ON position. From a DOS command line prompt, start PCbug11 this way: * * C:\PCBUG11\> PCBUG11 -A PORT = 1 when the E9PGMR connected to COM1 or C:\PCBUG11\> PCBUG11 -A PORT = 2 when the E9PGMR connected to COM2
PCbug11only supports COM ports 1 and 2.
Step 3
PCbug11 defaults to base ten for its input parameters. Change this to hexadecimal by typing CONTROL BASE HEX
EB188
328
MOTOROLA
Engineering Bulletin
Step 4
Clear the block protect register (BPROT) to allow programming of the MC68HC811E2 EEPROM. At the PCbug11 command prompt, type MS 1035 00
Step 5
PCbug11 defaults to a 512-byte EEPROM array located at $B600. This must be changed since the EEPROM is, by default, located at $F800 on the MC68HC811E2. At the PCbug11 command prompt, type EEPROM 0 Then type: EEPROM F800 FFFF EEPROM 103F 103F This assumes you have not relocated the EEPROM by previously reprogramming the upper 4 bits of the CONFIG register. But if you have done this and your S records reside in an address range other than $F800 to $FFFF, you will need to first relocate the EEPROM.
Step 6
Erase the CONFIG to allow programming of NOSEC bit (bit 3). It is also recommended to program the EEPROM at this point before programming the CONFIG register. Refer to the engineering bulletin Programming MC68HC811E2 Devices with PCbug11 and the M68HC711E9PGMR, Motorola document number EB184. At the PCbug11command prompt, type EEPROM ERASE BULK 103F
EB188 MOTOROLA 329
Engineering Bulletin
Step 7 You are now ready to enable the security feature on the MCHC811E2. At the PCbug11 command prompt, type MS 103F 05 The value $05 assumes the EEPROM is to be mapped from $0800 to $0FFF.
Step 8
After the programming operation is complete, verifying the CONFIG on the MCHC811E2 is not possible because in bootstrap mode the default value is always forced.
Step 9
The part is now in secure mode and whatever code you loaded into EEPROM will be erased if you tried to bring the microcontroller up in either expanded mode or bootstrap mode. The microcontroller will work properly in the secure mode only in single chip mode.
NOTE:
If the part is placed in bootstrap mode or expanded mode, the code in EEPROM and RAM will be erased the microcontroller can be reused.
EB188 330 MOTOROLA
Order this document by EB296/D
Motorola Semiconductor Engineering Bulletin
EB296
Programming MC68HC711E9 Devices with PCbug11 and the M68HC11EVBU
By John Bodnar Austin, Texas
Introduction
The PCbug1software, needed along with the M68HC11EVBU to program MC68HC711E9 devices, is available from the download section of the Microcontroller Worldwide Web site http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/. Retrieve the file pcbug342.exe (a self-extracting archive) from the MCU11 directory. Some Motorola evaluation board products also are shipped with PCbug11. For specific information about any of the PCbug11 commands, see the appropriate sections in the PCbug11 User's Manual (part number M68PCBUG11/D2), which is available from the Motorola Literature Distribution Center, as well as the Worldwide Web at http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors/. The file is also on the software download system and is called pcbug11.pdf.
(c) Motorola, Inc., 1998
EB296
Engineering Bulletin Programming Procedure
Once you have obtained PCbug11, use this step-by-step procedure to program your MC68HC711E9 part.
Step 1
* * * * *
Before applying power to the EVBU, remove the jumper from J7 and place it across J3 to ground the MODB pin. Place a jumper across J4 to ground the MODA pin. This will force the EVBU into special bootstrap mode on power up. Remove the resident MC68HC11E9 MCU from the EVBU. Place your MC68HC711E9 in the open socket with the notched corner of the part aligned with the notch on the PLCC socket. Connect the EVBU to one of your PC COM ports. Apply +5 volts to VDD and ground to GND on the power connector of your EVBU.
Also take note of P4 connector pin 18. In step 5, you will connect a +12volt (at most +12.5 volts) programming voltage through a 100- current limiting resistor to the XIRQ pin. Do not connect this programming voltage until you are instructed to do so in step 5.
Step 2
*
From a DOS command line prompt, start PCbug11 with - C:\PCBUG11\> PCBUG11 -E PORT = 1 with the EVBU connected to COM1 - C:\PCBUG11\> PCBUG11 -E PORT = 2 with the EVBU connected to COM2 PCbug11 only supports COM ports 1 and 2. If you have made the proper connections and have a high quality cable, you should quickly get a PCbug11 command prompt. If you do receive a Comms fault error, check your cable and board connections. Most PCbug11 communications problems can be traced to poorly made cables or bad board connections.
EB296 332 MOTOROLA
Engineering Bulletin
Step 3
*
PCbug11 defaults to base 10 for its input parameters; change this to hexadecimal by typing CONTROL BASE HEX
Step 4
*
You must declare the addresses of the EPROM array to PCbug11. To do this, type EPROM D000 FFFF
Step 5
You are now ready to download your program into the EPROM. * * Connect +12 volts (at most +12.5 volts) through a 100- current limiting resistor to P4 connector pin 18, the XIRQ* pin. At the PCbug11 command prompt type LOADS C:\MYPROG\ISHERE.S19 Substitute the name of your program into the command above. Use a full path name if your program is not located in the same directory as PCbug11.
Step 8
After the programming operation is complete, PCbug11 will display this message Total bytes loaded: $xxxx Total bytes programmed: $yyyy * You should now remove the programming voltage from P4 connector pin 18, the XIRQ* pin. Each ORG directive in your assembly language source will cause a pair of these lines to be generated. For this operation, $yyyy will be incremented by the size of each block of code programmed into the EPROM of the MC68HC711E9.
EB296 MOTOROLA 333
Engineering Bulletin
* PCbug11 will display the above message whether or not the programming operation was successful. As a precaution, you should have PCbug11 verify your code. At the PCbug11 command prompt type VERF C:\MYPROG\ISHERE.S19 Substitute the name of your program into the command above. Use a full path name if your program is not located in the same directory as PCbug11. If the verify operation fails, a list of addresses which did not program correctly is displayed. Should this occur, you probably need to erase your part more completely. To do so, allow the MC68HC711E9 to sit for at least 45 minutes under an ultraviolet light source. Attempt the programming operation again. If you have purchased devices in plastic packages (one-time programmable parts), you will need to try again with a new, unprogrammed device.
EB296 334 MOTOROLA
HOW TO REACH US: USA/EUROPE/LOCATIONS NOT LISTED: Motorola Literature Distribution; P.O. Box 5405, Denver, Colorado 80217 1-303-675-2140 or 1-800-441-2447 JAPAN: Motorola Japan Ltd.; SPS, Technical Information Center, 3-20-1, Minami-Azabu Minato-ku, Tokyo 106-8573 Japan 81-3-3440-3569 ASIA/PACIFIC: Motorola Semiconductors H.K. Ltd.; Silicon Harbour Centre, 2 Dai King Street, Tai Po Industrial Estate, Tai Po, N.T., Hong Kong 852-26668334 TECHNICAL INFORMATION CENTER: 1-800-521-6274 HOME PAGE: http://www.motorola.com/semiconductors
Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and software implementers to use Motorola products. There are no express or implied copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits or integrated circuits based on the information in this document. Motorola reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. Motorola makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Motorola assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages. "Typical" parameters which may be provided in Motorola data sheets and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters, including "Typicals" must be validated for each customer application by customer's technical experts. Motorola does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Motorola products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Motorola product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Motorola products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Motorola and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Motorola was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part.
Motorola and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. digital dna is a trademark of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. Motorola, Inc. is an Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer.
(c) Motorola, Inc. 2002
M68HC11E/D

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of 68HC11

	To Download 68HC11 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .